You are on page 1of 399

SECTIC

AT&TCo

Standard

j5-170-000

Issue 4, March

Task Oriented

1982

Practice

(TOP)

D4 CHANNEL

BANK

START

NOTICE
This docUMOIIl h ellk
ATsiT - Proprietary, or WESTERN
ELECTRIC - Prtrprlerwy
P.rwa.t

t.

Judge Gre.ne,s

Ofdef

of

August 5, 1383

-,..,.90.
Ja..w
1. 1$% Arar *ifl =
10 w
,BrJlr and the Bell symbol, #M the excapllofls w MI
forth m that Order. Pufsuanl thereto, any reference to
,BELV antior the BELL 8ymbJl In lh18 dcc.ment la here
by deleted e.d %x,wngwl

Ptvntc(l ID 1 S A

TOP Comments l-lot Line (1 )$00-3344)404


8:00

a.m. -

4:00

p.m. Ewtern limo

Monday through Friday


-In North Carolinacall 919-727-3167

AT&TCo Standard

Task Oriented
Practice
(TOP)

04

CHANNEL

BANK

NOTICE
Thlt documenl Is either
AT6T . Pmprtebry, or WESTERN
ELECTRlC - Pmprfetmy
P!a.nl !0 Judge Gre+ne , O,Oer 01 Ag8t 5 19?.3
b~mne.g o. Ja...v
1 !984 AC3T W,II cum to .I@
Bell and the Bell symbol, w(lh !he ezcaotlos a, WI
form m thal Order Pursuant thereto any reforerm 10
OELL a.w. r m. 86LL 8ymkI,.
ml, emu- f,.
mby deleled anti mpunge@

Printed

in

U.S.A.

365-170-000
TITLE

PME

,f TPG I
I

0001

FIND

YOUR JOB IN

Acceptance

THE LIST

BELOW

THEN GO TO
NrP-002

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Alarm - AR Lamplighter,

AY, LOC, and REU Lamps Not Lighted-Clear

Alarm - AY and AR Lamps Lighted,


Alarm - AY Lamplighter,

LOC and REMLamps Not Lighted


Lighted

Alarm - No ARor AYLamp Lighted-Clear


AR Lamp -Lighted,

LOC, AY, orREMLamps

TAP-101

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TAP-101

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TAP-102

-Clear

AR, LOC, and REMLamps Not Lighted-Clear

Alarm - LOC or REM, AR and/orAYLamps

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Modes 2 or 40nly)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TAP-128

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TAP-129

NotLighted-Clear

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Settings

- Back-to-Back

Attenuator

Settings

- 4E&MERChannel Units

Attenuator

Settings

-Message

Service

Channel Units

-Determine

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DLP-540

Attenuator

Settings

-Special

Service

Channel Units

-Determine

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DLP-529

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TAP-101

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TAP-102

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DLP-525

AY Lamp -Lighted,
Capacitance

Tests-Connections

Channel(s)

-Service-Discontinue
-Test

Crosstalk

Facility

Data Errors

-Clock

Data Errors

-Dataport-Clear

DL,p-622

~-oo7

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

inMaintenanceBank

DLP-514

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DLP-626

- Establish

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

IWP-005

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TAP-lW

at Terminal

- System (Digroup)-Clear

DACS- Testport

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Channel Bank - Facility/System


Crosstalk-Channel-Clear

DLP-527

NotLighted-Clear

For-Make

inMaintenanceBank

Channel Unit Dataport

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LOCand REMLamps Not Lighted-Clear

LOC, AR, orREMLamps

Channel Unit -Test

-Determine

-Determine

TAP-101

Attenuator

AY and AR - Lamps Lighted,

Tandem Channel Units

-Clear

Office

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

at D4 Channel Bank-Establish

Signal-Verify.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TAP-113
NIP-O1O

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DLP-627

. . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TAP-118

Issue

1 MAR 1982
IXL
36S-170-000

TASK INDEX

LIST

PAGE 1 of

001

FIND

YOUR JOB IN

THE LIST

Data Errors

Voiceband

-Channel

-Clear

Data Errors

Voiceband

- System (Digroup)

BELOW

THEN GO TO

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TAP-109

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

TAP-113

Dataport

Channel Unit - Test

Dataport

-CHANLoopback

Test

From DSODP-Perform

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DLP-604

Dataport

-CHANLoopback

Test

From OCUDP- Perform

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DLP-601

Dataport

-Clock

Dataport

- DSODPLoopback Test From DSODP- Perform

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DLP-606

Dataport

- DSODPLoopback Test From OCUDP- Perform

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DLP-607

Dataport

- DSULoopback Test From DSODP-Perform

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DLP-603

Dataport

-DSULoopback

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DLP-600

Dataport

- OCULoopback Test From DSODP-Perform

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DLP-605

Dataport

-OCULoopback

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DLP-602

Dataport

Service

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

NTP-009

Signal

in D4 Maintenance

- Verify

Test From OCUDP- Perform

- Channel Bank -Condition

- Facility

/System

Discontinue

- Service

on Channels

at Terminal

Distortion-Channel-Clear.

DLP-626

Office

DLP-627

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

IWP-008

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

IWP-007

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

- System (Digroup)

- Clear....

Drop Side Testing-ConnectionsDX-Signaling

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

Test From OCUDP- Perform

Discontinue

Distortion

Bank..

mak

Resistance-Measure

Echo Return Loss Test-Connections


E&MERChannel Unit -Attenuator
Equal izer

Settings

Establish

-DACSTestport

Establish

-Facility

Facility

/System

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

TAP-113

e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

DLP-623

. ! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

DLP-524

For-Make

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DLP-525

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DLP-622

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DLP-528

Settings-Determine

- Determine

TAP-109

at D4 Channel Bank

at Terminal

Office

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

NIP-O1O

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Issuo

NTP-005

I MAR 1982
36S -170-000
IXL

TASK INDEX

LIST

PAGE 2 of

001

FIND

YOUR JOB IN

THE LIST

or Add - Channel

Establish

Service

BELOW

Out of Limits

- System (Digroup)

. . . . .,

TAP-109

-Clear

TAP-113

Bank - Distortion

Maintenance

Bank - Idle

Maintenance

Bank - Receiver

Maintenance

Bank - Signaling

Maintenance

Philosophy

Test - Perform

. . . .
. . . . .

Noise Test - Perform


est

Gain and Net Loss


Test - Perform
Bank - Clear
- Attenuator

NrP-oo5

TAP-128

- Clear

DLP-514

DLP.626

DLP-536

DLP-535

DLP-534

DLP-537

TAD-100

TAP-111

. . . .

DLP-540

for

..!.

- Determ ne

TAP-109

TAP-113

DLP-526

PBN Settings

- Determine

Phase Jitter

- Channel - Clear

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TAP-109

Phase Jitter

- System (Digroup)

- C ear

TAP-113

Precision

Balance

. . . . . ,...

- Perform

Settings

. . . . . . . . .
.

,...

. . . . . . . . . . .

AY Lamps Lighted

AR and/or

Maintenance

-Clear

THEN GO TO

Channel Unit Test - Perform

-Clear

Bank - Dataport

Noise -Channel

Maintenance

Channel Units

NTP-008

Bank - Channel Unit Test - Perform

Message Service

Maintenance

Maintenance

(Mode 2 or 4 Only),

Circuit

- Establish

Levels

Office

-Clear

NTP-006

- Terminal

-Channel

.
.

Facility/System

Out of Limits

-Discontinue

Levels

Office

Noise - System (Digroup)

- Terminal

MBALamp - Lighted,

. . . . . . . .

Facility/System

LOC or REM- Lamp Lighted

Network (PBN) Settings

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
- Determine

DLP-526

. . . . . . . . . . . .
~Issue

! MAR 1982

365-170-000

rASK

INDEX

LIST

PAGE 3 of

lXL
4

001

FIND

YOUR JOB IN

REMor LOC Lamp - Lighted


Resistance
Service

(Modes 2 or

- DX Signaling-Measure

- Channel(s)

Trouble-Channel-

Signaling

Trouble

Singing

Point

Special

Service

-System

(Digroup)

Facility

AR and/or

AY Lamps Lighted

- Clear

THEN GO TO

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . , ,

TAP-128

. . . . . . . . . . . , . . .,

DLP-52cI

. .

t4Tp.007

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
-Clear

Attenuator

- Attenuator

DACS-D4

Only),

For-Make

Channel Units

Tandem Channel Units

. . , . . . . . , . . . , , , . , , . ,.

Clear

Test-Connections

BELOW

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-Discontinue

Signaling

Testport

THE LIST

Settings

TAP-115

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TAP-116

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DLP-525

Settings

- Determine

for Back-to-Back

Channel Bank-Establish

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,

- Determine

DLP-529

. . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DLP.527

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MP-O1O

Issue

4 I MAR 1982
365-170-000
IXL

rASK

INDEX

LIST

PAGE 4 of

001

The D4 channel and maintenance banks are acceptance


tested
to verify proper installation
of the banks and to test
factory wired power circuits.
Any defects
found and not
corrected during acceptance testing
should be referred
to
the installation
group for correction.
Equipping the banks with
tests,
and establishing
circuit
order activities
or to establish
service
and, therefore,
are not

I
I Accept

plug-ins,
performing transmission
service are accomplished during
to establish
the facility/system
on the facility/system
a part of acceptance
testing.

ACCEPTAKE TASKS

D4 Channel Bank

Accept D4 Maintenance

Bank

PROCEM)RE
MJMBER

N1P-003

NTP-004

Issw

I MAR 1982
NrP
365-170-000

ACCEPTANCE D4 CHANNEL AND MAINTENANCE

BANKS

PAW

1 of

002

DO THE ITEMS

BELOW IN THE ORDER LISTED

NOTE: Any Defects Found and Not Corrected


to Installation
Group for Correction
1

Visually

Inspect

D4 Channel

Check Incoming Voltages

Test Power Wiring Using Voltage

During

or Maintenance

Indicators

Performance

Bank for Bowed Shelves,

To Channel

(Verifies

Misfitted

of This Procedure
Connectors,

FOR DETAILS,

GO TO

Should Be Referred

Wiring,

Etc

DLP-500

Bank
Correct

DLP-501
Voltages

and Grounds on Pins)

DLP-503

Issue

I MAR 1982
365-170-000
NTP

ACCEPT D4 CHANNEL BANK

PAGE 1 of

oo3~

DO THE ITEMS

BELOW IN

THE ORDER LISTED

NOTE: Any Defects Found and Not Corrected


to Installation
Group for Correction
1

Visually

Inspect

D4 Maintenance

Check Incomin~ -48 Volts

Test Power Wiring Using Voltage

During Performance

Bank for Bowed Shelves,

at Power Distribution
Indicators

Misfitted

Correct

of This Procedure

Unit Subassembly
(Verifies

Connectors,

FOR DETAILS,

GO TO

Should Be Referred
Wiring,

and 20 Hz Voltage

Voltages

DLP-502

Etc.

DLP-501

at TP2

DLP-530

and Grounds on Pins)

Issue

365-170-OQO

ACCEPT D4 MAINTENANCE

BANK

PAGE 1 of

NTR
1

004

DO THE ITEMS
1

Make/Verify

BELow

IN

THE ORDER LISTED

Cross-Connections

Between Channel

A. At DSX Patch and Cross-Connect


B. At Office

Repeater

Bank and Line Cross-connect

FOR DETAILS,

Facility
DLP-504

Bay

DLP-505

Bay

C. At ED-97446-11 Carrier

GO TO

Central

Cross-Connect

DLP-506

Field

INSTALLATIONOF PLUG-IN UNITS ANDTESTS FOR CHANNELBANK


NOTE: Two D4 Channel Banks Work Together in Mode 4 Operation.
Therefore to Establish
Mode 4,
All Channel Bank Applicable
Items Must Be Performed on Both Banks (Four Digroups)
2

If System (Digroup) Is Being Established


in Bank Having an Existing
Digroup In Service,
Go
to Item 13 and Perform as Necessary. Then Resume Procedure at Item 15. If Bank Has No Digroup
In Service,
Continue Procedure at Item 3

Remove -48 MAIN ALM, -48 MAIN 10A, and -48ABS Fuses From PDU Subassembly

Install

PDU. For Mode 4, Install

Install

48

Verify

Measure Voltage Between -48V Jack and GRDJack on PDU (Both PDUS for Mode 4)
Requirement:
-43 VDCto -53 VDC

DLP-549

Verify

DLP-560

With Switch

Operation

DLP.547
DLP.523

PDU in Both Banks

MAIN10A, -48 MAINALM, and 48ABS Fuses on PDu Subassembly

That Fuses Are Installed

(Both Banks Mode 4)


if Not Already

Installed
DLP.548

in PDU (Both PDUS for Mode 4)

of Fuse Alarm Circuits

on PCU Set to OFF, Install

PCU in PCU Slot

and Set Switch

DLP-550

to ON

10

Measure Voltages at PCU Test Points


Requiremefits:
+12V = 11.4 to 13 VDC
+5v = 4.5 to 6VDC
-12V= 11.4 to 13VDC

DLP-551

11

Install

DLP-552

12

Set Channel

TW Equalizers

ESTABLISH
FUANNCI

Counting

FACILITY

RANK

Options

on TW and Install

(SYSTEM)

TW

DLP-553

(Both TWS for Mode 4)

AT TERMINAL

OFFICE

HAVING

D4
EE%7%

DO THE ITEMS

BELOW IN

THE ORDER LISTED

NOTE: Some Plug-ins Will Be Installed


if Bank Has Existing
Install
RUS, TUs, ACUS, LIU (or LIU/SU)

Digroup

13
14

If OIU Is Provided,

OIU:

15
16

Install

Make/Verify

One Channel Unit

Measure Voltages at
+12V
Requirements:
+5V
-12V

Timing Options

(Any Type) Into

and Install

Any Slot

FOR DETAILS,

GO TO

In Service
DLP-554

of Digroup(s)

Otherwise

Continue

With Item 15

DLP-555

To Be Tested

PCU Test Points


= 11.4 to 12.6VDC
= 4,5 to 5.5VDC
= 11.4 to 12.6VDC

DLP-556

CAUTION:If Bank Contains Existing Digroup In Service, Care Should Be Taken Not To Disrupt
Service On That Digroup Vhen Performing Items 17 Through 23
NOTE: Tests of Items 17 Through 23 Are To Be Performed on Digroup(s)
Specified
on Circuit
Order.
If Only One Digroup Is Specified
on Circuit
Order, Tests May Be Performed on Both Digroup(s)
in Bank Per Local Company Option
17

Test Bank Alarms On A(XJCorresponding

18

Loop Digroup(s)
Note:

19

To Be Tested

to Digroup(s)

By Inserting

DLP-557

To Be Tested

Pin Plug Into Applicable

LP

DLP-516

Jack on LIU

If Trunks Are Connected to Bank At This Time, They Must Be Busied


Process Trunks When Bank Is Looped At LIU

Out as TPUWill

Perform Looped Receiver Gain and Net Loss Test on One Channel in Digroup(s)
To Be Tested.
Indicates
in Black Area for Receiver Gain and in Green-Black-Green
Area for Net Loss

Not
Requirement:

CAU

20

Perform Looped Idle Circuit


Noise Test on One Channel
23 dBrnc or Less
Requirement:

(Continued

ESTABLISH

in Digroup(s)

To Be Tested.

DLP-507
DLP-508

on Page 3)

FACILITY

04 CHANNEL BANK

(SYSTEM)

AT TERMINAL

OFFICE

HAVING

ISSUO 4

I MAR 1982
365-170-000
NTP

PAGE 2 of

005

DO THE ITEMS
21

BELOW IN

Perform Looped Distortion

THE ORDER LISTED


Test

on One Channel

in Digroup(s)

To Be Tested.

FOR DETAILS,

Requirements:

TABLEA

GO TO
DLP-509

TABLE A
POSITIONS

SWITOl

Send level
dB
on CAU

RETIREMENTS

56
46
36
26
22

o
10

20
30
40

dBrnc
dBrnc
dBrnc
dBrnc
dBrnc

or
or
or
or
or

less
less
less
less
less

&

Perform Looped Crosstalk

Test on One Channel

in Digroup(s)

To Be Tested.

23

Perform Looped Signaling

Test

in Digroup(s)

To Be Tested

24

If Maintenance Bank Is Not Provided or Is Already Equipped With Plug-in


Skip Items 25 Through 43 and Continue With Item 44, Page 5

25

Remove -48

26

Install

PDU

27

Install

-48 MAIN 10A, -48 MAINALM, and -48AM Fuses

28

Verify

29

Measure Voltage Between -48V Jack and GRDJack on PDU


Requirement: -43 VDc to -53 VDc

DLP-549

30

Verify

DLP-560

31

With PCU Switch Set to OFF, Install

32

Measure Voltages at PCU Test Points


Requirements:
+12V = 11.4 to 13 VDC
+5v = 4.5 to 6 VDC
-12V11.4 to 13VDC

INSTALLATION

AND TESTS

on One Channel

27 dBrnc Or Less

DLP-559

FOR MAINTENANCE
BANK

MAINALM, -48 MAIN 10A, and -48ABS Fuses From PDU Assembly

That Fuses Are Installed

Operation

Requirement:

DLP-51O

22

in PW Assembly

Units,
in Maintenance

in Maintenance

DLP-547

DLP-523

Bank
Bank

DLP-548

in PDU

of Fuse Alarm Circuits


PCU

in PCU Slot

and Set Switch

to ON

DLP-550
DLP.551

Issue

ESTABLISH

FACILITY

D4 CHANNEL BANK

(SYSTEM)

AT TERMINAL

OFFICE

HAVING

365-170-000

I MM_ 1982
NTP

PAGE 3 of 5

005

DO THE ITEMS

BELOW IN THE ORDER LISTED

TPU Equalizers

and Set Channel Counting

FOR DETAILS,

Install

34

Get 4E&MChannel Unit and Set Both T and R Attenuators

35

Install

4E&MChannel Unit

36

Install

Maintenance

37

Test Maintenance

38

Prepare

39

Perform Receiver Gain and Net Loss Test on Digroups A and B of Maintenance Bank. Requirement:
Indicates
in Black Area for Receiver Gain and in Green-Black-Green
Area for Net Loss

40
41

Perform Idle Circuit


Noise Test on Digroups A and B of Maintenance Bank. Requirement:
23 dBrnc or Less
Perform Distortion
Test on Digroups A and B of Maintenance Bank. Requirements:
TABLEB

in Maintenance

GO TO
DLP-531

33

in 4E6M Slot

Option

to SEQ
to O (Plugs

and Toggle Switches

to O Side)

Bank
DLP-532

Bank Plug-ins

DLP-557

Bank Alarms

Maintenance

DLP-533

Bank
CAU

DLP-534
DLP-535
DLP-536

TABLE B
SWITCH

POSITI~S
o

Send level
dB
on CAU

10

20
30

40
42

Perform

Signaling

43

Test Maintenance

Test on Digroups
Bank Test

REQUIREMENTS

56
46
36
26
22

dBrnc
dBrnc
dBrnc
dBrnc
dBrnc

A and B of Maintenance

Set and Monitor

or
or
or
or
or

less
less
less
less
less
DLP537

Bank

DLP-515

Alarm

(Continued

on Page 5)
Issue

ESTABLISH

FACILITY

)4 CHANNEL BANK

(SYSTEM)

AT TERMINAL

OFFICE

HAVING

MAR 1982

365-170-000

PAGE 4 of 5

NTP

005

DO THE ITEMS

BELOW IN

THE ORDER LISTED

FOR DETAILS,

GO TO

END-TO-END TRANSMISSION TESTS ON CHAW4EL BANK

NOTE: Tests of Items 46 Through 57 Are Not Required to Verify Operation of D4 Channel
Be Performed per Local Option on Digroup(s)
Specified
on Circuit
Order

Bank but May

When Bank Must Sit Idle


NOTE: Looping at LIU Extinguishes
All Lights On Bank. This Is Desirable
for Extended Period of Time Not Connected to Far End. When Connection to Far End Is Desirable,
Plug Must Be Removed From LIU
44

If End-to-End Tests Are Not To Be Performed at This Time, Leave Digroup(s)


Items 45 and 58. Otherwise Proceed to Item 45

45

Verify

46

Contact

47

At Line Side Cross-Connect


Facility
Such AS DSX-1, Remove (if Present)
QRSS Signal and 386B
Termination Plug Associated
With Bank To Be Tested. Verify Far End Has Done Likewise

48

Install
Tested

49

Un~oop Digroup(s)

50

Verify

51

Perform End-to-End

52
53

Perform End-to-End Signaling


Test
Perform End-to-End Net Loss Test on Channel Selected
in Item 48 on Digroup(s)
Requirement: CAUIndicates
In Green-Black-Green
Area

54

Perform End-to-End

Idle

55

Perform End-to-End

Distortion

That Line Facility

Looped at LIU and Perform

Has Been Established

Far End and Verify

That Far End Is Ready for End-to-End

Tests

Any Type D4 Channel Unit in One Slot Other Than Channel 1 or 24 in Digroup(s)
and Unseat Any Other Installed
Channel Units. Verify Far End Has Done Likewise
To Be Tested

To Be

By Removing Pin Plug From LT Jack on LIU

Far End Is Unlooped


Alarm Test on Digroup(s)

Circuit

Noise Test on Channel Selected


Test

NOTE: Two Additional


Channel Units
Crosstalk
Test
56

Perform End-to-End

Crosstalk

57

Perform End-toEnd

Impulse

58

Update Office

DLP-511

To Be Tested

Test

on Channel

Selected

Must Be Installed
on Channel

Selected

Interfering

Channel

in Item 48 on Digroup(s)

Noise Test on Channel Selected

To Be Tested.

in Item 48 on Digroup(s)

in Item 48 on Digroup(s)
Into

DLP-629
DLP-512

DLP-620

To Be Tested
Slots

to Perform
DLP-621

To Be Tested

in Item 48 on Digroup(s)

DLP-619

To Be Tested

Records
Issue

ESTABLISH

DLP-513

To Be Tested

FACILITY

D4 CHANNEL BANK

(SYSTEM)

AT TERMINAL

OFFICE

HAVING

MAR 1982

365-170-000
PAGE 5 of

NTP

005

DO THE ITEMS

BELOW IN

Get Channel Unit(s)

Set Channel Unit Options,

THE ORDER LISTED

for Channels

Assigned

Attenuators,

FOR DETAILS,

GO TO

to Service

and Other Controls

A, J98726 BA DPO

DLP-568

B, J98726 BB DPT

DLP-569

BC 4E&M

DLP-570

D. J98726 BO 2FXS

DLP-571

C. J98726

E. J98726 BE 2FX0

DLP-572

F. J98726 BF RPO

DLP-573

G. J98726

DLP-574

BG RPT

H. J98726 BH SDPO

DLP-575

I. J98726 BJ 2EbM

DLP-576

J, J98726 BK 2FXSLS

DLP-577

K. J98726 BL 2FXOLS

DLP-578

L, J98726 BM DPMO

DLP-579

M. J98726 BN PLR

DLP-580

N. J98726 BP 4ELMER

DLP-581

0, J98726 BR ES2T

DLP-582

P. J98726 BS ES20

DLP.583

0. J98726 BT 2E&M6

DLP-584

I
I Issue

----

MAR 1982

365-170-000

ESTABLISH

OR ADD CHANNEL

SERVICE

D4 CHANNEL BANK

PAGE 1 of

~ NTP
3

1006

DO THE ITEMS
R. J98726
(Co#td)

BELOW IN

THE ORDER LISTED

FOR DETAILS,

GO TO
DLP-585

BU ES3

S. J98726 BWRSCO

DLP-567

T. J98726 BY 4LSX0

DLP-586

U. J98726 CH DPT 600

DLP-569

V. J98726 DA DSODP

DLP-587

W. J98726

DB OCUDP

DLP-588-

X.

DC DSUDP

DLP-589

J98726

Y. J98726 DO DSODP 56KB

DLP-617

Z.

DE OCWP 56KB

DLP.618

GA SEC STA

DLP-630

All. J98726 GB SEC OFF

DLP-631

AC. J98726 SB 4FXS

DLP-590

AD. J98726

DLP-591

J98726

AA. J98726

SC 4FX0

AE. J98726 SD 2DXGT

DLP-592

AF. J98726 SE 4DX

DLP-593

AG. J98726

SF 4TDM

DLP-594

AH. J98726

SG 2FXSGT

DLP-595

AI. J98726

SH 410

DLP-596

AJ. J98726

SJ 2T0

DLP.597

AK. J98726 SK 2FXOGT

DLP-598
Issue

1 MAR 1982
365-170-000
NTP

ESTABLISH

OR ADD CHANNEL SERVICE

D4 CHANNEL BANK

PAGE 2 of

006

DO THE ITEMS
2
(Contd)

BELOW IN

THE ORDER LISTED

FOR DETAILS,

GO TO

AL. J98726 SQ 4ET0

DLP-599

A.M.J98726 SR 2FXS 600

DLP-572

AN. J98726 SS 2FX0 600

DLP-571

Test Channel Unit(s)

in Maintenance

Bank

NOTE: Test Cards Needed To Test All Channel Units


A. All Channel Units
B, Dataport

Channel

Except Dataport
DLP-514

Except Dataport

DLP-626

Units

If Channel Unit Requires

Install

If Channel Unit Is DSODPor OCUDP, And If You Are Control Office for Stand-Alone
Perform DSU Loopback Test
NOTE: In Many Cases Dataport Will Be Tested Remotely. The DSUDPIs Always Tested
A. From OCUDP

Channel Unit(s)

72 Volt Option
in Assigned

Per Word or CLRC, Verify

-72 Volts

Present

DLP-628

At D4 Bank

Slot(s)
Dataport

Operation,

Remotely
DLP-600

B. From DSODP

DLP.603

NOTE: End-to-End Test of Item 7 Is Not Required


Performed per Local Company Option

to Verify

Operation

of D4 Channel

Make End-to-End Net Loss Test on Channel(s)


Except Dataport Being Put Into
Go To Item 8
CAU Indicates
in Green-Black-Green
Area. If Dataport,

Verify

Update Office

That Drop-Side

Cross-Connections

Service.

Bank but May Be


Requirement:

DLP-512
DLP-561

Have Been Made

Records

Issue

365-170-000

ESTABLISH

OR ADD CHANNEL SERVICE

D4 CHANNEL BANK

PAGE 3

0+

1 MAR 1982
NTP
3

006

DO THE ITEMS

BELOW IN

Remove Channel(s)

Remove Channel Unit(s)

Update Office

THE ORDER LISTED

FOR DETAILS,

GO TO

From Service
(Optional)

Records

Issue

I MAR 1982
365-170-000
NTP

DISCONTINUE

SERVICE

ON CHAfWEL(S)

PAGE 1 of

007

DO THE ITEMS

BELOW IN

THE ORDER LISTED

Contact

Verify

That All Circuits

Are Disconnected

Verify

Line or Multiplex

Facility

Remove Power From Bank (When Required)

Remove Plug-in

Units

Update Office

Records

Far End and Request

Their

Assistance

in Turning

FOR DETAILS,

Down System

or Busied Out

Is Turned Down at Near and Far End of System


DLP-517

(When Required)

Issue

DISCONTINUE
CHANNEL BANK

GO TO

FACILITY

(SYSTEM)

AT TERMINAL

OFFICE

HAVING

D4

I WI

365-170-000
PAGE 1 of

1982
NW

008

DO THE ITEMS
1

BELOW IN

If Bank Has OIU-2 Installed,

THE ORDER LISTED

Go to Step 3. Otherwise

Read NOTEand Continue

FOR DETAILS,

GO TO

With Step 2

NOTE: An OrU-l Can Be Installed,


Removed, or Replaced Without Interrupting
Service.
However, When
Errors Can Occur When OIU-1 Is Removed. Therefore OIU-2
Replacing OIU-1 With OIU-2, Slipping
Should Be Installed
As Soon As Possible
When OIU-1 Is Removed
2

Option

If Office

and Install

DLP.555

OIU-2

Records Require

External

Timing,

Verify

Clock Signal

Is Present

At Bank

A. Using Voltmeter

DLP-608

B, Using Oscilloscope

DLP-627

Verify

That Subscriber

Loop Qualification

Tests

NOTE: Subscriber
Loop Tests Can Be Performed
to Gain Access to Subscriber
Loop
5

External

Update Office

Have Been Performed

From Channel Bank Using J98726MF Channel

Unit Extender

Records

1 MAR 1982

CONDITION

D4 CHANNEL BANK FOR DATAPORT SERVICE

36s-170-000
PAGE 1 of

] NIP
.
i 009

DO THE ITEMS
1

Obtain

BELOW IN

Test Apparatus
o

Voltmeter

D3/D4 Portable

THE ORDER LISTED

Listed

FOR DETAILS,

GO TO

Below:

(KS-20599 DVMor KS-1451O VOMor Equivalent)


Test

c Noise Measuring

Set - J98718A.L

Set - J94003C or Equivalent

* Patch Cords - 3P6A(2),

P6AD(2), 3P6D(1)

* Two Pin Plugs - KS-19531


2

Make/Verify
INSTALLATION

Cross-Connections
OF PLUG-IN

Between Channel

WJITS AND TESTS FOR

and Cross-Connect

DLP-504

Bay

CIIAMIELBANK

If System (Digroup) Is Being Established


in Bank Having an Existing
Digroup In Service,
Go
to Item 14 and Perform as Necessary.
Then Resume Procedure at Item 16. If Bank Has No Digroup
in Service,
Continue Procedure at Item 4

Remove -48 MAIN ALM, -48 MAIN lOA, and -48ABS Fuses From PDU Subassembly
.
Install
PDU

DLP-523

Install

Verify

Measure Voltage Between -48V Jack and GRD Jack on PDU


Requirement:
-43 VDc to -53 VDc

DLP.549

Verify

DLP-560

-48

MAIN 10A,

-48

MAIN

That Fuses Are Installed

Operation
on

ALM, and -48ABS Fuses on PDU Subassembly

DLP-547

if Not Already

Installed
DLP-548

in PDU

of Fuse Alarm Circuits

10

With Switch

11

Measure Voltages at PCU Test Points


+12V= 11.4 to 13VDC
Requirements:
+5V = 4.5 to 6VDC
-12V= 11.4 to 13VDC

12

Install

13

Bank and DSX Patch

PCU

Set to OFF, Install

TPU Equalizers

Set Channel Counting

For Mode 3 (Tl)


Options

PCU

in PCU Slot

and Set Switch

to ON

DLP-550
DLP-551

Operation

DLP-552

on TPU to SEQ For Digroup

Being Equipped

and I;stall

DLP-553

TPU

I MAR 1982
NTP
365-170-000

Issue

:STABLISH

DACS TESTPORT

FACILITY

AT 04

CHANNEL BANK

PAGE } of

010

DO THE ITEMS

BELOW IN

NOTE: Some Plug-ins

THE ORDER LISTED

Will Be Installed

[nstall

15

)ption

16

)btain Channel Units for Testport


Operation
Measure Voltages at PCU Test Points
+12V = 11.4 to 12.6 VW
Requirements:
+5V = 4.5 to 5.5 VDc
-12v = 11,4 to 12.6VDC

17

OIU

TUS,

ACtJs,

if Bank Has Existing

14

RUS,

for Loop Timing Using Either

Digroup

Digroup As Reference,
and Install

Digroup

Into

and LIU, for Mode 3 Operation,

FOR DETAILS,

GO TO

In Service
Specified

And Install

in Channel

on Work Order

DLP-554
DLP.555

OIU

Bank

DLP-624
DLP-556

CAUTION:If Bank Contains Existing Digroup In Service, Care Should Be Taken Not To Disrupt
Service On That Digroup WhenPerforming Items 18 Through 24
NOTE: Tests of Items 18 Through 24 Are To Be Performed on Digroup(s)
Specified
on Circuit
Order,
If Only One Digroup Is Specified
on Circuit
Order, Tests May Be Performed on Both Digroup(s)
in Bank Per Local Company Option
18

Test

19

Loop Digroup(s)

20

Bank Alarms On ACUCorresponding


To Be Tested

to Digroup(s)

By Inserting

DLP-557

To Be Tested

Pin Plug Into Applicable

LP

DLP-516

Jack on LIU-3

Perform Looped Receiver Gain and Net Loss Test on One Channel in Digroup(s)
To Be Tested.
Indicates
in Black Area for Receiver Gain and in Green-Black-Green
Area for Net Loss

Requirement:-

DLP-507

CAU

21

Perform Looped Idle Circuit Noise Test on One Channel


Requirement:
33 dBrnc or Less

22

Perform

Looped Distortion

Test on One Channel

in Digroup(s)

in Digroup(s)

To Be Tested.

To Be Tested.

Requirements:

DLP.508
TABLEA

DLP-509

TABLE A
SWIT~

POSITIONS

Send level
dB
on CAU

10
20
30
40

REWIREAENTS

56
46
36
26
22

dBrnc
dBrnc
dBrnc
dBrnc
dBrnc

or
or
or
or
or

less
less
less
less
less

I
ESTABLISH

DACS TESTPORT FACILITY AT D4 CHANNEL BANK

Issue

I MAR 1982

F=R%

DO THE ITEMS

BELOW IN

THE ORDER LISTED

23

Perform Looped Crosstalk

Test

on One Channel

in Digroup(s)

To Be Tested.

24

Perform Looped Signaling

Test

on One Channel

in Digroup(s)

To Be Tested

NOTE: Looping at LIU-3


25

Will Extinguish

Requirement:

FOR DETAILS,
27 dBrnc Or Less

GO TO
DLP-51O
DLP.559

All Lamps on Bank

If Faclity
Is Ready for End-To-End Connection,
If Not, Leave Bank Looped At LIU-3

DACSto D4 Bank, Unloop Bank by Removing Pin Plug From

LIU-3,

26

Update Office

:STABLISH

Records

DACS TESTPORT

FACILITY

AT D4 CHANNEL BANK

ISSUO 4

365-170~

PAGE 3 of

]--kAR 1982
,

1010

TROUBLE ANALYSIS

Trouble procedures
in this document involve
replacing
suspected plug-in units.
Except for
lamps the plug-in unit is the smallest
replaceable
item considered
in the trouble clearing
procedures.
Assumptions made in trouble clearing
are:
(1) Only one trouble

is addressed

at a time.

(2) Replacement units are in good working


order. (Most units can be tested in the
maintenance bank. Maintenance bank
transmission
tests are listed
in the IXL.)
(3) Test

equipment

is in good working

order.

LOOPIW

During trouble analysis


the bank is looped at the
ACUand not at the LIU. Modes 2 and 4 have a fast
loop capability
which is also used during trouble
analysis.
CMABNEL WIT

TEST CARDS

Test cards normally ordered with and stored in


the maintenance bank are used to test channel
units in the aintenance
bank.

MAINTENANCE

PHILOSOPHY

ER#w

[l] On ACIJ(s) with


alarm depress
ACOpushbutton

[2] Did
alarm
silence

Yes

No

Page 2

Yes

T
[3] Replace
blown fuse(s)
.

[4] Did
fuse blow
*
I

No

No

[5] SetFaJ
switch to OFF
then m

[6] Allow
system about
20 seconds to
restore

ISOLATE

AR OR FUSE ALARM

PAGE 1 of

11011

[8] Loop failed


digroup(s)
by
setting
upper
switch on ACU
to LT

TAP-106

No

[11] Set ACU


switch to NORM
and depress ACQ
on ACU if office
alarm sounds

Page 3
t--

ISOLATE

AR OR FUSE ALARM

(
\

[12] Did
bank originality
have AR and
AY alarm

[14] Report
trouble
in far
end or line
facility

Yes
H
/

II

No
v
AR

[15] Verify service is


removed from both
digroups and replace
equalizers
in TPU
following instructions
written
in equalizer
slots on TPU

[16] Verify
far end is
unlooped

Yes

I No

[ 19] Report
trouble is
in far end or
line facility

ISOLATE

AR OR FUSE ALARM

[18] Have
service
restored

Yes

No

[3] On Am(s)
set upper switch
to ~RM

Yes

[5] If desired to
operate in LL mode,
set upper switch on
ACLI back to LL if
not, leave switch
set to NORM

No

[2] On ACU(S) with


alarm, depress ACO
pushbutton and set
upper switch to LT
position

C&)

ISOLATEAYALARM

PAGE 1 of 2

Iloq

I L1u-2
I LIU-4

[7] In digroup(s)
with alarm, is
RCV lamp lighted

V--J

-F-

or

TAP-103

[9] Verify service is


removed from both
digroups and replace
equalizers
in TW
following
instructions
written
in equalizer
slots on TW

[10] On looped ACXJ(S),


set upper switch to
NORM,depress ACO, and
verify far end is
unlooped

No
w

C&Q

[11] Do
alarms
clear

Yes

[13] Have
service
restored
b

No

I
I
ISOLATE

AY ALARM

[12] Report
trouble
is in
far end or line
facility

I
I

PAGE 2 of

po2

[1] See
CAUTION1.
Replace first
unit listed
in TABLEA

seconds does bank


have RU unit with

No

[6] Unloop
digroup(s)
by
setting
ACU

Yes
*
[5] See
CAUTION1.
Replace next
unit listed
in TABLEA

[3] Install
original
unit

[7] Have
service restored
to any digroup
removed from
service

4
*

No
TABLE A
REPLACEMENT
PROCEWRE

[4] Have all


units listed
in TABLEA
been replaced

n
Ii#arepl--nits
UUT

ITU

!ACU

I
I

amxnam

If more than one RU


! is alarmed, skip toLIU

not alarmed, it must be


removed from service to

ACOmust be depressed
alarm after replacing
t If installed
in bank

Yes

on ACU to silence
some units

[8] Refer
to SD-3C304
to repair
bay wiring

/
/
/
/

/
CAVTION1
Replacing LIU,
/
SU, TPU, or OIU
will affect
/
service in botb
/
digroups
(4 digroups for
Issue

REPAIR

AY ALARM CAUSED BY COMMON EQUIPMENT

/
~

LIU-4)
4

I MAR 1982

365-170-000

TAP

PAGE 1 of 1

103

TABLE A

[1] Replace
first
unit listed
in proper column
of TABLEA
t-

[2] On looped
AtW(s), set upper
switch to _
and back to LT
then depress
ACO

[3] On LIU-2 or
LIU-4T,
depress

WIltlLIU-2

WITH LIU-4

LIU-2

LIU-4R

su (Upper
LIU-4T

(Lower bank)

su

[4] Does PASS


lamp light on
LIU

w.

No

LIU

FAIL

CONDITION

Yes

[5] On each Am,


set upper switch
to NORM.Have
service restored
to digroups removed
from service
4

No

[9] Replace
next unit

REPAIR

bank)

- Iave
~Ij
n
all
,. A
units In 11ST
.
.
oeen replacea

Yes

\
r
/

[8] Refer
to SD-3C304
to repair
bay wiring

[1] On LIU-2
LIU-4T,
omentarily
depress TST
pushbutton

[5]
Set upper switch
on ACUto NORM
and depress ACO
if office alarm
sounds

or

FAIL
+

[3] Are all


digroups
(2 for LIU-2
and 4 for LIU-4)
removed from
service

Yes

NO
*

[4] Have service


removed from
all digroup(s)

VERIFY

LIU

AND SU OPERATION

iii-)

Page 2

[6] Did bank


originally
have
AR and AY
alarm

[7] Report
trouble
in
far end or
line facility

[8] Did bank


have AR or AY
alarm

H~~:~nk)
1
t

I 191 Verify service


;s-removed from both
digroups (four digroups
for mode 4) and replace
equalizers
in TPU
following
instructions
written
in equalizer
slots on TPU [NY1E1]

Yes

[11] Verify service


is removed from both
banks and replace
equalizers
in TPU
in receive bank
following
instructions
written
in equalizer
slots on TPU

to -,
ACQ,

far
~-

depress
and verify
end is unlooped ~

Yes

[14] Have
service
restored
NOTE1
Equalizers
should be
replaced in TPU for
transmit
bank only
for Mode 4
4 I MAR 1982
TAP
365-170-000

Issue

VERIFY

LIU

AND SU OPERATION

PAGE 2

Of

105

[1] See
CAUTION1.
Replace first
unit listed
in TABLEA

4
1

No

seconds does bank


have RU unit with

[6] Unloop
digroup(s)
by
setting
ACU

Yes
v

[5] See CAUII(MN


1.
Replace next
unit listed
in
TABLEA

[7] Have
service restored
to any digroup
removed from
service

[3] Install
original
unit

I
t-

TABLE A

F
LIU(S)
Su(s)t

B
TPU
TU

OIUt

If any digroup in bank


DLP-552 + (2 banks for LIU-4) is
DLP-553
not alarmed, it must be
removed from service to
replace these units
DLP-555

be depressed
alarm after replacing
t If installed
in bank

* ACO must

[4] Have all


units listed
in TABLEA
been replaced

No

)
/

Yes

[8] Refer
to SD-3C304
to repair
bay wiring
t

/
/

on ACIJto silence
some units

/
/

CAUTION
1
Replacing LIU,
SU, TPU, or OXU
will affect
service in both
digroups
(4 digro~ps for
LIU-4)

REPAIR

AR ALARM CAUSED BY COMMON EQUIPMENT

/
/

[1] Unseat all


units in both
digroups except
PDU and PCU
t--

[2] Replace any


blown fuses
and set PCU
switch to OFF
then to ON

1
[3] Do all
fuses hold and
does FAIL lamp
on PCU remain
off

J-1
No

No

[4] Replace

Page 2

No

-/I

[6] Refer
to SD-3C304
to repair
bay wiring

[5] Install
original
KU
and replace
POU [DLP-523]

REPAIR

AR ALARM CAUSED BY POWER TROUBLE

[7] Was

Yes

[8] Go to
Step 12

replaced

-l+

No

[9] Starting
at far
left of bank and
working from top to
bottom, seat units
one at a time until
fuse blows or ~
PAIL lamp lights

to blow

-1

[11 ] Replace
any blown fuses
and set ~
switch to OFF
then to m

4-J
[12] Seat
remaining units.
Allow system
20 seconds to
restore

REPAIR

AR ALARM CAKED

BY POWER TROUBLE

I
[1] Contact far
end and request
help in performing
end-to-end
test

TABLE

TESTS USED TO FIND T~LE

T~LE
REPORTED

FIRST

Noise

SE-

CMOICE

Idle Circuit
Noise

CWOICE

Distortion

I THIRD CHOICE I FUTH

Crosstalk

CHOICE

Impulse
Noise

Level - Hi or Low Net Loss


Crosstalk

Crosstalk

Idle Circuit
Noise

TABLEA

Distortion

Distortion

Idle Circuit
Noise

test
trouble.
Page 2.

Voice Band
Data Errors

Idle Circuit
Noise

Impulse

Phase Jitter

Distortion

Idle Circuit
Noise

[2]
and
first
for
See

Refer to
perform
choice
reported
TABLEB,
1

[3] Are
requirements
met for test
performed
No

Cz&3

DETERMINE

TROUBLE ON CHANNEL

1---[4] Have all


test choices
been performed
for reported
trouble

Yes

Noise

I
Crosstalk
-

[6] Remove
test equipment
and report
trouble
is
cleared

No

[5] Perform
next choice
test

L=

TABLE B
EN)-TO-E~
REFERE?CE

Net Loss

DLP-542

Idle
Circuit
Noise

DLP.543

DLP.544

Distortion

Crosstalk

I
Impulse
Noise

DLP.544

CAU

indicates

23 dBrnc
28 dBrnc
26 dBrnc
O dB-56
10 dB-46
20 dB-36
30 dB-26
40 dB-22
Pad out
Pad A
Pad B

TESTIMG
FAR-EW SAM(

(DC) RMllIRH

-0.25
tO.25

or less
or less
or less
dBrnc or
dBrnc or
dBrnc or
dBrnc or
dBrnc or
- 56 dBrnc
- 36 dBrnc
- 24 dBrnc

D3 or D4
D2
DID
D3 or D4
D2
DID

to
dBm

less
less
less
less
less
or less
or less
or less

O
10
20
30
40
27
27
32
At

D3 or D4

dB-56 dBrnc or less


dB-46 dBrnc or less
DLP.544
dB-36 dBrnc or less
dB-26 dBrnc or less
dB-22 dBrnc or less
D3
dBrnc or less
DLP-545
dBrnc or less*
dBrnc or less
D3
63 dBrn: 1 count (or none)
DLP.546
in 5 inutes
(or less)
, At
--- 58 dBrn: 5 counts
in 5 minutes
1

*29 dBrnc is allowable

DETERMINE

WEAR-=

for first

interfering

TROUBLE ON CHANNEL

channel

D2

DID

or D4
D2
DID
or D4
D2
DID

FAR-E~ R~IREMENl

-O 25 to to 25 dBm
+6:75 to+7:25
dBm
+2.5 dBm
23 dBrnc or less
35 dBrnc or less
28 dBrnc or less
O dB-56 dBrnc or less
10 dB-46 dBrnc or less
20 dB-36 dBrnc or less
30 dB-26 dBrnc or less
40 dB-22 dBrnc or less
O dB.56 dBrnc or less
10 dB-46 dBrnc or less
20 dB-36 dBrnc or less
30 dB-28 dBrnc or less
40 dB-26 dBrnc or less
O dB-56 dBrnc or less
10 dB-46 dBrnc or less
20 dB-36 dBrnc or less
30 dB-26 dBrnc or less
40 dB-22 dBrnc or less
27 dBrnc or less
27 dBrnc or less*
32 dBrnc or less
At 63 dBrn: 1 count (or none)
in 5 minutes
At 58 dBrn: 5 count (or less)
in 5 minutes
I

test

[ 1] Verify channel
is not in service
and replace
channel unit
using same type
and same options

Yes

\
No

[7] Remove test


equipment and
report trouble
is cleared

1-

No

[3] Install
original
channel unit
?

[5] Have far end


install
original
channel unit

H
I

re~ved
from
digroup(s)
containing
faulty
channel(s)
[CAUTION1]

TAP-108

[4] Have far end


replace channel
unit using same
type and same
options

PAGE 1 of

I1O9

[1] Have service removed


if applicable
from both
digroups if bank has
LIU-1 or from digroup
with faulty channel for
LIU-2, 3, or 4 and loop
digroup at ACU
[DLP-558]

[2] Perform
looped test for
end-to-end
test
that just failed.
See TABLEA

[3] Does channel


meet test
requirements
of TABLEA

Yes

[4] Set switch on


ACU(S) to WRM
and have trouble
cleared in bank
at far end or in
line facility

No

TABLE A
L-ED

TESTS

DLP-609

Distortion

SEM
SEN)
SEm
SEm
SEN)

LEVEL DB
LEVEL

DB

LEVEL

DB

LEVEL

D6

LEVEL DB

at O = 56
at 10 = 46
at 20 = 36
at 30 = 26
at 40 = 22

Crosstalk

DLP-61O

27 dBrnc or less

Net Loss

DLP-611

Green-Black-Green

fmpulse Noise

DLP-612

O-1 count

DLP-613

23 dBrnc or less

Idle

ISOLATE

RETIREMENTS

PROCSUES

Circuit

Noise

CHANNEL TROUBLE

dBrnc
dBrnc
dBrnc
dBrnc
dBrnc

or
or
or
or
or

less
less
less
less
less

area

in 5 minutes

lsswe

PAGE-lofl

365-170-000

I MAR 1982
I TAP

/110

!;

Ontms

switch
ALAW

to
DISAB

l+

~~~es

--L
[3] Locate
and replace
blown fuse(s)

[4] Do
fuse(s)
hold

-(

---(

[6] 1S

Yes

Yes

~
FAIL
lamp OFF
/

\,

[7] On
MBALM
set switch
to mRM

No

No

4K&
lJHH[5] Reaiove
blown fuse(s) and
unseat all units
except PW
[NOTE 1]

C4
Page 2

[9] Remove
any blown fuse(s)
and unseat all
units except PW
[m
1]

&,

~,,,

To unseat 1A or 1S
MBTS units,
screws
must be loosened
at rear of bank
Issue

4 1 MAR 1982
TAP
365-170-000

CLEAR D4 MAINTENANCE

BANK ALARMS

PAGE 1 of

Ill

[ 10] Replace
any blown
fuse(s)

NO

[16) Replace
Pw [DLP-523]
and install
lOA,
AU, and +8ABS
fuses in order
listed

[12] Starting
with
PCIJ, install
units
one at a time
until fuse(s)
blow
[NOTE 2]
1

I
[13] Replace
unit that caused
fuse(s)
to blow
in step 12
[NCYIES
2, 3, and 4]

Noms
2. Switch on PCU
must be set to
ON after is installed
3. If 4EM unit is
replaced,
XMT and
RCV attenuators
must be set to
match original
4. If 1A or l*MBTS
is replaced,
panel switches
must be set to
match original

rJ=lrl
[14] Replace
blown fuse(s)
and set switch on
PCU to OFF and
then to ON
1

,,

CLEAR 1)4 MAINTENANCE

BANK ALARMS

Issue 4 I MAR1982
TAP
365-170-000
111
PAGE 2 0+ 3

[17] Replace
blown fuses

[18] Do
fuse(s) hold

Yes

No

4
[ 19] Install
original
PW
[DLP-523] and
refer to SD-3C290
to repair bay
wiring

CLEAR D4 MAINTENANCE

[20] Install
l%U and set
switch to ON

I
[21] Install
remaining units
and set switch
on MB ALM to
k

BANK ALARMS

[ 1] Replace
first unit
listed
in
TABLEA

-/

[2] Do
alarms
and/or
within

all
(AR, RCV,
AY) clear
20seconds

Yes
M

[3] on m
set
switch to

AU

/~

[6] Replace next


unit. If PCll
FAIL lamp is on,
set switch to OFF
and then to ON

TABLE
WITS

Ru

[4] Install
original
unit

Tu
Ru
Tu
4E&M
Am
Am
LIU
LIU

4T

w
w
TPU
MBALAI
OIU
Channel Unit

Yes

[7] Refer to
SD-3C290 to
correct wiring
problem
L

CLEAR TRANSMISSION

ALARM IN

1A MBTS

lB MBTS

~ITIONS

In Digroup with AR alarm on ACll


In Digroup with AR alarm on ACU
In other Digroup
In other Digroup
T & R attenuators
must have
plugs in O side
In Digroup A
In Digroup B
In LIU slot
If installed
in LIu4T slot
Right side slot
Left side slot
[DLP-531]
Set switch to ON
If installed
in OIU slot
Installed
in CUT slot.
T6R
attenuators
must have plugs set to
match original
channel unit
Has locking screw in rear of bank
Has locking screw in rear of bank

Q4 MAINTENANCE

BANK

TABLE A

Q
[1} Verify
channel is not
in service

FIRST

~ICE

SE-

Ct@ICE

Noise

TROIBLE
THIRD CHOICE I FOURTH CWl(

Crosstalk

Impulse
Noise

Noise

[2] Contact far


end and request
help in performing
end-to-end
test

[3] Refer to TABLEA


and perform first
choice test for
reported trouble.
See TABLEB

I
DETERMINE

TESTS USED TO F 0

TR~LE
REPORTED

h--(

test
I

TROUBLE ON SYSTEM

Leve 1 - Hi or Low Net Loss

Crosstalk

Crosstalk

Distortion

Distortion

I
I

Voice Band
Data Errors

Idle Circuit
Noise

Data Errors

Idle Circuit
Noise

Phase Jitter

Distortion

:~A$

for reported
tro.ble

I
I
I

1Idle Circuit
Noise
Idle Circuit
Noise
Impulse

Noise

Impulse

Noise

Idle Circuit
Noise

4+

[7] Remove
test equipment
and report
trouble
is
cleared

Crosstalk

TABLE
E~-TO-E~
lEST

NEAR--

REFERE?KE

Net Loss

DLP-542

Idle
Circuit
Noise

DLP-543

DLP-544

DLP-544

Distortion

DLP-544

Crcsstalk

DLP-545 :

Impulse
Noise

DLP-546

*29 dBrnc is allowable

for first

CAU

indicates

(D4)

TESTING

REWIR~

-0.25 to
-1- O.25dllm

23 dBrnc or less
28 dBrnc or less
26 dBrnc or less
O dB56 dBrnc or
10 dB-46 dBrnc or
20 dB-36 dBrnc or
30 dB-26 dBrnc or
40 dB-22 dBrnc or
Pad out - 56 dBrnc
- 36 dBrnc
Pad A
- 24 dBrnc
Pad B
O
10
20
30
40
27
27
32
At

less
less
less
less
less
or less
or less
or less

dB-56 dBrnc or less


dB-46 dBrnc or less
dB-36 dBrnc or less
dB-26 dBrnc or less
dB-22 dBrnc or less
dBrnc or less
dBrnc or less*
dBrnc or less
63 dBrn: 1 count (or none)
in 5 inutes
At 58 dBrn: 5 counts (or less)
in 5 inutes

interfering

channel

FAR- *

, D3 or D4
D2
DID
D3 or D4
D2
DID
D3 or D4

D2

DID

D3 or D4
D2
DID
D3 or D4
D2
DID

BAMt

FAR- ~

test

DETERMINE

TROUBLE ON SYSTEM

REWIR~

-0.25 to i-o 25 dBm


t6.75 to +7:25 dBm
+2.5 dBm
23 dBrnc or less
35 dBrnc or less
28 dBrnc or less
O dB-56 dBrnc or less
10 dB-46 dBrnc or less
20 dB-36 dBrnc or less
30 dB-26 dBrnc or less
40 dB-22 dBrnc or less
O dB-56 dBrnc or less
10 dB-46 dBrnc or less
20 dB-36 dBrnc or less
30 dB-28 dBrnc or less
40 dB-26 dBrnc or less
O dB-56 dBrnc or less
10 dB-46 dBrnc or less
20 dB-36 dBrnc or less
30 dB-26 dBrnc or less
40 dB-22 dBrnc or less
27 dBrnc or less
27 dBrnc or less*
32 dBrnc or less
At 63 dBrn: 1 count (or none)
in 5 minutes
At 58 dBrn: 5 count (or less)
in 5 minutes

m
Issue

I MAR 1982

[1] Have service


removed from both
digroups if bank
has LIU-I
or from
digroup(s)
with
trouble for
LIU-2, 3 or 4

riI

[2] LooP
digroup(s)
at AUJ
[DLP-558]

[3] Perform
looped test for
end-to-end
test
that just failed.
See TABLEA

Yes

[5] Set switch on


ACU(S) to NORM
and have trouble
cleared in bank
at far end or in
line facility

No

(4
TAP-123

TABLE
LOOPEDTESTS

A
RIWIREMENTS

PROCEDURES

SEND LEVEL
SEFU) LEVEL

DLP-609

Distortion

DE
DB

SEM)

LEVEL

DB

SEK)

LEVEL

DB

SEMI

LEVEL

DB

at O = 56
at 10 = 46
at 20 = 36
at 30 = 26
at 40 = 22

Crosstalk

DLP-61O

27 dBrnc or less

Net Loss

DLP-611

Green-Black-Green

Impulse Noise

DLP-612

0-1 count

DLP-613

23 dBrnc or less

Idle

Circuit

Noise

dBrnc
dBrnc
dBrnc
dBrnc
dBrnc

or
or
or
or
or

less
less
less
less
less

area

in 5 minutes

[
i

ISOLATE

SYSTEM TROUBLE

[---

Issue

365-170-000

~.I

.-

PAGE 1 of

----

dTAP

lAR 1982

.-

114

[1] See NOTE1.


Replace channel
unit using same
type and same
options

[2] Does
testboard
report
signaling
trouble clear

Yes

[3] Have
service restored

-0

[4] Install
original
channel unit

II

I
[6] Have far
end install
original
channel
unit

L[5] Have far


end replace
channel unit
using same type
and same options

TAP-116

NOTE 1
Proper signaling
conditions
to channe
unit may be verified
by connecting P6Ac
SIG cord to channel
unit and measuring
expected signaling
conditions
(voltage,
ground, or open)
at black 310 plug,
using VOM
Issue

MAR 1982

365-170-000

CHECK CHANNEL UNIT

FOR SIGNALING

TROUBLE

PAGE 1 of

TAP

1115

[1] Obtain SPTS


and install
in channel
unit slot with signaling
trouble (any slot if
entire system is not
signaling).
Verify far
end has done likewise

[2] Perform steps


of TABLEA and
have far end
observe lamps per
TABLEA
I

[3] Have far


end perform
steps of TABLEA
and you observe
lamps per TABLEA

[5] Remove SPTS

/
No

TABLE A
STEP

~TS SWITOf
POSITI*S
AT
OWE Em

Atol
1

Btoo
A toO
Btol

LAMPS LI@HTED
AT OTHER ~

(4

TAP-117

A only
B

only

CHECK SYSTEM FOR SIGNALING

TROIJBLE

I carrier
I

,.
I

[ 1] Have
service
removed from
both digroups
in bank

[3] Perform
looped signaling
test on failed
digroup using
SPTS [DLP-614]

Yes

[5] Remove
SPTS and
install
channel unit

ACU(S)

No
9

TABLE A
SPTS SWITQI
POSITIOUS

[6] Set switch

[4] Are
signaling
requirements
met [TABLEA]

[7] Replace
first
unit
listed
in
TABLEB

to

on

NORM and

and have trouble


cleared in bank at
far end or in line
facility

H :i:i::ti
kGZF=
I

LAN% LIGHTED

Yes

[9] Remove
and
install
channel unit
SPTS

( 10] Set switch


on ACIJ(S) to
NORMand have
service restored

&
I

CLEAR CHANNEL BANK SIGNALING

TROUBLE

[11] Install
original
unit

[12] Replace
next unit
listed
in
TABLEB

[13] Are signaling


requirements
met
[TABLEA, Page 1]

[14 ] Remove
Yes

SPTS and

install
channel

unit

No
-

[15] Set switch


on ACU(S) to
MOM and have
service restored

[16] Install
original
unit

[18] Replace
next unit

1-

TABLE B
lUtIT

TPU

AOJ

CU@ITIOMS

I
1

One per bank [DLP-5521 and IDLP-553]


In digroup under test-(one
per bank-in

Mode 1)

L IU

Su
OIU

If contained
If contained

in bank
in bank

SPTS

* ACO on ACU must be depressed to silence


alarm after replacing
some units

CLEAR CHANNEL BANK SIGNALING

TROUBLE

F%!%%

[2] Perform

DSODP,

entire

ow

use DLP-605

[3] Did near end


test pass

No

DETERMINE

LOCATION

OF DATAPORT TROUBLE

[4] Did far


test pass

No

end

Yes

[5] Remove test


equipment and
report trouble
is not in D4
system

[1] Replace near


end channel
unit with same
type and same
options

_--l--

[2] Perform near end


OCU loopback test
[DLP-602] from -P
[DLP-605 ] from DSODP

[3] Does
test

No

Yes

No

[4] Remove test


equipment and
have service

[8] Install
original
OIU

[5] Install
original

Ocl,mP

[ 10] Refer to
SD.3C304 to
repair bay
wiring

Issue

I MM 1962
,I TAP

365-170-000

DETERMINE

IF

NEAR END CHANNEL UNIT

IS

CAUSING

DATAPORT TROUBLE

PAGE 1 of

p19

[2] Do all
dataport
channels
have reported
trouble

[1] Does bank hav


any other working
dataport
channels

Yes

[4] Perform far


end OCU loopback test
b [DLP-602 ] from OCUDP
[DLP-605] from DSODP

[3] Have far


b end replace
OIU

No

No

[8] Have far


end replace
channel unit

[6] Install
original
unit

No
e

[5] Does
test pass
Yes

v
+
[9] Perform far
end ocu loopback
test
[DLP-602 ] from OCUDP
[DLP-605] from DSODP

test

[ 12] Replace
near end
channel unit

DETERMINE

IF

1.s2J

No

[11] Install
original
unit

CHANNEL UNITS

DATAPORT TROUBLE

[7] Remove test


equipment and
have service

pass

No

&

1-,

Yes

[10] Does

OR OIU

AT FAR END IS

CAUSING
I

PAGE 1 ef

11201

_L[ 15] Have far


end replace
OIU

[ 16] Perform far


end OCU loopback
test
[DLP-602] from OWDP
[DLP-605] from DSODP

[17] Does
test
pass

Yes

[ 18] Remove test


equipment and
have service
restored

No

Issue

DETERMINE

IF

CHANNEL UNITS

DATAPORT TROUBLE

OR OIU

AT FAR END IS

CAUSING

J MAR 1982
365-170-000
TAP

PAGE 2

0+

120

[2] Loop
di group
[DLP-558]

[1] See CAUTION1.


Have service
removed from
digroup(s)

dataport
test
[DLP.615] from OCUDP
[DLP.616] from DSODP

(mestestp
<
Page 2

No

I
(5] Replace
RU

w
I

[8] Refer to
SD-3C304 to
repair bay
wiring

/
/
/

/
CAUTION1
If bw?k has LIU-1
both digroups
loose service
when bank is
/
J ooped
/
Issue

I MAR 1982

365-170-000

DETERMINE

IF

COMMON UNIT

IS

CAUSING

DATAPORT TROUBLE

&

PAGE I of

TAP
2

127

[ 17] Remove test


Yes

equipment
and
have service

restored

No
t

[11] Have far


end replace

RU

[12] Perform far end


loopback test
[DLP-602] from-p
[DLP-605] from DSODP

)
I

[13] Does
test pass

dr

[15] Have far


end replace
TU

No

-@?z

[16] Rer)ort
trouble
in line
facility
or far
end bay wiring

DETERMINE

IF COMMON UNIT IS CAUSING DATAPORT TROUBLE

l--PA&

20f2

1121

[1] Were
you performing
crosstalk
test

Yes

[2] Replace
interfering
(transmitting)
channel unit

Yes

No

No

[4] Replace
channel unit being
tested (receiving
channel unit if
crosstalk
test
failed)

Yes

I No

.
TABLE A
REQUIREUENIS

FAILED TEST

Receiver

CAU in black

Gain

CAU in green-black-green

Net Loss
Idle

Circuit

Distortion

area

Noise

area

23 dBrnc or less
56 dBrnc or less - SEM) LEVEL DB at O
dBrnc or less - SEND LEVEL DB at 10
36 dBrnc or less - SEND LEVEL DB at 20
26 dBrnc or less - SEM LEVEL DB at 30
22 dBrnc or less - SEBm LEVEL DB at 40
46

Crosstalk

CHECK CHANNEL UNIT

27 dBrnc or less

FOR LOOPED TEST TROUBLES

Issue

I MAR 1982

365-170-000

PAGElof

i TAPI
1

1122!

Channe 1
Bank

[2] Unseat all


channel units
(except test
channel) in
digroup(s)
with
problem

Maintenance
Bank

C!Ek)

[4] Reseat
Yes
channel
units
9
one at a time
until test fails
No
w
[8] Reseat
all channel
units

w
Page 2

[5] Replace
channel unit that
@ caused failure
using same type
and same options

[6] Reseat
remaining
channel units

[7] Remove test


connections,
set
switch on ACU(S)
to F40M and have
service restored

Issue

365-170-000

CLEAR D4 CHANNEL OR MAINTENANCE

BANK LOOPED TEST TROUBLES

I MAR 1982
I TAP

[9] Replace first


listed
in
TABLEA, Page 3 and
allow 20 seconds
for alarm lights
to extinguish

[10] Are
requirements
met
per TABLEB, Page 3
for test that
failed

unit

Yes

[11 ] Remove test


connections
and
set switch on

No
I

[15] See CAUTION1.


Replace next unit
and allow 20 seconds
for alarm lights
to
extinguish
t

[12] If service
was removed for
trouble analysis,
have it restored

[13] Install
original
unit

o
+

No

[14] Have all


units of TABLE
A, Page 3
been replaced

/+ii+No
circuit
noise test
\

Yes

/-

[17] Refer to
SD-3C304 for
channel bank or
to SD-3C290 for
maintenance bank
to correct wiring
problem

(4Z3

IrT!l
I!i&4
CAUTION1
Both digroups of
channel bank
must be removed
from service
before replacing
LIU,
TPU,

Issue

SU, OIU,
PCU, or PW
4

MAR 1982

365-170-000

CLEAR 04 CHANNEL OR MAINTENANCE

BANK LOOPED TEST TROUBLES

PAGE 2 of

TAP

]123J

TABLE B

TABLE A

RIJ
TLl
KU

LIU
TPU

Su
OIU
KU
PDU
SPTS
4E&M
1A MBTS
I B MBTS

digroup under test


In digroup under test
In digroup under test (one per bank in Mode 1)
One per bank. Pin plug must be in LP jack
One per bank. [DLP-552] and [DLP-553] for
channel bank. IDLP-5311 for maintenance bank
If contained ii bank

If contained in bank [DLP-555]


Set switch to OFF and then to 0?4
Replace for noise trouble only [DLP-523
Signaling
test only
Maintenance bank only
Maintenance bank only. Release screw in
in rear of bank
Maintenance bank only. Release screw
in rear of bank
In

* I@ mustbe
replacing

FAILED TEST

CD?01Ti&4S

UNIT*

depressed
some units

on ACUto silence

alarm after

CLEAR D4 CHANNEL OR MAINTENANCE

Receiver

Gain

CALIin black

Net Loss
Idle

CAU

Circuit

Distortion

in green-black-green

area

23 dBrnc or less
-

SEND LEVEL DB
SEND LEVEL DB

at O
at 10

SEND LEVEL DB at
SEND LEVEL DB at
SEND LEVEL

DB

20
30

at 40

I 27 dBrnc

Signaling

Alarm

Noise

area

56 dBrnc or less
46 dBrnc or less
36 dBrnc or less
26 dBrnc or less
22 dBrnc or less

Crosstalk

Impulse

REOUIRE~S

1
Switch A to O
Switch B to 1
B lamp lights

Switch A to 1
Switch B to O
A lamp lights
Noise

1 0

to

count

in 5 minutes

1 ---

BANK LOOPED TEST TROUBLES

Issue

PAGE 3 of

MAR 1982
1 TAP

365-170-000
3

p3J

[1] Set switch


[2]

on w

to

OFF

PDU remove ALM,


10A, and -48ABS fuses
order listed

in

At

[3] On NMSset
FUNCTION

to

switches
BRDG,

DAMP, DBRN to

80

[6] Install
[5] Does
NMSindicate
55 dBrnc or
less

as follows:
NORM-DAMP to

and WTGto

C-MESSAGE

[4]

:EEEzE_J
back contact

of IOA fuse

holder

-48 MAIN -48A8S

IN
T

Yes

ALM,

and -48ABS fuses


in order listed
and at PCU set

[7] Refer to
SD-3C304 for channel
bank or to SD-3C290
for maintenance
bank to repair
bay wiring

BANANAPLU6 OR
35-TYPE CORDTIPS,
OR BAREMIRE TIPS

urns

31O

[8] Report
that office
battery
contains
excessive
noise

10A,

Pou

NOTE 1
Test cords must
be made up
locally

iOA ALI!

GRO

~PIN PLUG TIP

PROBETIP

FIG.

/-

/
/

SUPPLY FOR EXCESSIVE

NOISE

PAGE 1 of

/
/
/
4

1 MAR 1982

365-170-000

BATTERY

DANGER1
Office battery
(-48 volts) is
present at
fnse holders
Issue

CHECK OFFICE

TAP
1

124

ill See NOTE1.


lie~lace lamp
that did not light
as specified
in test.
If lamps lighted
that should-not
have,
go to Step 3

NmEs

[2] Does
lamp light
as required
in test

Yes

No
w
[3] Refer to
TABLEA and
replace first
unit listed
for
lamp under test
[NOTE 2]

E
TABLE A
LMP

CAL

FIRST

LWIT

1A METS *

Unit in
4E&M slot
!/F TRMT

or
VF RCV

Unit

in t

CUT S]Ot

1. Long nose pliers


may be used to
pull lamp out of
slot
2. 1A MBTS and
lB MBTS units
contain holding
screws that must
be loosened at
back of bank

SE-

lNIT

THIRD

lB M13TS *
lB MBTS *

1A MBTS *

Yes

WT

No

lNIT

1A MBTS *

lB

MBTS *
1

MC FAIL
or

18 MBTS *

1A MBTS *

MC PASS
MBA

\
] MBALM

]lAMBTS*IIBMBTS*

Push switches must be set


those of original
unit

t Attenuators
must be set
those of original
unit

CLEAR MAINTENANCE

to match

to match

BANK TEST

SET TROUBLE

[1] Refer to
TABLEA and
replace first
unit listed
for
lamp under teSt

[2] Does lamp


light or
extinguish
as
required
in test

Yes

No

[3] Install
original
unit

[5] Replace
next unit
?

w
No

[4] Have all


units of TABLEA
been replaced for
TABLE

Yes

C3b

FIRST

Lhw

s-

IMIT

lMT

Far end
yellow not
lighting

Far end Near end


lamp
Tu
DLP520

Yellow stays
lighted at
either
end

Near

THIRD

FauR1-tl

WIT

WIT

Far end
ACU
I

Far end
ACU

end ACU

Far end
ENC (DID)
I

end ACU for D2 or XMT6CONVSIG


for DID

Far

CLEAR END-TO-END

ALARM TROUBLE

Issue

i #

[6] Test
bank alarms
at near end
[DLP-541]

I [8] Have
trouble cleared
Yes
@ in bank at far
end or in line
facility

[7] Are
alarm
requirements
met
No

[9] Refer to
TABLEA and
replace first
unit listed

1[1 11 Notify

[10] Are
alarm
requirements
met
4

I
1

Yes

end that
repaired
to resume
end alarm

far
bank is
and ready
end-totest

No

[12] Install
original
unit

[14] Replace
next unit
TABLE A

LNIT*

RU
TU
ACU

TW
LIU
Su

* ACOon ACU must be depressed


to silence alarm when
replacing
some units

CLEAR END-TO-END

ALARM TROUBLE

PAGE 2 of
L

I 126i
1

[2] Are
requirements
met
per TABLEA, Page 2
for test that failed

[ 1] Replace
channel unit
at near end

No

[3] Install
original
channel unit

-1

I [51Have

far
end install
original
channel unit

I
~

[4] Have far

end replace
channel unit

CHECK CHANNEL UNIT

FOR END-TO-END

TEST TROUBLE

TABLE A
EM1-TO-E~
NEAR-EM

TEST

indicates

Net Loss

CAU

Idle
Circuit
Noise

23 dBrnc
28 dBrnc
26 dBrnc
O dB-56
10 dB-46
20 dB-36
30 dB-26
40 dB-22
Pad out
Pad A
Pad B

Distortion

Crosstalk
Impulse
Noise

*29 dBrnc is allowable

(D4)

FAR. E~

-0.25 to
+0.25 dBm

or less
or less
or less
dBrnc or
dBrnc or
dBrnc or
dBrnc or
dBrnc or
- 56 dBrnc
- 36 dBrnc
- 24 dBrnc

channel

REcRJIREMENT

-02 5 totO.25
dBm
+6:75 to +7.25 dBm
+2.5 dBm
23 dBrnc or less
35 dBrnc or less
28 dBrnc or less
~

less
less
less
less
less
or less
or less
or less

D3 or D4

D2

dB-56 dBrnc or less


dB-46 dBrnc or less
dB-36 dBrnc or less
dB-26 dBrnc or less
dB-22 dBrnc or less
dBrnc or less
dBrnc or less*
dBrnc or less
63 dBrn: 1 count (or none)
in 5 minutes
At 58 dBrn: 5 counts (or less)
in 5 minutes
interfering

FAR-EM

BAM(

,D3 or D4
D2
DID
D3 or D4
D2
DID

O
10
20
30
40
27
27
32
At

for first

TESTING

REUUIREtiENT

DID

D3 or D4
D2
DID
D3 or D4
D2
DID

10
20
30
40
O
10
20
30
40
O
10
20
30
40
27
27
32
At

dB-46 dBrnc or less


dB-36 dBrnc or less
dB-26 dBrnc or less
dB-22 dBrnc or less
dB-56 dBrnc or less
dB-46 dBrnc or less
dB-36 dBrnc or less
dB-28 dBrnc or less
dB-26 dBrnc or less
dB-56 dBrnc or less
dB-46 dBrnc or less
dB-36 dBrnc or less
dB-26 dBrnc or less
dB-22 dBrnc or less
dBrnc or less
dBrnc or less*
dBrnc or less
63 dBrn: 1 count (or none)
in 5 minutes
At 58 dBrn: 5 count (or less)
in 5 minutes

test

Issue

CHECK CHANNEL UNIT

FOR END TO END TEST TROUBLE

I MAR 1982

36S-170-000

TAP

PAGE 2 Of 2

127

[ 1] Depress ACO
pushbutton on any
ACUand set upper
switch to LT
position

[2] Did
alarm
silence

Yes

Page 2

No

Yes

[3] Replace
blown fuse(s)

[4] Did
fuse blow

TM-107
No

No
v

[5] Set PCIJ


switch to OFF
then

[6] A11ow

system about
20 seconds to
restore

REPAIR

LOC OR REM ALARM DISPLAYED

ON LIU

PAGE lof3

11281

181 On LIU,

be~ress
TST
pushbutton
and

observe
FAIL

PASS
lamps

[NOTE

NOTE 1

TST pushbutton

[9] Which
Page 3

lamp lights

and

PASS and

modes 4 and 4A

m
FAIL

[10] Replace
first
unit
listed
in
TABLEA

[ 11] On looped
ACU(S), set upper
switch to MORM
and back to LT
and depress ACO

TABLE A

MOE 2
LIU-2

[12] On LIU,
depress TST

Receive

[ 14] Set upper


switch on looped

PASS

ACU(S)

NORM.

to

Have service
restored

pushbutton

MOOES 4 OR 4A

Transmit

[15] Install
original
unit

LIU

LIU

[17] Replace
next unit

REPAIR

No

LOC OR REM ALARM DISPLAYED

ON LIU

lamps

are located
on
transmit
LIU of

on LIU

1]

and

FAIL

[16] Have
all units of
TABLEA been
replaced

Yes
*

[18] Refer to
SD-3C304 to
repair bay
wiring

[19] Set upper


switch on looped
ACU(S) to NORM,
depress ACO, and
verify far end
is unlooped

[20] Replace
equalizers
in TPU
following
instructions
written
in equalizer
slots on TPU and verify
far end is unlooped

-(

[21] Is LOC
or REM lamp
lighted on LIU

~~~~~e

[22] Report
trouble
in far
end or line
facility

REPAIR

LOC OR REM ALARM DISPLAYED

ON LIU

[2] Replace ACU


in digroup A or
B corresponding
to lamp A or B
lighted on TPU
[NOTE 1]

[1] Locate bank


with lighted
TPD-A andlor
TPD-B lamps lighted
(yellow) on TPU

*.
[3] On replacement
depress ACO
pushbutton
and
wait 25 seconds
for bank to restore

Am

[4] After 25
seconds are AR
or AY lamps

No

J-

Yes

[5] Which
lamps are
lij?hted
rl&E21

TAP-101
/

AY

&

T
J

NOTES
1. In Mode 1
operation
there
is only one ACU
per bank that
can be replaced.
It is installed
in digroup A
2. Original
AaJmay
have faulty LED
lamps. It can be
checked by
installing
into
maintenance book
and inserting
pin
plug into RCODE
on RU. AR or AY
lamp that does
not light,
may
be replaced per
DLP-520
1

CLEAR AUDIBLE

WITH NO AR OR AY LAMP LIGHTED

ON ACU

PAGE 1 of

. .

1129

[1] Record any defects found in the


following
steps so that they may
be referred
to installation
group
if necessary
[2] Locate the four shelves that will
mount D4 equipment in the bay [FIG.

1]

[3] Verify that shelves are tightly


secured and free of defects or
damage

[4] Verify
intact

Shelves,

PDU

[7] Is one D4
channel unit
plug-in of any
type available

that PDU subassembly is


and secured [FIG. 1]

No

[8] Inspect
for misaligned
or bowed
equipment
shelves

lYes
[5] Verify that all electrical
connectors
inside the shelves
are vertical
and secured

[9] Try channel unit in


slots labeled lB, 7B,
and 12B on top shelf
and 14B, 19B, and 24B
on next . . . etc, to
check for misaligned
or bowed shelves.
Remove unit

are broken or
[6] Verify that no connectors
have bent or broken contacts

. 94 BANK

SHELF ASSEMBLY

FIG. 1 - Bank Shelf

VISUALLY

INSPECT

04

CHANNEL BANK

Assembly

NOTE1
Careful inspection
should be performed
on each connector
for bent or broken
contacts

[11] Check operation


of writing
shelf by
pulling
shelf out
and checking side
latch. Return shelf
to closed position

[10] Is pull-out
writing shelf
provided between
second and third
banks (counting up)
[NOTE 2]
No

*
At

rear of bay:
[12] Verify that there are no broken
or unattached
wires

I
I
Rear-bay wiring
and terminals
checked

[13] Verify that there are no bent,


broken, or crossed terminals
on
any connector

[14] Verify
placed

that plastic
covers
behind each shelf

are
I
NOTE2
The space between
banks 2 and 3 in
some bays may also
be used to mount
either a D4
maintenance bank or
an ED-3C660
coaxnunications panel

VISUALLY

INSPECT

04

CHANNEL BANK

[1] At front of bay remove fuses


from power distribution
subassembly [FIG. 1]
[2] Obtain KS-1451O voltmeter
(VOM) or equivalent
and
condition
to measure Tdc
volts [DLP-521] [NOTE 1]

[7] Install
IOA fuse
and touch - black
Yes
lead to back contact
--e
of ALM fuse holder
and + red lead to
ground

[3]

Page 2

[4]
fuse holder,

ensuring

that

it

;;,=

FIG. 1 - Power Distribution

voltmeter
equivalent
be used

Subassembly

or
ay

Issue

4 I MAR 1982
DLP
365-170-000

CHECK INCOMING

VOLTAGES TO CHANNEL OR MAINTENANCE

BANK

PAGE 1 of 4

501

[S] Does
meter
indicate
43 to 53 Vdc

Yes

[12 ] Touch
- (black) lead
to side contact
of +8ABS
fuse holder

No

No
*
4
[9] Obtain
replacement
10A fuse
*

[11 ] Refer
trouble to
installation
group

*
[13] Does
meter indicate
43 to 53 Vdc

No

Yes

[10] Install
10A fuse
and touch black
lead to back contact
of ALM fuse holder
and + red lead to
ground

C!&c)

[14] Refer
trouble
to
installation
group

Issue

365-170-000

CHECK INCOMING

VOLTAGES

TO CHANNEL OR MAINTENANCE

BANK

PAGE

2 Of

I MAR 1982
DLP
4

501

and
[15] Remove test connections
install
fuses (match color bead

it )~
At rear of PDU subassembly:
strip,
remove
[16] Locate terminal
Dlastic cover, and notice holes
in plastic
shield [FIG. 2]

[19] Is 43 to
53 Vdc present
at both terminals

[17] See DAIWJER


1. Touch + (red)
lead to terminal 4

[18] Touch - (black) lead to


terminal 3 then to terminal 2
and observe meter each time

TERHINAL
STRIP
PLASTIC
SHIELD

0
i

Page 4

No

o
I

[ 20] Refer
trouble to
installation
group

II II I III 1

Ts 2

UUUUUUUUUU(J-UUUU
FIG.

f
DANGER1
85 VACringing
/
voltage stay be
present on 7S2
terminals 4 and s /
behind PW slot
4
Issue

365-170-000

CHECK INCOMING

VOLTAGES TO

OR MAINTENANCE

BANK

PAGE 3 of

1 MAR 1982
DLP

501

[22] Install
plastic
cover
H
&

[24 ] Touch one


lead of V~ to
terminal
S of
7S2 and other
lead to a
convenient
frame
ground

[25 ] Does
VW indicate
around 85 VAC

Yes

No

-@

[27] Bank has 20-Hz


wiring problem.
Correct wiring or
refer trouble to
installation
group
[m
3]
NOTES
2. If supplied,
20-Hz wiring
appears at ?S2
terminals
5 and 6
at rear of bank
[FIG. 2, Page 3]
3.20-Hz should be
wired as follows
to 1S2: 85 VACto
terminal 5 85 VAC
ground to
terminal 6

[26] Install
plastic
cover

CHECK INCOMING

VOLTAGES

TO CHANNEL OR MAINTENANCE

BANK

%Si!Ei

found in the
[1] Record any defects
following steps so that they may
be referred
to installation
group
if necessary
[2] Locate two shelves that will
mount equipment in bay [FIG. 1].
Normally these are between second
and third channel banks (counting
up)
[3] Verify that shelves are tightly
secured and free of defects or
damage

[4] Verify
intact

[5

r
\

Shelves, PDU
subassembly,
and
connectors
checked

Page 2

that PDU subassembly is


and secured [FIG. 1]

Verify that all electrical


connectors
inside the shelves
are vertical
and secured

BAY FRAREUORK

.
.
.
.

.
SHELF ASSEMBLY

[6

PDU

Verify that no connectors


are
broken or have bent or broken
contacts
[NOTE 1]

FIG.

NOTE1
Careful inspection
should be performed
on each connector
for bent or
broken contacts

VISUALLY

INSPECT

D4 MAINTENANCE

BANK

At

rear of bay:
[7] Veri~y that there are no broken
or unattached wires

Rear-bay

[8] Verify that there are no bent,


broken, or crossed terminals
on
any connector

[9] Verify
placed

that plastic
covers
behind each shelf

wiring

are

I
VISUALLY

INSPECT

D4 MAINTENANCE

BANK

Issue

I MAR 1962

[1] Get test

equipment

listed

in TABLEA

[2]

Verify that no plug-in


units are installed
into
bank to be tested (common
or channel units)

[3]

Verify that trunk circuits


are either not connected to
bank or jacked opened if
connected

[4]

On power distribution
subassembly remove ALM fuse

[5]

Install
PO SIM into D4 bank PDU
slot and insert BAT connector
into ALM fuse holder

Page 2

+*
/

TABLE A
[6]

Set ON/OFF switch

EOUIPBEMT REWIRED

to ON

VOLTAGE INDICATORS

TYPE

Comnon Equipment Voltage


Indicator
(CEVI)

J98726MA

Power Distribution
Simulator
(PD SIM)

J98726MB

PWR CONV SIM

.J98726MC

Channel Unit Voltage


Indicator
(WI)

J98726MD

Connector

ED-3C766

Access Unit

I
PERFORM POWER WIRING

RECOWHOED

TEST ON D4 CHANNEL BANK USING

Issue

f MAR 1982 1

y:sm

(-

Yes

flashing

No
No

TABLE B
LED

Yes

PUCTION

-48V output

50,51

-48V output

12,14

-48V

output

11,13

-48V

output

10
I 15,16

COtIJV1-48VPCU
1

10] Set PO
SIM to OFF
and remove
from slot
[

ALM

-48V alarm

20 Hz

20 Hz input

[11 ] Refer to
TABLEB for
correlation
of LEDs
and connector pins
to repair wiring
&

PERFORM POWER WIRING


VOLTAGE INDICATORS

PIN

TEST ON D4 CHANNEL BANK USING

47
to

bank

23,54

[12 ] Connect cord marked CEVI (supplied


with test equipment) to -20V IN
jack on CEVI and install
CEVI unit
into PCtJ slot
[13]
Connect other end of cord of
.step 12 to CEVI jack on
PD SIM

[14

[20]
On PD SIM
set switch to
OFF and remove

Verify CU switch on CEVI


is in center position

CEVI

[15

Operate silver
toggle
switch on top of CEVI
and observe that all LEDs

gi&E!EJ

[16] Release
of step

toggle
15

switch

Yes

[ 18] on CEVI
hold POS switch
to PCU position
until step 19 is
verified

[21] Refer to
TABLED, Page 7 for
correlation
of LEDs
and connector pins
to repair wiring

( $jyd )x1

Yes

Czib

NOTES
1. LED 14may light
2. LED 13 lights
I
only on banks
having printed
wiring backplane

I
t

PERFORM POWER WIRING


VOLTAGE INDICATORS

TEST ON D4 CHANNEL BANK USING

Issue

MAR1982

I
I

I
[22]

(h CEVI,
1ST

hold
switch to OPR
position
to
verify step 23
1

Yes

I
TABLE C

[24] Remove CEVI from Pa


slot and install
into
RUA slot
[NOTE3]\

BAM
POSITI~
(SLOT)

I No

[26] Refer to TABLEC and test


each common equipment
slot with CEVI using POS
and TST switches as
indicated

RU A

1,2,3,7,13

RU B

1,2,3,7,13

w
ACU A

1,2,3,7,13*

WH!i?ii?s
)

3PWRCOW
[25] Install
S*K in PCU slot 4

INITIAL
LIGNTED
LEDs

[30] Leave CEVI


in TPU slot
for next test

ACUB

thru
1 thru

TU A

1,2,3,7,13

TU B

1,2,3,7,13

LIU

right
connector
OIU
-

:LIU

TPU

side

thru

I.EDs LIGNTED
WITH POS
SWITa
IN
RU TU PDSITION

9,10,14

1,2,3,7
1,2,3,7

8
8

9,10,14

9,10

8
$

9,10
9,10
9,10

1,2,3,7
1,2,3,7

LEDs LIGNTED
WITH 1ST
SWITCM IN
DPR POSITIW

9,10

1,2,3,7

9,10

l,2,3,4,7,8,13t

9,10,14t

l,4,5,6,8,13t

9,10,14t

LED 13 lights only on banks having printed wiring


backplane
LEDs 13 and 14 may light if bank is connected to TCAS,
if OIU plug.in
is installed
in any other bank in bay,
or if bank is connected to a remote alarm display
system
: ED-3C766 connector access unit must be installed
into
LIU slot to enable testing
of right side connector
I No test required

NOTE3
SU slot may be
mistaken for RU A
slot. RU A is
furthest
slot to
left

Czzb

I
PERFORM POWER WIRING
VOlmTAGEINDICATORS

TEST ON D4 CHANNEL BANK USING

Issue

I MAR 1982

LEDs

1.4.5,6,

[31] Set CU sw
CEVI

to d

tested

(A

[32] See WARNING1. Connect cord


marked CUVI (supplied
with
test equipment) to -20V IN
jack on CIJVI and install
CUVI into channel unit
slot 1 for digroup being
esed~
[33] Connect other end of cord of
step 32 to CUVI jack on PO SIM

v
~

toggle
34

No

[34] Operate silver toggle switch


on top of CUVI and observe
that all LEDs are lighted
Replace any LEDs that do
not light [DLP-520]

[35] Release
of step

[361 Are CUVI


I thru
13
lighted
[NOTES4and5]

LEDs

NOTES
LED 12 should not
light on banks
with printed
wiring backplane
unless bank is
connected to 2ESS.
5. LED 16wil]
light
if 24 volts is
supplied to bank
from 2ESS

4.

[37] On PO SIM,
set switch to
OFF and remove
CUVI

switch
J

[38] Refer to
TABLEE, Page 7 for
correlation
of LEDs
and connector pins
to repair wiring

VARNING1
Care should be
taken vben
installing
CUVI
into channel slot
to protect
wiring
on CUVI
1
Issue

PERFORM POWER WIRING


VOLTAGE INDICATORS

TEST ON D4 CHANNEL BANK USING

I
I

[ MAR 1982

365-170-000
PAGE 5 of

I DLP/
7

15031

[39] On (XVI hold


switch to
OPR position
until step 40 is
verified
TST

No

[41] On FD SIM,
set switch
to OFF and
remove (XVI

Yes

[43] Move CIJVI to


remaining channel
unit slots for
digroup being tested
and repeat steps 36
thru 48 for each
channel slot

[42] Refer to
TABLEE, Page 7 for
correlation
of LEDs
and connector pins
to repair wiring

[44] Have
channel slots
for both
digroups been
tested

Yes

[45] Remove
test
equipment
m
and install

k?_-

[46] Set ~ switch on


to other digroup.
Install
WI
into
channel slot 1 for
digroup being tested
and repeat from step 36

CEVI

PERFORM POWER WIRING


VOLTAGE INDICATORS

TEST ON D4 CHANNEL BANK USING

-i

TABLE D FWKTIN

LED

CEVI

PIN

29
50
23
19
20
46
24
22
2
1
29
50
All leads
power and
leads
All leads
power and
leads

11
12
13

+5V circuit
-12V circuit
+12V circuit
-48V circuit
-48V circuit
48V circuit
12V GRD
48V GRD
5V GRD
Frame GRD
5V over voltage circuit
12V over voltage circuit
Foreign voltage or GRD

14

Foreign

15

12V GRD (indicates


foreign
voltage on GRD lead)
48V GRD (indicates
foreign
voltage on GRD lead)
5VGRD (indicates
foreign
voltage on GRD lead)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

16
17

TABLE

LEDs

voltage

~EDs

14
15
16

17

Foreign

18

5V and 12V GRD (indicates


foreign voltage or open
circuit)
SIG GRD (indicates
foreign
voltage or open circuit)/
frame GRD
48V GRD (indicates
voltage
on these GRDs

5:6
7,8,9,10
11
12

13
except
GRD
except
GRD

FWCTION

CUVI

+5V circuit
-12V circuit
RU lead
+12V circuit
-48V circuit
TPU leads
12V GRD
SIG GRD (TST switch in
normal position)/
5VGRD (TST switch operated)
SIG GRD (TST switch in
normal position)/
Frame GRD (TST switch
operated)
5V over voltage circuit
12V over voltage circuit
Foreign voltage or GRD

1
2
3

24

PIN

30
2
39
4

43,54
26,44,50,53
3
21
5
17
1
26,30,44,50,53
2,39
All leads excep
power and GRD
1cads
All leads excep
power and GRD
leads
5,3

voltage

22
2

When PD SIM and PWR CONV SIM are

circuits
are as follows: +5V
-12V = -32V, and -48V = -36V

LED

E -

in bank,

voltage

19

-15V, +12V = -8V,


20

21,17
1
15,27

When PD SIM and PWRCU4VSIM are

in bank, voltage
circuits
are as follows: +5V = -15V, +12V = -8V,
-12V = -32V, and -48V = -36V

PERFORM POWER

WIRING TEST ON 04 CHANNEL BANK USING

VOLTAGE INDICATORS

m
1

[1] Locate DSX-() panels and jack


circuits
for channel bank and
span line or multiplexer
which
are to be cross-connected
I
[2] Insert 258-type dunray plugs
in M@4jack for D4 bank and
MON jack for span line or
multiplexer
[FIG. 1, Page 2]

TL

lamp lights

for each
dumny plug

[4] Remove
dumuy plug
from one

[3] Get equipment per TABLEA and


make cross-connections
(TL
lights can be seen from behind
panels).
See FIG. 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5
for DSX-1 and DSX-lC, and FIG. 1, 2,
6, and 7 for DSX-2

TABLE A
EWIPMENT

REOUIRED

Bulk CrossConnect Wire

RE-EWED

twisted,
Y1 type
DSX-1 and DSX-lC)
shielded-RCN1261,
and Associates
(DSX-2) I
I

MAKE CROSS-CONNECTIONS

[9] Verify that


designation
cards
on DSX-() have
been filled
out
[FIG. 8, Page 9]

Tool

I Wire Wrapping
Too1

[6] Reinsert
dumny plug
in M jack

TVPE

Skinning

3-Pair
(for
3-Pair
Gore

--1

AT DSX-(

) BAYS

[7] Correct
wiring just
installed

I I
FRONT VIEU - 2-INCH PATCH ANO CROSS-CONNECT PANEL

FIG.

MAKE CROSS - CONNECTIONS

AT DSX - ( ) BAYS

PAGE

2 Of

I 504]

El
1

JUHPER BRACKETS
I.

J.

t
I

F==3

1.

JUMPER PATH

1
t

REAR OF DSX-() BAY

FIG.

REAR OF DSX-() BAY

Typical

Cross-Connect

REAR OF DSX-() BAY

Runs

Issue

1 MAR 1982
DLP
365-170-000

MAKE CROSS-CONNECTIONS

AT DSX-(

) BAYS

PAGE 3 of

504


MON JACK

LIGHTEO
TL LAtlP

OUT JACK

A%l

m+l

LIGHTED
TL LAMP
\
=

HON

OUT JACK

IN JACK

JACK

IN JACK
BACK VIEW OF 2-INCH PANEL

\
3-PAIR TWISTED JUMPER
YI CROSS-CONNECT MIRE

FOR CROSS-CONNECTIONSBETHEEN PANELS


(B5 FT fIIAX)
, SHOULO BE RUN OUT FANMING
STRIP TO CABLE RINGS(AT SIDE)

FIG.

MAKE CROSS-CONNECTIONS

3 -

AT DSX-(

BACK VIEU
[ OF 4-INCH
4 PANEL

b%
FOR CROSS-CONNECTIONSON SAME PANEL, FANNING
STRIP ANO HIRE TRAY SHOULO BE USED

ii

[-

Cross-Connections

) BAYS

(DSX-1

or DSX-lC)

TL

TL
-24V
OR
-48V
m

--4

P
(6-U)
.

A=
2

(H-6)
..
/1

P--

L
IL

(U-G)

11

(G-U)

4
MN
1

/-

(U-o)m

\/

LLWQ- H +
(u-o)

\/

5-*

31

(U-EL)
=

\/

1
+!
13

rl
(0-u) 1 *

1-

/-

T,
R

\\r__t!!L_J

OUT
1
z
/!

\/
TO 0S-1
Os-lc
LEVEL
LX(TSAS
REQD

-24V
OR
-48V
GRD

TO OS-1
Os-lc
LEVEL
CKTS AS
REQO

//x\\Lw!!.__l

?
;~;T~Mos-lc

SW-3 PAIR
TuIsTED

0s-1 OR Os-lc

POSITION
ON PANEL #2

ON PANEL #l

FIG.

4 -Cross-Connections

MAKE CROSS - CONNECTIONS

AT DSX - (

Sch-otic

) BAYS

(DSX-1

or DSX-lC)

PAGE 5 of

]504/

CROSS-CONNECTIONS
REQUIREO FROMOSX TO
CROSS-AISLE TERMIML
A
SIDE A

.
.

SIOE B

TI

TO DSX
CROSS-CONNECT
IN ANOTHER
AISLE

54321

T2

J.
i

R2

Ii

2==LJ

\
TO G
TO L

CROSS-AISLECROSS-CONNECT
TERMINALS

543211

~flON

JACK

4!!!P-+UTJACK
L

I(

BACK vIEUOF OSX


4-INCH PANEL

FIG.

5 - Multiple

Lineup

Cross-Connects

Issue

4 I MAR 1982
365-170-000
I DLP

MAKE CROSS-CONNECTIONS

AT DSX-(

) BAYS

PAGE 6 of

/5041

l.

IIONJACK
LIGHTED
TL

------4

1 543211
lliltl

543211
..\.\

L
-

i!\w

LAMP=

OUT JACK

IN

JACK

SHIELD

CUT

FIG.

MAKE CROSS -CONNECTIONS

AT DSX - (

QSX-2

) BAYS

OFF

SHIELD

Cross-connections

llON JACK

-4-44

TL

--w

(R-H)
3

t~

L?

GRD

(R)

N J

-i

(BL-U)

f\

TO DS-2

I_z_-u

CIRCUITS
AS REQUIRED

54
\

OUT

\/

2
~<

x
/\

II
II

Ts

\/\/
f /\

\/

><

(BL)

.R
1TO DS-2
CIRCUITS
AS REQUIRE

/\

/
/

n-t-v

6U - 3-PAIR
SHIELOEO
(RCN 1261)

THE SHIELD MLISTBE TERMINATE


THE EL
AT THE IN JACK HAVINO
AND EL-U PAIR.
FIG.

6 -

DSX-2

Cross-Connections

MAKE CROSS- CONNECTIONS

AT DSX - (

) BAYS

Issue

36S-170.000

1 NAR 1982
I1 DLP

PAGE 8 of

15041

112 ELK

1
E-6457

RECORD CARD
CHANNEL SANK ASSIGNMENTS
ON TOP PANEL (BANKS
1 AND 6)

cl~1; ~
6

118 ELK GROVE

04 CHANNEL BAY #7

CHANNEL BANK
60TTOM PANEL

ASSIGNMENTS
ON
1 AND 6)
(BANKS

DESIGNATION
CARDS
CHANNEL BANK
LOCATION
(RELAY

100 SCH

t
~
RACK)
-1
BL WD SPAN

E-6457

RECORD CARD
SPAN LINE ASSIGNRENTS
(1, 2, ANlJ13)

#2

202 CG2-UTN

4 W 1

112 OUN-FRA

Ill

CARO
REPEATER LOCATION
(RELAY RACK-SHELF)=

DESIGNATION

105 SLV-NBK

FIG.

AT DSX-(

\\
;0

00

13

MAKE CROSS-CONNECTIONS

- w

) BAYS

-.

7 Designation

RR 3.15
SHELF 3

Cords

RR 3.15
SHELF 3

(Exomples)

[1]
-.

On front of repeater
bay, remove
cover for span and bay cross-connect
strips
[FIG. 1, Page 2 (220/221 type),
or FIG. 3, Page 3 (206 type)]

[2] Use office records and equipment


stenciling
to locate D4 bank at bay
cross-connect
strip and span line at
span x-[FIG. 2, Page 2 (220/221
type), or FIG. 4, Page 3 (206 type)

[3] Get equipment per TABLEA and make required


cross-connections
between bay and span
cross-connect
strips.
[See FIG. 2 or
FIG, 4 for examples]

TAME

ROUI_

A
REWIRED

Bulk Cross-Ccnnect

MAKE CROSS-CONNECTIONS

AT OFFICE

REPEATER BAY

Wire

SHELF

IN AND OUT
OF SPAN LINE

no
ullllullnllllou
lNh+auomouaorl

4P

T b
OUT R
JUMPERS (22 GA.
TWISTEO PAIRS)

Oollallllnlluilnll
Iloollorlono

l-u

Jdj
TdOtl

O 0 0 II O 0 0 0 0 II O 0 0

Ilclooll

T
OUT ~

IN AND OUT OF
CHANNEL BANK

BAY AND SPAN


CROSS-CONNECT
STRIPS
(UNOER COVER)

llilllllonclo

Ilonootloocloonn
u n u o II o 0 II no

r
I

SIOE

1-

on

BAY
CROSS-CONNECT
STRIP

REPEATER SIOE

ORB

1
I

%11
T

on
II n Cl

REPEATER
SHELVES

on

1-

CROSS-CONNECTIONS

TERMINAL

SPAN
CROSS-CONNECT
STRIP

0000
000

orlo

IN

0000
+ Otlrlll

TO
OISTRIBUING
FRAME

R-

1
04 BANK

1 BAY
X-CONN

SPAN
X-CONN

JACK
FIELO
INTERFACE

I
RPTR

L . J
FIG.

1 - Location
220/221

of Cross-Connects
on
Repeater
Bay

Office

FIG.

- Cross-Connects

cat 220/221

Repeater

Bay (Examples

MAKE CROSS-CONNECTIONS

AT OFFICE

REPEATER BAY

Issue

] MAR 1982

365-170-000

] DLP ]

PAGE 2 of 3

505]

BK BAY
/(NO) \

IN ANO OUT
OF CHANNEL
BANK NO. 1

JUMPERS (22 GA
TUISTED PAIRS)~

u
n

c1
n

1
0

1 2 31
BK NO.
I

REPEATER
SHELVES

n n
II u

STRIPS
(UNOER COVER)

all
II u
u n

o
u

SHELF
L-OUT R-OUT
RT
RT
RT

R-IN
T

00
a o

SHELF

R-IN

TERM
T R

TR

IlrllJIIIJoo

II CID

0000000
0000000

Ollllonnll
0000000

13

SPAN
CROSS-CONNECT
STRIP

c1 00

REPEATER SIOE

ORB

SIOE

13I

Illlrlnonll
n o c1 o 000

10

BAY
CROSS-CONNECT
STRIP

n 00
on
0[

10

L-IN

CROSS-CONNECTIONS

TERMINAL

n
n

0000000
Clrlrlclllllll

0000
a n c1 n 000

5
BAY X-CONN

IN

&!:()~T

on
n a

TERM
TR

OUT ANO
OF SPAN

IN 11-000000000000
~ 00
0 U non
Ou

RPTR BAY (NO)


SHELF NO.

1
I
I

I
~

T+
I
FIG.

3 Location
of
Cross-Connects
on
206 Office
Repeater

:=

R-=
Bay

H
04 OIGROUP

BAY
X-CONN

SPAN
:
X-CONN

~
OFFICE
RPTR

1+
I

TO
DISTRIBUTIW

;+-

RAE

I
I

L . J
FIG. 4 -

Cross-Connections

at

206

Repeater

Bay

(Examples)
Issue

365-170-000

MAKE CROSS-CONNECTIONS

AT OFFICE

REPEATER BAY

PAGE 3 of

I MAR 1982
DLP
3

505

[1] Locate central


cross-connect
cabinet [FIG. 1]

[2]

Use office
stenciling

records and equipment


to locate D4 bank

~~:~:c:::::::::::=-kw
Y
I

TABLE A

EOUIPMENT REOUIRED

[3]

Get equipment per TABLEA and


make required cross-connections
between banks and span lines
[See FIG. 2 for example]

MAKE CROSS-CONNECTIONS

AT CENTRAL

CROSS-CONNECT

FIELD

RPTR BAY

DIGRP DIGRP

SHELF 2, 4, S

SHELF 1, 3, 5

~~~~r=
IN OUT

~~
T ----------------

-------------------------

IN R-----------------------------------------R
~5
----------------------

OUT

IN

T --------------------------------------------R --------

----------------------------

----------------T
T------------------------------------R
R-----------.---------------

T -------------------------------------R ----------

-------------------------------

SH ;

SH 3
T ------------------------R --------------------------

--------------------------------

T ----------------------R -----------------------

T --------------------R ------------------------I

T-----------------------------------------

..

CENT1(

CONN

TERMINAL

I \CENTX

SIDE

l\

-F
T

R
Cross-Connec

I
D4 DIGROUP

1 I BAY
.-.
x-c(JNN
II

AT CENTRAL

~L_._l OFFICE
X-CONN

1- -I L.

MAKE CROSS -CONNECTIONS

I
I

x-

Cross-Connections

CROSS-CONNECT

at

1+
I

FIG. 2 -

T
R

ORB

.-;

-----------------------------------

II
Ou

T
R

CONN

------------------------------------

REPEATER SIOE

T
-R

=
-L -J-----------------------------------T
b
-----------------------------------R

CROSS-CONNECTIONS

1 - Central
Cabinet

----------------------------------------

R-----------------------------------------R

T- ----------------------------------OUT
-------------R
R-* -------------------------

FIG.

n
IN OUT IN OUTIN OUTIN OUTIN OUT

T --------------------------R ----------------

SH 6
T

-------------------

OUT
IN

-T

04 BANKS
DIGRP D18RPOIGRPDIGRP

RPTR

TO
OISTRIBUTIM
FRAHE

OTS j
I

-J
Central

FIELD

Cross-Connect

Field

(Example)

SUMMARY
Make test connections
per FIG. 1. Insert pin plug into
R CODE on RU to test
receiver
gain. au must indicate
in
black area for receiver
gain or green-black-green
area
for net loss

[1] Obtain

test equipment

[2] Check calibration


[NOTE 1]

TABLE A

1
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED

per TABLEA

D3/D4 PORTABLE TEST


J98718AL
SET (PTS) With Channel
Access Unit (CAU)
I J98718AJ

2 Patch

Cords

1 Patch

Cord

PTS
CAU

3P6A
P6AD
KS-19531

r
[7] Does
indicate
in black area

connections

Page 3

per FIG. 1
No
*

[5] On CAU set SEND LEVEL DE switch


to OFF

PERFORM LOOPED D4 CHANNEL

No
-1

[8] Repeat
steps 3 thru
7

test receiver
[6] At digroup ta be tested,
gain by inserting
pin plug into R CODE
jack on RU and depress ACO on ACu

BANK RECEIVER GAIN AND NET LOSS TEST

NOTE1
When using CAU for
a series of tests,
the calibration
requires
checking
only once unless
CAU is

suspected

causinE

trouble

PAGE 1 0+

I
i

of CAU [DLP-518]

CAU

[4] Make test

II

Pin Plug

[3] On CAU set TEST to CHAN LINE and


REJ FLT to OUT

RECOMMEmEO TYPE

of

[50;

CHAMNEL UNIT IN
LOOPED DIGROUP

-1

0[
1ST

-1

W!Y

P6A0
CORD

/!? 1 ?\11

I
3P6A

Y
COROS

BLACK

LINE
\

FIG. 1

PERFORM LOOPED 54

CHANNEL BANK RECEIVER

GAIN

AND NET LOSS TEST

565-170-000

I lxPl

[9] Remove pin


plug from R COOE
jack on RU

[10] Test net


loss by setting
SEND LEVEL DB

switch to O
on CM

TAP-122
area
\

//

Yes
+
[ 12] Were you
directed
to test
receiver
gain and
net loss on other
digroups at this
time
\

No

IYes
[ 13] Move P6AD
cord to channel
unit in other
digroup to be
tested and repeat
from step 5

PERFORM LOOPED D4 CHANNEL BANK RECEIVER

Yes

transmission
tests
to be made at this
\

No

[15 ] Remove
test connections
t

GAIN

AND NET LOSS TEST

NOTE2
All transmission
tests can be
performed on looped
bank before removing
connections

suhmARY

Make test connections


per FIG. 1 and measure noise.
should be 23 dBrnc or less

TABLE A

Level
EQUIPMENT REUJIRED

Noise measuring
D3/D4

set

(NW)

per

J94003

TYPE

J98718AL PTS
J98718AJ CAU

PORTABLE TEST SET (PTS)

With Channel Access Unit

[1] Get test equipment


TABLEA

RECOME~

(CAU)

1 Patch Cord

P6AD

2 Patch Cords

3P6A

1 Patch Cord for NMS

3P6D

[2] Check calibration


of noise
measuring set (NAN) [DLP-519] ._.
[3] Make test
----

connections

per

llti.1

NMScalibration
checked, NMS/PTS
switches set
Page 3

[4] On PTS-CAU set

REJ FLT switch to


OUT, SEND LEVEL DB to OFF, and
TEST switch to CNAN LINE
No

[5] On NMS, set FUNCTION switch


NM600/900,
NORM-DAMP switch
to DAMP, DBRN switch to 85,
and weighting network so that
C-MESSAGE is aligned
with WTG J
[6

[8] Repeat
steps 3
thru ?

On NMSrotate DBRN switch


counterclockwise
for on-scale
reading

Issue

[ MAR 1982

DLP

365-170-000

PERFORM LOOPED D4 CHANNEL BANK IDLE

CIRCUIT

NOISE

TEST

PAGE 1 of

508

CHANNEL UNITS

IN CHANNEL

BANK
3P6A
COROS

D3/D4

\D4

TEST

SET

TST CKT
CAlk

i
1ST

PORTABLE

TST
0

SEND LEVEL D6

XMT

_ll

CAU
D

0(2)

+-l

fi_

PUR
P6AD
CORD

1/4 AMP

OQ
o

I
CORD

@nlz
310
~

EI

o
o

00
tlON

I----lm

El

OBRN

FUNCTION

I
FIG.

NOISE HEASURING SET


!

ISSUO

[ MAR 1982

DLP

365-170-000

PERFORM LOOPED D4 CHANNEL BANK IDLE

CIRCUIT

NOISE

TEST

PAGE 2 of

508

[9] Were you


directed
to test
noise on other
digroup at this
time

Yes

transmission
tests
to be made at this

No

.
No

[10] Move P6AD


cord to channel
unit in other
digroup to be
tested and repeat
from step 6

[12 ] Remove
test
connections
t-

bank before removing


test connections

PERFORM LOOPED D4 CHANNEL BANK IDLE

CIRCUIT

NOISE

TEST

%%%7%

suk?dARY
Make

test

connections

requirements

per

FIG. 1 and measure

noise

TABLE

for

per TABLEB

[1] Obtain test


TABLEA

equipment

EQUIPMENT

RECDUMENDED

set

(.NMS)

J94003C

D3/D4 PORTABLE TEST SET (PTS)


With Channel Access Unit (CAU)

J98718AL PTS
J98718AJ CAU

I 1 Patch Cord

/ P6AD

I 3P6A

2 Patch Cords
of noise
[3] Check calibration
measuring set (NMS) [DLP-5:

]7

[4] On NMSset FUNCTION switch


N/M 600/900, NORM-DAMP Swit;;
to DAMP, DBRN switch to 85,
and weighting network for
C-MESSAGE weighting

\
\\

NMScalibration
checked, NMS/FTS
switches set,
and connections
made
\

[5] On PTS-CAU set REJ FLT switch


to IN, TEST switch to CHAN
LINE, and SEND LEVEL DB switch
switch to O
connections

3P6D

1 Patch Cord For NMS

+A

[6] Make test


FIG. 1

TYPE

Noise measuring

per

[2] Check calibration


of CAU
IDLP-5181 INOTE 11
.

REQUIRED

I
L

[8] Are
requirements
of TABLEB
met

Yes

Page 3

+IL

per

[7] See TABLEB. Measure for requirements


for each position
of SEND LEVEL DB
switch. NMSDBRN switch must be
rotated counterclockwise
for on-scale
reading each time

TABLE B
SWITCII

Send level
dB
on CAU

POSITICNS

REQUIREMENTS

56 dBrnc or less
46 dBrnc or less
36 dBrnc or less
26 dBrnc or less

10

20
30

40

NOTE1
When using CAU for
a series of tests,
the calibration
requires
checking
only once unless
CAU is suspected
of

I 22 dBrnc

or

less

l%?%%

PERFORM LOOPED D4 CHANNEL BANK DISTORTION

TEST

PAGE 1 of 3 7509

CHANNEL uNITS IN CHANNEL BANK

EIJi)
Iii
TST

TST

D3/D4

3P6A
Cofiosy

PORTABLE

TEST

SET

JY

TST

_ll

TO D4 Clh

KNURLED
SIDE
ilJ

Cv

oI

/600n

P6AO
CORD

1 II

TERM I

Gil

1/4 AMP

00

3P6D
CORD

MON

Oclclo
310
T

GRO

WTG
c

El
OBRN

El
~T

@
FIG.

PERFORM LOOPED D4 CHANNEL BANK DISTORTION

FUNCTION
m
NOISE MEASURING SET

TEST

No

distortion

on other

transmission
tests
to be made at this

--_rL
[11 ] Move P6AD
cord to channel unit
in other digroup to
be tested,
set DBRN
switch on NMSto 85
and repeat from
step 7, Page 1

[13] Remove
test
connections
1

Yes

NOTE2
All transmission
tests can be
performed on looped
bank before removing
test connections
-

PERFORM LOOPED D4 CHANNEL BANK DISTORTION

TEST

SUmAlw

Make test connections


per FIG. 1. Measure crosstalk
on
one channel while sending tone into one interfering
channel
(TABLEB). Then measure again while sending tone into second
interfering
channel. Requirement is 27 dBrnc or less

TABLE A
EOUIPMENT

Noise Measuring
D3/D4

Obtain

test

equipment

per TABLEA
1

[2] On TPU locate option


digroup to be tested

stamping for
[FIG. 1]

[3] Determine which option (DID, SEQ,


or D2) has been selected
by location
of white plug

Set (NMS)

RECOMMIW)ED

TYPE

J94003C

(PTS)
J98718AL PTS
Access Unit (CAU) I J98718AJ CAU

PORTABLE TEST SET

With Channel
[1]

REOUIRED

2 Patch Cords

3P6A

2 Patch Cords

P6AD

1 Patch Cord For NMS

3P6D

1
Test and
interfering
channels
known

[4] Go to portion of TABLEB for that


option and select channel to be
measured

)
[6] Are channel
units provided in
channel to be measured \
and on one interfering
channel [NOTE 1]
\

es~

rJ---

[5] Using TABLEB, determine two most


likely interfering
channels

[7] Insert
channel units

NOTE1
!
Channels are
identified
by
number designations
below slots;
A or B
indicates
digroup.
Test and interfering
channels must be in
same digroup

&
Issue

MAR 1982
DLP

365-170-000

PERFORM LOOPED D4 CHANNEL BANK CROSSTALK

TEST

PAGE 1 of

510

TPU

TPU

WINDOW

olrJ

DID

B SEQ

B SEQ

D2

HHITE
PLUG
7

DID
OPTIDN
STAMPING/

A SEQ
[

D2

DID
A SEQ
[

02

D2

OIGROUP B = DID
OIGROUP A = 02

BOTH OIGROUPS
SET FOR 03/D4
FIG.

- Examples

r
PERFORM LOOPED 04 CHANNEL BANK CROSSTALK

TEST

Issue

I MAR

1982

On CM:
[8] Check calibration
of
CAU [DLP-518] [NOTE2]

[9]

Set TEST switch


to C3iANLINE
CAUready

[10] Set REJ FLT switch


to OuT

[11] Set SEtO LEVEL switch


to o

On WS:
[12] Check calibration

of MM [DLP-519]

[13] Verify that weighting network is


installed
with C-MESSAGE designation
aligned with WTG

f-

CAU

and
Page 4

[14] Set FWCIION

switch

to M 600/900
NOTE2
When using CAU for
a series of tests,
the calibration
requires
checking
only once unless
CAU is suspected of
causing trouble

[15] Set

[161 Set

PERFORM LOOPED D4 Cl+Al@iEL BANK CROSSTALK

TEST

Issue

365-170-000

/ DLP

PAGE 3ef6

151(!

I MAR 1982

[17]

test connections
per
FIG. 2, Page 5. Connect to
to be measured and connect

Make

to one

interfering

[TABLE

B]

channel

channel

[19] Is noise
level 27 dBrn
or less
[18] Rotate DBUNswitch on NMS
counterclockwise
for
on.scale reading

No

Yes

w
Page 6

No

1
[20] Repeat
steps 2
through 19
Pages 1 and 3

PERFORM LOOPED D4 CHHEL

Yes

BANK CROSSTALK TEST

[22] Move P6AD


second
interfering
channel and
repeat steps 18
and 19
cordto

R%%a

D3/D4

A_

IiiIii
i

3P6A
CGROS

CHANNEL BEING MEASURED

CHANNEL UNITS IN D4 DIGROUP

PORTABLE

TEST

SET
I

-l
-l -l -..11

Wf

11

1 I

%%%

@)clcl
310
T
L___!!/

El

mNo

El

GRO

DBRN

FUNCTION
ml
NOISE MEASURINGSET

FIG.

PERFORM LOOPED D4 CHANNEL BANK CROSSTALK

TEST

UTG
n

[23] Were you


directed
to test
crosstalk
on other
digroup at this time

No

[24 ] Remove
test connections

lYes

~25] Repeat steps 2


thru 7, Page 1, and
17 thru 21, Page 4,
on other digroup

PERFORM LOOPED D4 CHAIWEL

BANK CROSSTALK TEST

PAGE 60f6

151d

SUWARY
Alarm the system, first
in one direction
then in the other.
This is clone on D4 by plugging the R CODE jack on RU to
The other end will display a
produce
the red AR alarm.
yellow alarm. Alarms at both ends will clear after the red
alarm condition
is removed

[ 1] Establish
communications
far office and establish
digroup is to be tested

with
which

[2] Verify 3.position


switch, on ACU
for digroup to be tested,
is in
w
position
and there is no
plug in LP jack on LIU

[3] Obtain pin plug (such as KS-19531)


which will fit jacks on M
coutoon equipment

PERFORM END-TO-END

ALARMS TEST

Page

(4]

Insert pin plug into red


R CODE jack of RU in
digroup to be tested

Red RCV, AR,


and AM

TAP-126

[5]

momentarily
depress ACOpushbut ton
on ACU

Green ACO
lighted

Yes
i1
[7] Remove plug
from R CODE
jack.
Red RCV
and AR lamps off

[8] Is far end


yellow alarm
off after about
30 seconds
Yes

+
TAP-126

Page 3

PERFORM END-TO-END

ALARMS TEST

m
L

[9] Request far


end put their
bank into red
AR alarm status

[ 10]
bank
have
lamp

Does your
(near end)
yellow AY
lighted

TAP-126

Yes

[11

] Request

far

end restore
their
bank to normal
status
(no alarm)

[12] Is yellow
lamp off
in about 30
seconds

AY

No

(-+%-)

PERFORM END-TO-END

ALARMS TEST

1--

PAGE 30f3

1511

smiARY

per Fig. 1 to test channel. Verify


connections
are made at far end. CAU indication
should
be between -0.25 and +0.25. Verify that test indications
at far end are within specified
limits

Make

test

connections

[ 1] Establish
consnunications
with
carrier
tester
at far end

[2]

Determine
tested

channel

I
[5] Install
D4 channe
unit of any type
into channel slot to
be tested

to be

[3] Obtain test equipment


per TABLEA. See NOTE 1

Yes

-c4
Page 2

TABLE A

D3/D4
SET

PORTABLE TEST

(PTS) With Channel


Access Unit (CAU)

J98718AL

PTS

J98718AJ CAU

2 Patch Cords

3P6A

1 Patch Cord

P6AD

I
I

NOTE1
Test equipment
and procedures for
DID, D2, and D3
banks are given
in BSPS for those
banks.
Issue

MAR 1982

36S-170-000

PERFORM END-TO-END

NET LOSS TEST

PAGE

1 of 4

DLP

512

1
I

On 03/04
[6]

PORTABLE TEST SET (PTS):


of CAU

Check calibration

-58]CM
[7]

Set TEST switch


04AN LINE

[8]

Set

REJ FLT

to

calibrated
and switches
set on CAU

switch

to OUT

[9]

,,L%,,,H!!!J
I
I101
.
.

Make

test

connections

per FIG. 1,

Page 3

[11] Verify that test equipment is


connected at other office and
that test is ready to be performed --l

Test set
connected
to channel

[12] Does CAUmeter


indicate between
-0.25 and-1-O.25dB.
See FIG. 1, Page 3.
(Preferred
meter
indication
black area)
\[NoTE 2]
,

No

No

1 (-%m--[13] Verify that


test connections

P
PERFORM END-TO-END

NET LOSS TEST

are

NOTE2
If far end is DID
and not using 438B
plug in MATCN NET;
receive level will
be .25 dB hot and
read on right side
of CAu

%$!%

BLACK LINE,

1/,LAcKLINE

@!@i&El

-0.5 -0.25
PREFERREO
BLACK AREA /
, 04 PLUG-IN
CHANNEL
UNITS

EL
COROS

Iii ii)
1S1

10

03/04 PORTABLE TEST SET

.Q

SENO LEVEL OB
-4~30-2D-lo

KNURLED SIOEOF
PLUG IS PLUGGEO
INTD XMT JACK

+0.2~0.5
CROSSHATCH AREA
LIGHT GREEN

REJ FLT
IN OUT

TST

0
OB

OFF

qI

=zzCAU

CHA~~INE II

0
XT
OETR

P6ADPATCH~D
BETNEEN
04 CHANNEL lMITBEIN6
TESTEDAMI D4 TST MT

o
VOL

FIG. 1
i Issue

PERFORM END-TO-END

NET LOSS TEST

4 i uli

1982 I

L
+
TAP- 127

[15]
end
test
are

Have far
verify that
connections
correct

&

PERFORM END-TO-END

NET LOSS TEST

I PAGE
-- 4

of

15121

suMfARY

Make test connections


per FIG. 1, Page 2. Verify far end has
made test connections
to same test channel. Verify D4 bank
meets noise requirement of 23 dBrnc or less

I
[1] Obtain

test

equipment

(CAU)

Noise Measuring

Set

[2] Set switches on CAU as follows:


REJ FLT to OUT, SE~ LEVEL to OFF,
and TEST to CNANLINE
Connection

of NMS

I J98718AJ CAU

J94003C or
equivalent

[[ 3P6A

1 Patch Cord

P6AD

! 1 Patch Cord

I 3P6D

[3] Check calibration


[DLP-519]

Access Unit
(NMs)

per TABLEA

TABLE A

2 Patch Cords

made
Page 3

[4] Set NMSswitches as follows:


FIMCTION
to 600/900, NORM-DAMP to DAMP, DBRN to
85,

[5]

and C-MESSAGE

to align

with

WTG

per FIG. 1 and


test connections
verify far end has made test
connections
to
same test channel

Make

Issue
)

PERFORM END-TO-END

IDLE

CIRCUIT

NOISE

TEST

365-170-000
PAGE 1

I MAR 1982
1 DLP

0+

15131

3P6A PATCH CORDS>

k
1=

D3/D4 PORTABLE TEST SET

110
-

04 1ST

CI(T

REJ FLT
**,-,,7

TST

KNURLED SIDE OF
PLUG IS PLUGGED
INTO XHT JACK

+lii

D4 CHANNEL
UNIT

TST

7
EXT
DETR

Iii
TST

. ..-

u(!)
-48V ON

WK

II

OFF

P6A0 PATCH CORD BETUEEN


D4 CHANNEL UNIT BEING
TESTEO ANO04 TST CKT

%m

POUER CORD /

310

OIAi!
NORtf
DAHP

FIG.

CAL

>

NOISE HEASURING SET


Issue
}

PERFORM END-TO-END

IDLE

CIRCUIT

NOISE TEST

C-HESSAGE
ALIGNED
UITH UTG

OBRN

FUNCTION

E
&SAG

3P6D
PATCH
CORO

365-170-000

PAGE 2 of

1 MAR 1982
I DLP
1
3

15131

[6] Measure
noise by rotating
DB!?N switch on
NMScounterclockwise
for on-scale reading

[7] Is noise
level at D4 end
per TABLEB for
type bank at far
end

No

No

&
*

Yes

[9] Does farend noise meet


requirement
for
type equipment
they have

TAP-127

Yes

[10] Disconnect
test equipment

[8] Verify that


test connections
are correct
according to FIG. 1,
Page 1

TABLE B
W

AT

FAR ~

DID
D2
D3
D4

RSWIMEMTS

26
28
23
23

dBrnc
dBrnc
dBrnc
dBrnc

PERFORM END-TO-END

or
or
or
or

less
less
less
less

IDLE

CIRCUIT

NOISE

TEST

PAGE 30f3

1513

or SIG TESTS card.


Release settings
for one test
before performing next test.
Remove channel unit, set
MBALMto NOR, and depress switches 9 and 17 on lB MBTS

suMtARY
Set switch on MB ALM to ALARM DISAB. Install
J98726MM
or * extender to test ES2 or ES3 units.
Perform test per

VF TESTS

11] See WRNING 1. Perform


maintenance bank VF
calibration
and signaling
test check [DLP-538]

[2] Verify
s

et

switch
0

LA

on MB ALM
lAB~

[3] Verify

all switches on
are out (black
showing)

lB MBTS

1
P

[6] Are you


testing
ES2
or ES3 units
*

[4] Obtain VF TESTS and SIG TESTS


cards for unit to be tested
and verify that SIG TESTS
card(s) correspond to signaling
options selected
on unit [NOTE 1]

[5]

Read

instructions

on test

TEST CHHEL

&

Hu!___l

cards

set options on channel unit


switches on lAMBTS per card

and

UNIT IN MAINTENANCE BANK (EXCEPT DJITAPORT)

~:gj:ds,

~
~
/
;
,

VARNING1
Dataport units
will be damaged
when tested in
maintenance bank
ff 48Vis suppled
to pin 31 of SPTS
or CUT slots
4

/
/
/

~
/
U

Issue

365-170-000

I MAR 1982

I DLP

PAGE 1 of 4

[514,

[7] Obtain test


extender (J98726MM-I,L1
for ES2 or J98726$%4-l,LI
for ES3) and install
ES2
extender into SPTS slot
or ES3 extender into CUT
slot [FIG. 1 or 2]

[8] Obtain test


card for test
extender and
perform test
per instructions
on card

[10] Obtain
another extender,
8 install
in SPTS
slot,
and repeat
from step 8

[11] If using ES3 extender,


install
into CUT
slot

Yes

channel unit into


[12] Install
CUT slot or if ES2 or ES3,
into extender ~

~
L-i
[

[13] Perform W tests per instructions


on VF TESTS card

BAT

VF

SIG
@Q
TRK T R
LPTT
d

FIG.

1 -

ES2 Extender

TEST CHANNEL

UNIT IN MAINTENANCE BANK (EXCEPT DATAPORT)

FIG.

2 -

XDR
Q
Scf2B
ldB

NOR9

ES3

8 OFF
MO(

f?

Extender

[16] Release switches 1


thru 17 (black showing)

If SIG
is not
available,
go to step
Page 4 [NOTE 2]

TESTS card.
TESTS card

[ 15] Obtain replacement


channel unit and option
per circuit
order, if
applicable.
Repeat
procedure from step 12,
Page 2

(
-J\

[171 Do lamps
on AIBTS light
as required
per card

19,

k
/

[18] Obtain
replacement
channel
unit and option
per circuit
order if
applicable.
Repeat
procedure from
step 12, Page 2

NOTE2
If testing
ES2 or
ES3 unit,
extender
and unit must be
moved to SPTS slot
for signaling
tests
per instruction
on
signaling
test card
t

TEST CHAIWEL UNIT

IN MAINTENANCE BANK (EXCEPT DATAPORT)

Issue

4 1 MAR 1982
365-170-000
I DLP

PAGE 3

0+

1514

[19]
have
unit
this

Do you
another channel
to be tested
time

NO

[21]

channel unit and


extender if applicable

Remove

test
Yes

m
[20] Repeat
procedure from
step 4, Page 1
on channel unit
to be tested

[22] On 1S METSdepress switches


9 and 17 (green showing)
and verify all other switches
are out

MONlamp
lighted

ho

[23] On 1A MBTS release TRMT and


(black
ml
ATTEN settings
showing on all switches)

[24] On MB ALM

set

switch

)--i

ALNDISAB
lamp off

to NOR

[25] On all channel units to be put into


service,
set transmit
and receive
attenuators
per CLRC or WORD[DLP-565]

Issue

MAR 1982
DLP

365-170-000

TEST CHANNEL UNIT

IN MAINTENANCE

BANK

(EXCEPT

DATAPORT)

PAGE 4 of

514

[1] On MBALMunit, verify


that switch is in
ALARM DISAB position
[2] Verify that push switches
1 thru 17 on lB MBTS are extended
(black showing) and there is no
unit in CUT position

I
[4] Do lamps
light per
TABLEA
i

[3] Perform tests 1 thru 8


of TABLEA by depressing
required push switches
on lB METS and observing
lamps. Release setting
for
each test before going
to next one in sequence

Yes

L
No

No

[8] Release switches


2 and 10 (black
showing) and depress
switch 9 (green
showing)

Page 2

No

L3

[7] Refer to
SD-3C290 to
repair bay
wiring

[5] Install
new LED lamp
[DLP-520] and
repeat steps
2, 3, and 4

TABLE A
TEST

t[6] Replace lBMBTS


(loosen retaining
screw on rear)
and repeat steps
2, 3, and 4

SWIT~ES

DEPRESSEO

LAMPS LIGHTED
ON lB MBTS

1 and 2

C and D

1, 2, and3

A and F

1 and 4

C and F

2 and 4

A and D

5 and 6

20 Hz

7, 8, and 9

H and J

1 and 10

C and F

2 and 10

A and D

* Applicable
if 20-Hz fuses
provided on PDU
I

TEST

MAINTENANCE BANK TEST

SET AND MONITOR ALARM

Issue4

are

I MAR 1982

365-170-000

PAGE lof5

t DLP

1515

LED INDICATORS
I

[9] On IBMBTS
depress switch 12
(green showing)
[NOTE 1]

~llc
1A RSTS

800R-OUT
600Q-IN #

~1

[12] Verify that all white


plugs are placed on zero
side of T and R attenuators
(inside 4E&M) [DLP-565] and
install
unit into CUT slot

--k
FAIL

VF=
TR?!T

RCV

0000

W-OUT
4U-I&

[11] Remove 4E&M unit


from 4ELMslot

PASS

fl

CAL
00

HOH
M
TST

TRMT
ATTE-

4E&Min CUT
slot;
1A M6TS
4W, 600fl,
and
1.12.8
in

RCV

ATTEN

FIG.

1 -

1A MBTS Switches

(13] See FIG. 1. Depress switches


1S and 19 on 1A MBTS to
provide 4W and 600ff
[14] See FIG. 1. Depress

all

?iHikEEL-1

TEST MAINTENANCE

BANK TEST SET AND MONITOR ALARM

NOTE1
Switches 10 and 11
operate independent
of one another
but 12 thru 17
interact.
Pressing
one will release
prior setting

%!!%%%

[15] On lB MBTS
depress switches
10 and 15 (green
showing); switch
9 still
in

lamp
lighted on

TRMT

TAP-125

1A MBTS
Yes

[17]

On lB KBTS

depress

switch

16;

switches

and

10

still

RCV lamp
9

lighted

in

1A MBTS

TAP.125

on

Yes

[ 19] Have steps


15 thru 18 been
performed using both

4EW

and

channel

Yes

[22] Remove
unit
from CUT
slot

2E&M

2E&M

units

[23] Verify
that 4E&M
unit
is in
4E&M slot

[20] Is
2EbM channel
unit available
for this test

No
*
/

[21 ] Return
4E&Munit
to 4E&M
s lot

T
Page 5
I

Yes

CEib
Issue

1 MAR 1962
365-170-000
~ DLP

TEST MAINTENANCE

BANK TEST SET AND MONITOR ALARM

PAGE 3

0+

1515

[24] Return

4E&Munit

to 4E6M slot

[25] Verify that all white plugs are placed


on zero side of T and R attenuators
inside 2E&Mchannel unit [DLP-565]
in CUT
slot,
1A MBTS2w, 900fl, and

2E&M

[26] Verify all TRMTATTEN and RCV ATTEN


switches on 1A MBTSare depressed
(green showing)

[29] Go to
step 15,

[27] Release switches (black showing) 18 and 19


on 1A METS for 2W, 900fl [FIG. 1, Page 2] >
[28] Verify that either option X or Z is set in
2E6M unit and install
unit into M slot
[DLP-576]

Issue

4 1 MAR1982
I DLP

365-170-000

TEST MAINTENANCE BANK TEST

SET AND MQNITOR ALARM

PAGE 4

Of

/515

[30] On 16 MBTS
release switch 10
and depress switch
17; switch 9
still
in

[32] 1S MBA
lamp on MB

TAP-125

[33] On lB #BTS
depress switches
11 and 13 (green
showing; switch 9
still
in)

&

PASS lamp
lighted

[37]

On lB MBTS

release

switch

11
NONlamp

[38] On lB MBTSdepress
switch 9 still
in

switch

[39] Release any switches that


depressed on 1A MBTS
[40]

On MB ALM unit,

place

on

1A MBTS
1

17;
1A MBTS -NON
lamp on;
1A MBTS- switches out;
MB ALM - WR

are

switch

in NORposition
~

TEST MAINTENANCE

BANK TEST SET AND MONITOR ALARM

[ Issue

I
I

I MAR 1982 1

365-170-000
PAGE 5 of

I DLP i
5

1515]

[1] Is bank
operating
in
mode 3 (Identified
by LIu-3 in
LIU Slot)

NCJ

[2] See t&YIE1. Insert


pin plug (such as
KS-19531) to provide
looping (or remove plug
to remove looping) in
LP jack of LIU

Yes

[4] See IWE 1, Insert pin


plug (such as KS-19531)
to provide looping (or
remove plug to remove
looping) at LP-A and
LP-B jacks on LIU-3

[3] Are you


preparing both
digroup A and B
for service

1=

[5] See NOTE1. Insert pin


plug (such as KS-19531)
to provide looping (or
remove plug to remove
looping) at LP jack (either
LP-A or LP-B) on LIU-3
corresponding
to digroup
you are working with

--i

NOTE 1
Trunk circuits
(if
connected already)
may begin pumping
while the bank is
in preservice
loop,
This is recognized
by relay chatter
in
channel units and is
stopped by plugging
trunk
FTP (force

processing)
on ACU

LOOP 04 CHAWEL

BANK AT LIU

2!!!!SR

jack(s)

ACO, FAIL,

[1] Operate

switch

on FCU

OFpositiOn~

e-i
4

[2] Remove -46 MAINfuses


(ALMfirst,
then 10A)
and -40 ABS fuse from
FOU subassembly

All

kmps Off

m
1

[1] 1S J98718AL
portable
test set
to be used
*

IYes

[2] Open
portable test
[FIG. 1] and
remove cords

set

FIG.

s
hti

[FIG. 1]
installed
in
portable
test

1 -

Portable

Test

Set

Equipped

With

CAU

Yes
set
/

No

[5] Connect power cord to 115V,


60-H2 power outlet
1

[4] Obtain CAU


from hot spare
and maintenance
panel in D3 area
and install
in
portable test set

[6] Set PWR switch

on portable

estsettOm-

CHECK CALIBRATION

OF CHANNEL ACCESS

UNIT (CAU)

Portable
Page 2

ON CAu:

[7] Set REJ FLT


switch to OUT

1
I

Meter
[8] St!t SEND LEVEL
DB switch to
OFF

pointer
is
at left end
of scale

au
switches
set

[10] Does
indicate
within raised
black index
[FIG. 2]
eter

[9] Set TEST switch

No

[13] CAU is out


of calibration.
8 Get another CAU
and repeat
steps 1 thru 10

[ 14] Set TEST


to CNAN
LINE and rotate
VOL control
counterclockwise
if
sound is not desired
switch

El
REJ

FLT

IN OUT
o

I No

[ 12] Rotate
control
clockwise

No

WL

o
Wg

BLACK
LI!IE

EXT

8OET

[15] Get
another CAU
and repeat
steps 1 thru 11

RAISED
BLACK
INDEX
\

FIG.

CHECK CALIBRATION

OF CWWWL

ACCESS UNIT

(CAU)

[1] Remove cover

fromNMS

of scale
[2] Set FKION

switch

to OFF YE

[4] At front of NMS


below meter, adjust
screw until pointer
is over line at
left of scale

?
Yes

[5] Verify that weighting network is


installed
and that C-MESSAGE is
aligned
with WTG [FIG. 1, Page 2]

[7] Rotate

FtXTION switch

to BAT

[9] Set Ft#lCTION


switch to OFF and
replace battery
[FIG. 1, Page 2].
Rspeat procedure

CHECK CALIBRATION OF 3-TYPE

NOISE MEASURING SET

CAL
J ~

D31D4 PORTABLE TEST SET


D4 TST CKT
TO CAU
00
XFiT RCV
TO D4 W

00

!2EJFLT
IB OUT
\
o
SEMO LEVEL
w

XHT RCV
00
BOOQ TEFNl

EE2zEll

II 0 RF

c1

-r-

CAU

\
O
TEST
\
O

p g
RTCv Osc

11/

EXT
OETR

~1

K.\

3PSD CCRD

n===-

u~

COVER
WITH IWUNTIW
SUtENS

FIG.

CHECK CALIBRATION

3 -TYPE

NOISE MEASURING SET

C-RESSAGE
ALIGNED
WITH UTG

[10]

Set DBRN switch


to 80

[11] Set FWCTION switch

to

o~
[12] On D3/D4 PORTABLE TEST SET
(PTS) channel access unit
(cAU),
set REJ FLT to OUT
and TEST toCAL~

I+ No

I
[13]

Make

test

connection

per

FIG. 1, Page 2~

I
I

[15]

Adjust

CAL

(screwdriver
slot)
for 10
on meter

Issue

CHECK CALIBRATION

OF 3-TYPE

NOISE MEASURING SET

MAR 1962

365-170-000

PAGE 3

Of

1 DLPI
3

1519

LOMWSE

[1] Get longnose

pliers

[2] open pincers and pos~tlon pincers


on sides of LED [FIG.i 1 and
WARNING1]
[3] Lightly grip LED and maintain
enough pressure
to hold it
[4] Pull

LED straight

only

out~

[5] Get 549- (or 556-)


same color lens

type

[6) Hold replacement LED between fingers


flat surface behind lens is up
[7] Insert
(8]

Push

LED into
LED in until

FIG.

Ll?,Dwith

so that

r
\

New

LED in

slot
~
seated~
/
U@WVC 1
/ LEDs can be
~ damaged by
squeezing pliers
/ too tightly
or
inserting
LED the
/ wrong way in slot
/

REPLACE LED

/
/
/
/
~
*

[1] Place meter on horizontal


surface with face of meter
UP [NOTE 1]
[2] Set
OFF

function

switch

to

[FIG. 1]

[3] Adjust meter zero screw


for zero indication
[4] Verify that red test
goes to meter + jack

CAUTION

lead

[5] Verify that black test


goes to meter - jack

Page 2

o 600
Sc 300

ON HIGH

OFF

Jv 60
o

lead

OC VOLTS
tlEASUREflENT
~

[6] See FIG. 1. Set function


switch for required
measurement and range

Ps

12
3
0.

VOLTAGE

600
c
300
v
60
o
12
3 ;,

METER
ZERO
SCREU

DHMS
(RESISTANCE)
f4EASUREHENT

xl
Xlo
Xloo
x1000
x10000

{2
12
120
a

SHORT
PLUGS
BLACK

RED

NOTE1
Meter should not be
placed on a magnetic
surface or other
location where meter
movement will be
subject to influence
of agnetic fields

CONDITION

KS-1451O

VOLT-OHM-MILLIAMETER (VOM)

[7] See WARNINGS.


Is resistance
No
to be measured

Yes
+

[8] Touch end of


test probes
together

[9] Does meter


indicate
O on
ohms (TOP) scale
of VW
J

Yes

No

WARNINGS
Resistance
measurement
should not be made to
circuit
with power
---l!applied,
as damage to meter will
result
To prevent damage to meter
when ~aking either cm-rent
or voltage measurements,
function switch should be
set to proper range before
making contact with test
probes to the circuit
being
measured. If there is any
doubt as to the approximate
value of the voltage or
current to be measured,
function switch should be
set to highest
range and
then decreased step by step
for on-scale indication
i

v
[10] Can meter be
made to indicate
O by adjusting
OHMSAt)J control

Yes

No

[11 ] Replace
batteries
and repeat
procedure

CONDITION KS-1451O VOLT-OHM-MILLIANETER

(VOhi)

6H

[3] Set VF
oscillator
for

iUIpUISt?
[2] (h
counter,
set DIAL
9 MEAS to MEAS; set

[1] Get
test equipment
per TABLEA

[4] Make

DBRN control

output
of 2000
or 1000 Hz

to 93

OdBm [NOTE 1]

Page 2

per

connections

FIG. 1
,

VOLTME~ER

JACKS

It

TABLE A
EUJIPMENT REWIRED
----

R~ED

TYPE

BAT

(VOM) KS-1451O or equivalent

Volt-ohm-millaimoeter

7.5V

3P6D

Patch Cord

;;A:
DIAL

HP3550B or equivalent

VF oscillator

+
e

CAL AT 93

DBRN

RON

@
VF OSCILLATOR

,501

&d-x
I

13

@
12
11

65

109

3P6D

23

14

8 7

MINUTES

/
BATTERY

FIG.

CHECK CALIBRATION

OF 6H

IMPULSE

COUNTER

COWARTMENT

ON BACK

NOTE 1
If impulse counter
has KS-21567, L2C
notch network,
oscillator
should be
set for 2000 Hz. If
counter has 497G
C notch network,
oscillator
should
be set for 1000 Hz

[5]

Condition
+15 volts

VOMto measure
dc

[6] Observing + and - polarity


of VW, connect + and - VOM
leads to + and - BATT
leads on 6H

[8] Does
VOMindicate
at least 7.5
volts dc

Yes

[11] Adjust CAL


counter until 6H
counter is on
verge of counting
(registers
occasional
count)
1

[7]

[9] Disconnect
equipment from 6H;
replace batteries
in 6H (compartment
on back); repeat
calibration
check

[12] Rotate
control
fully counterclockwise;
remove all test
equipment
connections

MINUTES

1
1

I
i

[10] Get another


impulse
counter:
repeat
calibration
check

6H

CHECK CALIBRATIU

OF 6H IMPULSE

-El?

SUIWARY

To install
and slide
lugs for
shield at
into hole
operations

power distribution
unit (PDU), straighten
leads
PDU into slot.
At rear of bank connect spade
under plastic
leads 2, 3, and 4 to same terminals
top of slot [FIG. 1, Page 2]. Screw fastener
on back of PDU. To remove PDU, reverse these

[1] At POU Slot(s),


are ALM, lOA,
and -48ABS
fuses removed

[4] See DANGER1.


Slowly slide PDU(S
into PDU slot(s)
while guiding
leads through hole
in back of bank
[NOTE 1]

Y<:]~:::sF
/

Removed

Page 2

CEib
[2 J Remove fuses
in following order:
AU first,
IOA
second, and -48ABS
third

NOTE 1
Mode 4 requires
a PDU in both banks
/

/
/

DANGER1
85 VACringing
/
voltage may be
/
present on 2S 2
terminals 4 and /
5 behind PW
/
slot
/
Issue

I MAR 1982
365-170-000
DLP

INSTALL

OR REMOVE POWER DISTRIBUTION

l#IiIT

PAGE 1 0+

523

At rew of bauk:
[5] Remove large plastic
from back of bank

cover

into hole on back of


[6] Screw fastener
PDU(s) and loosen screws 2, 3, and 4
on termina; strip
[FIG. 1]

[7] See DANGER2. Connect PW


leads to terminals
(match lead
and terminal numbers) [TABLEA]

+
[8] Tighten

terminal

)-

JAMI

screws

large plastic
cover
[9] Install
on back of bank removed Tin Step 5
At front

[10]

+8

Mitt

TABLE A

LEM CWM*I

Pink

l.EAGWER

* Colors may vary on


some installations
but each lead will
be numbered to
correspond with
terminal strip
number

of bank, install
-8
MAIN 10A,
and -48ABS fuses

ALM,

TERMINAL
STRIP
PLASTIC
SHIELD

T@tFAsTEER
Ir711
DANGER2
85 VACringing
voltage may be
present on 7S2
terminals 4 and
5 behind PW
slot

FIG.

1 - R*Car view

of

Pou slot

!===
Issue

MM

365-170-000

INSTALL

OR REMOVE POWER DISTRIBUTION

UNIT

PAGE 2 of

1982

DLP

523

At rear

of bank:
[11 J Remove large

plastic

cover

n back f bank ~
[ 12] See DANGER3. Disconnect spade
lugs from terminal and push cables
away from terminal strip
[FIG. 2]

[ 13)

Using screwdriver
fastener
holding

unscrew
PW(S)

[14] At front,
remove PDU(s)
pulling
on
handle

TERHIUN.
STRIP

PLASTIC
SHIELD

FASTENER

/
FIG.

2 - Rear

View

of

PW

Slot

DANGER3
85 VACringing
voltage may be
present on TS 2
terminals 4 and
S behind PDU
slot

/
/
/
/
/
d

Issue

4 I MAR 1982
365-170-000
I DLP
1

INSTALL

OR REMOVE POWER DISTRIBUTION

UNIT

PAGE 3 Of
t

523

SWY

installer
at far DX set short T and R leads. Connect
VOMto terminals
24 and 51 using J98726ME connector
extender.
On 2-wire circuits
measure loop resistance
to
obtain RLP setting.
On 4-wire circuit
measure loop
resistance
and divide by 2 for RLP setting

Have

[ 1] Verify channel to be tested


is removed from service
//
FIG.

[2] Get KS-1451O VW or equivalent


and condition
it to measure
resistance
[DLP-521]
[3] Have technician
in field short
T and R leads at far DX
set (one pair for 4-wire)

[4

Obtain extender (FIG.


install
into assigned
channel slot

1) and

Extender

installed;

~+~~:o;;ected ,

[6] Measure
resistance.
equals RI.P
in 2 DX/GT.
by 2 for 4

This
setting
Divide
DX

w
I

(5] Connect VW to connector


extender terminals
24 and 51

1 IssuO~

MEASURE OX SIGNALING

RESISTANCE

LEADS

i kAR 1982

365-170-000

PAGE

1 of

! OLP i
1

15241

[1] Obtain test


equipment listed
in TABLEA
d

[3) Is RLMS
to be connected
or is balance test
termination
to be
provided at D4

[2] Verify test


channel circuit
B
is seized
[NOTE 1]
I

Page 2

Balance
test
termination

h
NOTE 1
Circuit
can be
seized and held for
testing
2-wire FXO
units by installing
SPTS in far end bank
(same channel slot )
and setting
switches
A and B to O. Circuil
can be seized and
held for testing
2-wire FXS units by
installing
SPTS in
far end bank (same
channel slot) with
switch A set to 1
and B to O and using
IRISwith holding
coil at station
end equipment

TABLE A
R~O

wxmtm
EOUIPMENT

Channel Access Unit (CAU)


in D3/D4 PORTABLE TEST SET (PTS)
RETURN LOSS MEASURING SET

(RLMS)

TYPE

J98718AJ CAU in
J98718AL PTS
KS-20501

1 Patch Cord

P6AD

2 Patch Cords

3P6A

%Rz%

MAKE COIWJECTIONS FOR ECHO RETURN


LOSS,

SINGING

POINT,

OR OFFICE

CAPACITANCE

TESTS

PAGE 1

0+

!525

Per FIG. 1, Page 3:


[4] Connecl signal output of test
set to EXT OSC jack on CAU
[5] Connect signal input
set to EXT DETR jack

of test
on CAU

[6] Connect CAU XMT jack to


CKT XMTjack [NOTE 2]

04 TST

<

Test

connections

Y-

[7] Connect CAU RCV jack to 04 TST


CXT RCV jack [NOTE 2]
[8] Connect P6AD cord between channel
to be tested and 04 TST CXT
(knurled side to left)
[NOTE 2] ~

[9]
. . Connect power cord of portable
set to 115V, 60-H2 power outlet

I
test

~1

48V lamp
lights

[10] Set PWR switch on portable


test set to ON
On C.Au:
[11] Set REJ FLT switch

PTS and
CAUready

to OUT

[12] Set SEND


[13] Set TEST

MAKE CONNECTIONS
LOSS,SINGING

Page 4

NOTE2
Noise due to
crosstalk
in 04 TST
test
CXT of portable
set can cause
erroneous
measurements.
If this
occurs, P6AD test
cord can be connected
from channel unit
directly
to W thus
eliminating
04 TST
CXT for this test

FOR ECHO RETURN

POINT,

OR OFFICE

CAPACITANCE

TESTS

RETURNLOSS
MEASURING
SE1
i
TST

TEST
TEST
LOCATIONTYPE

THL ORAOO

JI

/-

P6AD

RCV31[

310 TRMT

Q
D3/D4

PORTABLE
r

D4 TST CKT

1===1

U
I

TEST

SET

n
cm

@
Lz

o Q1
0

SHOULO
BE SET FOR+OdB

114 AW

rf

XRT
l_TO04C&

To
EXT=
QETR

XMT

RCV

EXT
OSC

EXT
DETR

Y
I

MAKE COtWECTIONS
LOSS,

SINGING

FOR ECHO RETURN

POINT,

OR OFFICE

CAPACITANCE

TESTS

Issue

I MAR 1982 1

[ 14] Is short
required on 2-wire
side of hybrid to
find transhybrid
loss

.
)---i

R JACKFIELD

No

OR APPROPRIATE

Yes

CLIP LEAD
ATTACHEO
ACROSS
TIP
ANDRIW

FIG.

[17] Insert one end of 3P6C


cord in T & R jack for
channel unit to be
tested

[18] See FIG. 2. Attach clip


lead across tip and ring
at other end of cord

MAKE COtWECTIONS
10SS,

SIN61NG

FOR ECHO RETURN

POINT,

OR OFFICE

CAPACITANCE

TESTS

On

portable
[19]

test set/CAU:
Connect power cord of portable
set to 115V, 60.Hz power outlet
on portable

test
1

test

set

to ON

[20

Set PWR switch

[21

On CAU, set REJ FLT switch to WT; SEW


LEVEL DB to O; and TEST to C14ANLINE
Per FIG. 3:
[22] Connect CAUXMTjack

-46V lamp
lights

CAu

ready

to D4 1S1 CKT XMT jack


\

[23] Connect CAU RCV jack

to D4 CKT RCV jack

[24] Connect P6AD cord between channel to be


tested and D4 1S1 CKT (knurled side to left)
[25] Place

262B plugs

in EXT OSC and EXT DETR jacks

on CAU
3P6A CORDS
/
9

CHANNEL
UNITS
IN D4 BAM
\

FIG.

MAKE COWECTIONS
LOSS,

SINGING

II

03/04 PORTABLE
TESTSET

OR OFFICE

II

2629 PLUGS
(6000
TERMINATION)

FOR ECHO RETURN

POINT,

CAPACITANCE

TESTS

E=s?El
PAGE 5 of S

15251

[1] Obtain test equipment per TABLEA and


install
channel unit extender
into channel slot
[2] Verify test channel
is seized [NOTE 1]

circuit

[3] Check calibration


{DLP-518] ~

of CAU

[4] Set CAUswitches

as follows:

REJ FLT to OUT


SEM LEVEL to 10
TEST to QIAN DROP

NOTE1
Circuit
can be
seized and held for
testing
2-wire FXO
units by installing
SPTS in far end bank
(same channel slot)
and setting
switches
A and B to O. Circui
can be seized and
held for testing
2-wire FXS units by
installing
SPTS in
far end bank (same
channel slot) with
switch A set to 1

TABLE A
REH~Ell

EWIPliENT RE9UIRED
D3/D4

with

PORTABLE TEST SET


Channel Access Unit

(PTS)
(CAU)

J98718AL PTS
J98718AJ CAU

2 Patch Cords

3P6A

1 Patch Cord

P6AD

RETUR!4 LOSS MEASURING SET

I2

Patch Cords

Channel Unit Extender

(RLMS)

KS-20501
I 3P6D
I J98726MF, List
I 3P6C

! 1 Patch Cord

TYPE

and B to O and

using

with holding
coil at station
end equipment

TMS

DETERMINE

PRECISION

BALANCE NETWORK (PBN)

SETTINGS

PAGE 1 of

152(

Unit:
[5] Set N/L switch as follows:
N for nonloaded customer loop
L for loaded customer loop

On Channel

[B~~~ll
[6] Set L switch on R/Rl control
L showing for hlAT; L
[FIG. 3] as follows:
not showing for other cable
Set LBOC(S1) as follows if not previously
0.056 ~f [FIG. 1]
LBOC in (white)
for loaded;
LBOC out (black)
for nonloaded
[DLP- 564]

[7]

[8]

Record S2 control setting


then temporarily
set S2 control to O [FIG. 2]

[9]

Set

FIG.

set:

N/L

set;

SL to

1 -

LBOC Control
(Example
0.056Pf
= CDE Selected)

O;

trial
LBOCand
PBN settings
made

Page 3

KHHl

FIG.

2 S2 Control
O Selected)

(Example

/1
PBN controls
(R/Rl,
R2,
trial
values per TABLEB
[NOTE2 and FIG. 3]

and

Z)

for

TABLE B
CABLE

TYPE

Loaded

R/Rl

19 Qa
22 ~a
24 ga
25 ga

2
4
6
7

26 ga
Nonloaded

19ga
22 ga
24 ga
25 ga
26 ga

Z=2

R=O

R4

R2=01

2
3

1
4

0
0
0
0

NOTE2
Only R and Z
controls
are used
for loaded cable;

Z=3
R2=0

LI!!!!3

R1 stamping

R2 control

Rl=5
5
5
5
5

R2=8Z=15
8
7
7
6

10
7
5
5

RI=4
R2*8

ignored.

z=8

PRECISION

can

be

RI

stamping and R2
controls
are
all used for
nonloaded cable

and Z

FIG.
+

3 -

PBN Controls
(Scnple
Settings
R2 8,
R/Rl = 4 and L showing,

ad Z = 8)

Issue

I
DETERMINE

and

BALANCE NETWORK (PBN)

SETTINGS

I MAR

365-170-000
PAGE 2

Of

1982

DLP
7

1526]

CM~EL
UNITS IN
CHANNEL
BMK

1
I

D3/D4

PDRTABLE

RETURNLOSS
!lEASURING
SE

TEST SET

TEST
THL ORAOO TEST

LOCATIONTYPE

3P6A
CORDS
_

3P6D

FIG.

channel

unit

in extender

Qbflb

EXT EXT
OSC DETR

[ 10] At customer end verify that


customer loop is terminated
per TABLEC and made busy 1

[11] Insert

Erm r

TABLE C
FM

Test
connections
made

-Em

TERBINATIW

EOUIPMEWT

Page 4

60011 PBX

600fl +2.15PF

900!I PBX

9000 +2.15PF
t

Telephone

[ 12] Connect measuring equipment to


channel drop through portable
test set [FIG. 4]

DETERMINE

PRECISION

BALANCE NETWORK (PBN)

SETTINGS

Set

Off-hook,
I current

100P

At voice frequency patch bay or


equivalent:
[ 13] Insert one end of 3P6C cord
into T & R jack for channel
unit to be tested
3PSC OR APPROPRIATE CORO

&

INSULATINGRING

[14] See FIG. 5. Attach clip


lead across tip and ring
of other end of cord

NOTE 3
FIG.

[15] On RLMSset

switches

ADDdBto
O
TEST TYPE to ERL
TEST LOCATIONto tO dB
(HYBRID TESTS on.

List

as follows:

1)

[16] Adjust THL (THL or ADD on List


or 3) switches for O indication
on meter~

[17] Can O be
obtained on
meter

[ 19] Remove
cord from
T & R jack

No
I
+

[18] Set ADDdf$


switch to -10 and
readjust
THL
switches [NOTE3]

[20] Is circuit
made up of loaded
or nonloaded loop
Nonloaded

DETERMINE

PRECISION

BALANCE NETWORK (PBN)

SETTiNGS

Loaded

T
Page 5

[21] Measure SRL-HI (TEST TYPE SRL-HI)


and maximize reading by changing
LBOC (in channel unit).
Record
reading on top half of worksheet
L
) ~
[22] Measure SRL (TEST TYPE SRL) and
maximize by changing R. Record
reading

TABLE D

LBOC, R, and Z
settings
made
( loaded cable)

[23] Measure ERL and maximize by


changing R. Record reading

STEP

23

ERL

ERL

READING

+-t=--

25

[24] Measure SRL-HI and maximize by


changing Z. Record reading
\

DETERMINE

[25]

Measure SRL and ERL again.


Record reading on bottom
of worksheet

[26]

Calculate
difference
between SRL
readings
(bottom minus top) and
between ERL readings
(bottom
minus top)

PRECISION

BALANCE NETWORK (PBN)

SETTINGS

1-PAGE 5

of

15261

[27]

Measure SRL (TEST TYPE SRL), ERL


(TEST TYPE ERL), and SRL-HI (TEST
Record readings
in
TYPE SRL-HI).
top part of worksheet
TMLE ) ~

[28]

Maximize SRL by changing RI


(in channel unit).
Record final
reading on worksheet

and Z
settings
made
(nonloaded cable)

RI,

R2

29
30

JEE1/
Z

\
[31 ) Calculate

readings

difference
between SRL
(bottom minus top)
Page 7

DETERMINE

[32] Calculate
readings

difference
between ERL
(bottom minus top)

[33] Calculate
readings

difference
between SRL-HI
(bottom minus top)

PRECISION

BALANCE NETWORK (PBN)

ERL

H-=--i
I

[29] Maximize ERL by changing R2. Record


final reading on worksheet
[30] Maximize SRL-HI by changing
final reading on worksheet

27 I

SETTINGS

ERL

SRL-HI

[39] Remove test


connections
and
* record final
settings
in
office records
b.
4

Yes

No

No

Yes

[40] Set S2 control


to original
setting
@ and remove test
connections

Yes

[37] Can trouble


be cleared by
replacing
channel
unit and repeating
entire procedure

No

[35! Repeat
from
procedure

Page 5 for loaded


cable or Page 6
for nonloaded
cable

DETERMXNE PRECfSION

BALANCE NETWORK (PBN)

SETTINGS

[38] Trouble in
2-wire hop or
balance termination
at customer
location.
Once found,
repeat balancing
procedure

[1] See NOTE 1. Obtain test equipment


per TABLEA and verify
service
is
removed from test channel

[2

Check calibration
CAu [DLP-518]

3P6A CORDS
f

KNURLED
SIDE

hill

D3/D4 PORTABLE TEST SET

of

alto
[3

XMT RCV
m

EXT EXT
OSC DETR

II

Set attenuators
in your unit
per circuit
layout card or
trial
values per TABLEB
[DLP-565 ]
FIG.

A
on
[4] Verify that attenuators
connecting channel unit have
been set per circuit
layout

Trial channel
unit settings
and tone toward
connecting

/[81

IsVF

[5] Set CAUswitches as follows:


REJ FLT to OUT
SEW LEVEL to O
TEST to ~AN DROF
[6

11

t No

Install
channel unit
extender into slot and
insert channel unit
into it

TABLE A
EOUIPMENT

[7] Make test connections


per FIG. 1

NOTE1
Attenuator
settings
in this procedure
are based on
standard transmit
and receive carrier
levels.
Other levels
may be required by
WORDor engineering.
If so, external
oscillator
and
detector must be

1
RECMAEWED

REWIRED

TYPE

Channel Access Unit (CAU)


In D3/M FORTABLE TEST SET (PTS)

J98718AJ CAU in
J98718AL PTS

1 Patch Cord

P6AD

2 Patch Cords

3P6A

Channel Unit Extender

J98726MF, List

used

I
DETERMINE ATTENUATOR
CHMMEL

LNITS

SETTINGS

FOR BACK-TO-BACK

(TANDEM)

Issue

I MAR 1982

TABLE B
~L

lNiT

FIG.

2A

TRANWIT

RE-IVE

ATTEN

D4

1.5 dB

Fixed

D3

ATI = l.OdB

Fixed

D1

2.5 dB

ldB

ATTEN

-2.1 D6H
4
04
CHANUEL

PLR

2B

3.7 dB

5 dB

D3

AT1 = 0.8dB,
AT3 = 7 dB

AT2 = 1 dB,

D1

2 dB

3 dB

4T0
(+7, -16
interface)

4T0
(Connected
with another
4T0)

2C

AT3 = 1 dB;
AT4 = 15 dB

D1

A1TlOUT
A7T2IN

AIT1 OUT
AlT2 IN

D4

RCVGAIN
TRkfTGAIN
(white showing),
(white showing),
TRMTATTEN = 15 dB RCVA7TEN = 8 dB

~3

2D

2B

RCV GAIN
(black showing),
RCVAiTEN = 15 dB

TRhfTGAIN
(black showing),
wA_=15dB
AT1 = 0.2 dB;
AT2 = 12 dB

D4

D3

AT1 = 0.8dB;
AT2 = 5 dB

AT3 = 0.8 dB;


AT4 = O dB

D1

ATTI OUT
A7T2 IN

AlTl IN
AIT2 OUT

D4

1 dB

1 dB

D3
D1

1 dB

1 dB

Halfway

Halfway

Analog

Ha1fway

Ha1fway

CONNECTIffi
CHAWEL

-p-J
L

D4

ATTENUATOR

CHA?WEL UNITS

SETTINGS

A. TANDEflUNITS

IDF

PLR

~ ,!

E6M

. ..
CONNECTING
CHAMEL

04
CHANNEL

B. PLR APPLICATION

TO

E&M

IOF
-16 D6tl

D4
CHANNEL

+7 owl
K
I

R
-fg1

CONNECTING
CHANNEL

C. 4UT0 UNITS (-16, +7 INTERFACE)

CONNECTING
CHANNEL

04
CHANNEL

0. 4UT0 UNITS (O OEM INTERFACE)


FIG.

DETERMINE

TM
.-..

IDF

TOM

FOR BACK-TO-BACK

(TANDEM)

[9] Arrange for tester


at connecting channel
to measure level at
OUTjack (VF patch
bay) associated
with
test channel

INo

[14] Have
connecting
channel
unit replaced and
replacement
adjusted

No

[12] Replace your


channel unit (same
type with trial
attenuator
settings
made)

Yes

n
I

TABLE C

~L

8AM

TEST POIMT

I D4
D3

I
CARRIER 1~

I Channel unit

TST

jack I

-8.5

TLP

lChannel

XMTjack ~

-7.5

TLP

unit

DID

Channel unit

DIA, DIB

I Analog Example N21 MI&MG

(channel

XMTjack
modem) I

-9.25
-9.0

[16] Return original


channel unit to
operation.
Trouble
in cabling to patch
bay. Once cleared,
repeat procedure

LEVEL

TLP
TLP

+16.8 dBm

I
1

NOTE2
should be
taken not to mask
high-loss
cable
Care

troubles

by removing

most or all of
attenuator
losses

in the channel
Issue

DETERMINE

ATTENUATOR SETTINGS

CHANNEL UNITS

FOR BACK-TO-BACK

(TANDEM)

4 I MAR
365-170-000

PAGE

3 O+ 6

units
1982
DLP

527

[17 ] Arrange
for tester
at
connecting channel
to measure input
to carrier

[ 18] Can required


level [TABLED] be
obtained by adding or
removing loss in your
receive attenuator
[NOTE3]

Yes
I

No
Q

Yes
attenuator

to obtain

ATTENUATOR SETTINGS

CHANNEL UNITS

ahui

D4

D3

TEST

POINT

I
I

Channel Unit
TST Jack

Channel Unit
XMT Jack

DIA, DIB

Channel Unit
XMT Jack

Analog
Example N2

MI&MG(Channel
Modem)

CARRIER

IWUT

LEVEL

-8.5 TLP

-7.5 TLP

+16,8 dBm

-/

[21] Can level


be obtained by
adjusting
attenuators
in

w
r--J--llh

[23] Return
original
unit to
operation.
Have
connecting channel
unit replaced

DETERMINE

~L

DID

No

[20] Replace your


channel unit (same
type with trial
attenuator
settings
made)

TABLE D

FOR BACK-TO-BACK

(TANDEM)

[22] Trouble in
cabling between
units.
Once
cleared,
repeat
procedure

NOTE3
Care should be
taken not to mask
cable troubles
(high
loss) by removing
most or all of
attenuator
losses
in the channel units
%$%%%%
PAGE 4 of

1527

[24] Arrange to have


tone applied at
far end of connecting
channel or to drop
of connecting
channel
unit

[25] Is~
patch bay
included in

M5:::E:-+

Yes

[26] Have tester


at
connecting channel
adjust receive
control for +7.0 dBm
at OUT jack associated
with test channel

NOTES
4. An external meter
can be connected
to EXT DETR jack
(onCAU) to
measure
deviations
greater than
?0,5dB. The
portable
test set
introduces
8.5 dB
gain for than
drop measurements
thus -8.5 at the
channel unit will
appear as O dBm al
the EXT DET jack
j. Care should be
taken not to mask
high-loss
cable
troubles
by
removing most or
all of attenuator
losses in channel
unit

/-J-

[28] Can meter


indication
be obtained
by adding or removing
loss in your transmit
attenuator
[NOTES4
and 5]

Yes

No
*

DETERMINE
CHAWEL

ATTENUATOR SETTINGS

lAJITS

FOR BACK-TO-BACK

(TANDEM)

%%%%%

Yes

[31] Replace your


channel unit
(same type with
trial
attenuator
setting
made)

[33] Return
original
unit to
No
Trouble
* operation.
in cabling or
cross-connect ions

(32] Can
level be
obtained by
adjustments
J

Yes

No

m
I

[39] Remove
test
connections

I
[34] Can tester
at
connecting channel
adjust receive
attenuator
to
obtain level [NOTE6]

[35] Replace your


channel unit
(same type with
trial
attenuator
setting
made)

)--i
Ezl--+
-/

No

Yes

[36 ] Remove
test
connections

[37] Can
level be
obtained by
adjustments
INo

INo

[38] Return
original
unit to
operation,
have
connecting
channel
unit replaced and
replacement adjusted

NOTE 6
Care should be
taken not to mask
high-ioss
cable
troubles
by
removing mst or
all of attenuator
losses in channel
units

[40] Have original


unit returned
to
operation.
Trouble
in cabling between
units

DETERMINE

ATTENUATOR SETTINGS

CHANNEL lJhJITS

FOR BACK-TO-BACK

(TANDEM)
=

[ 1] See FIG. 1 and circuit


layout information.
Arrange for frequency response test out to
customer station
equipment

[2] Obtain test equipment per TABLEA and


verify circuit
is seized
[NOTE 1]

[3] Install
channel
slot and insert

Circuit
can be seized and held
for setting
equalizers
on 2-wire
FXO units
by installing
SPTS in far
end bank (same channel slot) and
setting
switches A and B to O.
Circuit
can be seized and held
for setting
equalizers
on 2-wire
FXS units by installing SPTS in far
end bank (same channel slot) with
switch A set to 1 and B to O
and using TMS with holding coil
at station
end equipment

Page 2

unit extender into channel


channel unit into it

2-UIRE CHANNEL UNIT


UITH GAINTRANSFER
r

TABLE A
EOUIPMENT

D3/D4

REH-D

REQUIRED

with
(CAU)

PORTABLE TEST SET

Channel Access Unit


Transmission
(m)

Measuring

Set

2 Patch Cords
1 Patch Cord
1 Patch Cord
I Channel Unit Extender

EPt-zilr--

TYPE

J98718AL PTS with


J98718AJ CAU

CENTRAL OFFICE

lTS4BNH or equivalent

4-MIRE CHANNEL UNIT

I 3P6A
I P6AD

I 3P6D
I J98726MF, List

I
I

STATION
EQUIPflENT

VF AMP & HYBRID

~+jiicf!p.

I
2

A . A~LIFIER
E . EQUALIZER

FIG.

Issue

I MAR 1982

365-170-000

DETERMINE

EQUALIZER

SETTINGS

PAGE 1 of

DLP
8

528

[4] Connect power cord on PTS


to ac outlet and set PWR
switch to ON

[5] Set switches


as follows:

on CM

REJ FLT to OUT


SEND LEVEL db to O
TEST to M
DROF

Page 3

[6] Condition
[DLP-539]

[7] Verify INS controls


as folIows:

are set

FIWTION
to S-7ALKtREC,
LINE to REC, REC IWto
and REC LEVEL to O

DETERMINE

EQUALIZER

~,

SETTINGS

D3 D4 PORTABLE TEST SET


{
CHANNEL UNITS
IN D4 DIGROUP

[8] Make test


connections
per FIG. 2

ill

Touch Up

existing
settings

&

FIG.

DETERMINE

-.

EQUALIZER

SETTINGS

mm

[9] Are you


determining
initial
equalization
settings
or touching up
existing
settings

Ill

I=m-1111
-,,

;~~@~l
cmw

3P60 cfJRo

-5

JI

[ 10] Locale
equalization
controls
(S2 or
SL, HT,

~FIG.

BW)

3].

[11] Are you


working with
2 DX/GT or
2 FX/GT unit
No
T

Loaded

-L__
[13] Set N/L
switch (on SL
control):
nonloaded = N showing
loaded = L showing

[1!5] %?t N/L


switch
(on SL
*

control)
so
that L is
showing

Nonloaded

r
[16]

Set

N/L

switch (on SL
control)
so
that N is
showing

F16.

COUTROLS
LOCATED
OR
FOLD-DOW
BoARooa
Wlk UNITS

3 -

Equalization

W-MT:
{

Contrel

Page 5

at customer
[17] Have tester
end send 400 Hz at test
level for that location

400 and

[18] Record received


level
[19J Have tester
1000 Hz
[20]

[21 ] Is difference
between 400 Hz and
1000 Hz levels within
limits per FIG. 5
(2-wire) or FIG. 6
(4-wire)
[NOTE 2]

send

Record received
level

Page 6

Attempt to get difference


between 400 Hz and 1000 Hz
levels per FIG. 5 or 6 by
adjusting
SL on 4.wire units
or S2 (SL) on 2-wire units
[FIG. 4], while tester
sends
400- and 1OOO-HZtones as
applicable
as many times as
necessary
[NOTE 3]
[22]

SLIDE WITCHES:
COVER NUMBERS
TO REMOVE,
EXPOSE NUMBERS
TO ADD

FIG.

[23] Can levels


per FIG. 5 or
6 be obtained

No

Y-=-
Cm&3

DETERMINE

EQUALIZER

SETTINGS

NOTES
2. FIG. 5 and 6 show
objectives
and
not necessarily
requirements.
Response limits
are determined by
overall circuit
3. Control on 2-wire
units is stamped
S2 or SL

[24] Have tester


send
2000 Hz and you
record level
2000 and
2800 Hz
tones
received

[25] Have tester


send
2800 Hz and you
record level

[26] Is difference
in
2000 Hz and 2800 Hz
levels within limits
per FIG. 5 (2-wire)
or FIG. 6 (4wire)
[NOTE 4]

Yes

Page 7

No
[28] Start with trial
BW
and HT values of 4. Attempt

2 FX/GT

Yes

400

1000

2000

5 -

FIG.

2S00

3250

[29] Attempt
to readjust
S2 (SL) to obtain
difference

Response

2-Wire

-1-

?!AXIHIMLEVEL DIFFERENCE ALONG SU?VE= *0.5 03

Hz tones as applicable
as
many times as necessary

--(
\

[30] Can levels


per FIG. 5 or
6 be obtained
[NOTE4]

No

(5

Page 8
step 38

1000

400

20DD

2s00

3250

RANDE OF SL CONTROL UITH N/L SUITCHTO L


t RAM3E OF SL CLWTROL NITH N/L SWITCH TO N

FIG.

DETERMINE

6 -

4-Wire

Reepons.

EQUALIZER

SETTINGS

b
/
I

NOTE4
FIG. 5 and 6 show
objectives
and not
requirements.
Response limits are
determined by
overall
circuit

[31] Have
tester
slowly
sweep from
400 Hz to 3300

HZ

[32] Do received
levels closely
follow curve in
FIG. 5 (2-wire) or
FIG. 6 (4-wire)
Page 6

[33] Disconnect
test
equipment

Yes

No

[34 ] Attempt to
obtain proper levels
adjusting
S2 (SL) only
on 2-wire GT units,
or
SL for lows and BW
and HT for highs on
4-wire units
(See TABLEC)

(4
Page 8

TABLE C
TR~LE
ADJuSTMENT
2.4

3.o

kHz

3.0-

Too much loss

OK

much

TOO

3.2

ktlx

increase

BW;increase

10SS

Increase

BW;adjust

Too much loss

Too much gain

Increase

BW;decrease

OK

Too much loss

Increase

HT;adjust

BW*

OK

Too much gain

Decrease

HT;adjust

BW

Too much gain

OK

Decrease

BW;adjust

HT

Too much gain

Too much loss

Decrease

HW;increase

HT

Too much gain

Too much gain

Decrease

BW;decrease

HT

TOO

]0SS

much

With small BWvalues, HT has almost no effect


idband, but with larger BW values it does

EQUALIZER

SETTINGS

HT

if

if necessary
necessary

HT

if

necessary

on
r

DETERMINE

HT

Yes

No

[37] Disconnect
test equipment
and notify
tester
of
completion

No

[36] Repeat
procedure
from Page 4

I
I

t
I

No

[40] Instal 1
original
channel
unit. Trouble at
other tester
location
or on loop.
Once found, repeat
this procedure

[39] Replace
channel unit
(same type and
same settings)
and
repeat procedure
starting
on Page 4

Issue

36S-170-000

DETERMINE

EQUALIZER

SETTINGS

MAR W82 ~
:! DLp

SUMARY

See NOTE1. With tester


at station
measure transmission
level in both
channel drop). Make connections
per
applied in only one direction
at a

end, arrange to
directions
(to and from
FIG. 2. Have tone
time to prevent

interference
attenuators
station
end.
can also be

on 2-wire circuits.
Set channel unit
to produce required TLP at channel and at
Gain of any voice amplifiers
at station
end
adjusted

2-HIRE CHANNEL UNIT


UITH GAIN TRANSFER

layout
[1] See NOTE1, FIG. 1, and circuit
information.
Arrange for loss test with
tester at customer station
equipment

E!i2kl~

[2] Obtain test equipment per TABLEA and


verify service is removed from test
channel
[3] Install
channel
channel

channel unit extender


slot and insert
unit into it

CENTRAL OFFICE

4-WIRE CHANNEL UNIT

into

~+d%.

I (-)

A = AMPLIFIER

E= QUALIZER

[4] Condition ThfS [DLP-539] and verify


controls
are set as follows:
FUNCTION to SENDtTALKtREC, LINE to REC,
REC IMP to 600$/, and REC LEVEL to O

RQUIPUNl REWIRED

NOTE 1
Equalization
of customer
loop at channel unit,
if
desired,
should be
accomplished per [DLP-528]
before setting
attenuators
per this procedure

ATTENUATOR SETTINGS

,,G,

TABLE A
RECOMEN)ED

TYPE

PORTABLE TEST SET with


Channel Access Unit (CAU)

J98718AL PTS with


J98718AJ CAU

Transmission

TTS4BNHor equivalent

D3/D4

DETERMINE

VF AHP & HYBRIO

Measuring

Set

(m)
2 Patch

FOR SPECIAL

Cords

3P6A

1 Patch Cord

P6AD

1 Patch Cord

3P6D

Channel Unit Extender

J98726MF, List

SERVICE

CHANNEL UNITS

STATION
EQUIPtlENT

D3/D4

PORTABLE

Make

SET

so 3C113-01
D4 1S1 CKT

NOTES

2. Circuit

CHANIWL UNITS
IN D4 DIGROUP

[5]

TEST

J98718AL-( ],L1

test

per
FIG. 2 and verify
circuit
is
seized [NOTE2]

connections

can be
seized and held for
setting
attenuators
on 2-wire FXO by
installing
SPTS in
far end bank (same
channel slot) and
setting
switches A
and 8 to O. Circuit
can be seized and
held for setting
attenuators
on
2-wire FXS by
installing
SPTS in
far end b~nk (same
channel slot) with
switch A set to 1
and B to O and usin[
TM with holding
coil at station
end
equipment
In this
configuration,
the

$!?
Exlm

LEcum

I
t

t
I [7] Set CAU switches

3P60 CORD
REC

310
TMS

[8] Set CAUswitches


as follows:

PTSICAU applies
+4 dBm (normal

TLP)

REJ FLT to OUT


SE~ LEVEL DB to OFF
and TEST to CMAN DROP

FIG. 2

toward

*
Page

DETERMINE

thru

unit
drop.

If different
level
is required for
circuit,
external
oscillator
must be
used and set 4 dikn
lower than desired
level.

ATTENUATOR SETTINGS

back

channel

&

FOR SPECIAL

SERVICE

CHANNEL UNITS

[9)

[10]

Have tester
at station
equipment or intermediate
amplifier
equipment send
1000 Hz at TLP for that
location

Measure level with lllS


and attempt to obtain
required level by
adjusting
transmit

%mHE!_J

Page 5
step 21
/

0
*

Page 5

NOTES
4. The portable
test
set introduces
8.5 dB gain for
than drop
measurement;
thus -8.5 at the
channel unit will
appear as O dBm
at the external
l-m

5. Level other than


-8.5 dB may be
required by WORD
document or by
engineering.
This
level, when
obtained,
will be
indicated
8.5 dB
higher on external

Yes

(43
Page 5
step 21

1luS
5.

DETERMINE

ATTEhNJATOR SETTINGS

FOR SPECIAL

SERVICE

CHANNEL UNITS

Using near max


gain ay indicate
need to examine
circuit
for
trouble

[ 13] Have tester


at station
end
measure level
received there

No

[ 15] Attempt to
obtain required
Ievel by adjusting
receive attenuation
in channel unit

Yes
t
*
[16] Can
correct
level
be obtained

Yes

Page 5
step 21

%=-

[17] Can level be


obtained by any
amplifier
adjustment
at station
end
[N(JTE7]

Page 5

I Yes

(23
Page 5
step 21

DETERttINE

ATTENUATOR SETTINGS

FOR SPECIAL

SERVICE

NOTE7
Using near max
gain may indicate
the need to examine
the circuit
for
trouble

CHANNEL UNITS

Issuo

I MAR 1982 i

365-?70-000

PAGE4

0+

I QLP
5

1529

[18] Replace
your channel
unit with one
of same type

Can correct
level be obtained
by adjustments
to
your unit or ampli fier
at station
end
[ 19]

[21 ] Has test


been done in both
directions
of
transmission

Yes

[22] Disconnect
test equipment

No

Yes

t+
/

No

*
[20] Trouble at
station
end or on
customer loop.
Once cleared,
repeat this test

Transmit
P
receive

this

time

[24 Set
SE~ LEVELD8
switch on CAU
to o

[25] Return
to Page 4,
step 13

I Receive

[26] Set

[27] Return
to Page 3,
step 9

FOR SPECIAL

SERVICE

SE*
LEVEL DE
switch on CAU
to OFF

DETERMINE

ATTENUATOR SETTINGS

CHANNEL UNITS

[1] Get test

equipment

listed

in TABLEA
I

[2] Verify that no plug-in


units are installed
into
bank to be tested (comon
or channel units)

[3]

power distribution
subassembly remove ALM fuse

On

Page 2

[4] Install
PDSIM into maintenance
bank PDU slot and insert BAT
connector into ALti fuse holder
[5] Set ON/OFF switch

to ~

~
TABLE A
W1P9=T

RRQUIRRD

Conanon Equipment
Indicator
(CEVI)

PERFORM POWER WIRING


USING

TEST ON D4 MAINTENANCE

VOLTAGE INDICATORS

R~

J98726MA

Voltage

Power Distribution
Simulator
(FD SIM)

J98726MB

PWRCONVSIM

J98726MC

Channel Unit Voltage


Indicator
(CIJVI)

J98726MD

Connector

ED-3C766

Access Unit

BANK
1

[6]

Is

LED
flashing

20-HZ

Yes

(A through D),
C~,
and ALM

k
No
I N(I

TABLE B
LED

I
I

A
B

Yes

D
CONV
20 Hz

FWCTION

-48V OUtDUt
-48V output
-48V output
-48V output
-48V PCU
-48V alarm
20 Hz input to bank

[9] set PD
SIM to OFF
and remove

from slot
I

[10] Refer to
TABLEB for
correlation
of LEDs
and connector pins
to repair wiring

PERFORM POWER WIRING


USING

VOLTAGE

TEST ON D4 MAINTENANCE

INDICATORS

BANK

PIN

I 50.51

12;14
11,13
10
15,16
4-7
23,54

[11] Connect cord marked CEVI (supplied


with test equipment) between
-20V

IN jack

and CEVI jack


[12] Install

CEVI

on CEVI
on PO SIM

unit

[13]
center

position

~
P

[14] Operate silver


toggle switch on
top of CEVI and observe that
ETILEDs except 14 are lighted.
Replace any LEDs that do not
light
[DLP-520] [NOTE 1]

-J

[15] Release
of step

toggle
14

switch

Yes

[17] On CEVI
hold FOS switch
to ~
position
until step 18 is
verified

1
[20] Refer to
TABLEE, Page 7 for
correlation
of LEDs
and connector pins
to repair wiring

1
I

Yes

C&D

PERFORM POWER WIRING


USING

TEST ON 04

VOLTAGE INDICATORS

MAINTENANCE

BANK

NOTE1
LED 14 may light

I
I

[21] On CEVI
hold TST
switch to OPR
position
to
verify step 22
[

[28] Refer to
TABLEE, Page 7 for
correlation
of LEDs
and connector pins
to repair wiring

Set PO
SIM switch to
[2?]

OFF and remove


CEVI

~{
/

[23] Remove CEVI from PCU


slot and install
into
RU A slot~

Yes

TABLE C

No

+-(EO

BAN(
POSITION
(SLOT )

[24] Insert PWR CONV


SIM in PCU slot

Yes.

[25] Refer to TABLEC and test


each common equipment
slot with CEVI using POS
and 1ST switches as
indicated

[29 ] Leave CEVI


in TPU slot
for next test

@ib

RU A
RU B
Su (2
ACIJ A

INITIAL
LIGNTEQ
LEOS

slots)

ACUB
TU A
TU B
LIU
LIU right

side
connector
OIU
LIU 4T
LIU 41 right
side connector
TPU
*ED-3C766
LIU

LEDs LIGNTED
WITH POS
SWITCM IN
RU TU POSITIO

LEDs LIGNTEC
WITH TST
SWITCN IN
OPR POSITIa

1,2,3,7,13
1,2,3,7,13
1,2,3,7
1 thru 8

9,10,14
9,10,14
9,10
9,10
9,10
9
9
9
9,10

1 thru 8
1,2,3,7,13
1,2,3,7,13
I thru 7
1,2,3,7
1,2,3,4,7,8
1,7
1,2,3,7

9,10

1 ,4,5,6,8

9,10

connector access unit


4T slots
to enable

and LIU

9
9,10

must be installed
testing
of right

into
side

connectors
~ No test required

PERFORM POWER WIRING


USING

TEST ON D4 MAINTENANCE

VOLTAGE INDICATORS

BANK

Issue

365-170-000

I MAR

1982

I DLP 1

PAGE 4 of 7

]530]

LEDs 1,4,5,6,
[30]

Set CU switch
l

on

O+

[31] Connect cord marked ~1


(supplied with test equipment)
to -20V IN jack on WI and
install
CXJVIinto CUT
lOt~
[32] Connect other end of cord
of step 31 to CUVI jack

[35] Are LEDs


per
lighted
TABLE D for
w
slot you are
testing
[NOTE2]

on PD SIN

[331
Operate
..-

silver toggle switch


on top of CUVI and observe
that all LEDs are lighted.
Replace any LEDs that do
not light [DLP-520]

toggle
33

---/

[34] Release
of step

No

[36] On PDSIM,
set switch to
OFF and remove
CUVI

Yes
w
Page 6

[37] Refer to
TABLEF, Page 7 for
correlation
of LEDs
and connector pins
to repair wiring

switch

TABLE D
1
SLOT

~T

I
LED LIWIEO

1 thru

ISPTS

I 1 thru

I 4E6M

I 1, 2,

LEDs 2 thru
are in bank
t LED 16will
pin 31 by V

13 and

16*

13*t
3,

4,

I
7,

8,

9,

10,

11,

13,

and

16

will light if A and B options


and +24V is supplied from 2ESS
light in SPTS slot only if 48V is supplied to
option
6,

11,

12,

13,

and

16

NOTE2
Steps 35 thru 39,
test CUT slot first,
SPTS second, and
4EM

Issue

PERFORM POWER WIRING


USING

TEST ON D4 MAINTENANCE

VOLTAGE INDICATORS

BANK

third

I MAR 1982
365-170-000
DLP

PAGE 5

0+

530

[38]

OrI CUVI

hold TST switch


to OPR position
until step 39
is verified
I

[43] Refer to
TABLEF, Page 7 for
correlation
of LEDs
and connector pins
to repair wiring

[42] On PD SIM,
to OFF and
remove CUVI

Yes

[40] Have
and 4EbM
slots been
tested

Yes

SPTS

[42 ] Remove
test equipment
and install
ALM fuse

No

1.
[41] See WARNING
Set CIJ switch on CEVI
to B and test SFTS
and 4E&M slots
by
from step
repeating

35

for each slot

<
/

VARNING1
Care should be
taken vben
installing
CUVI
into 4E&M slot to
protect
viring on

/
< Cl#I andCEVI
/ units

PERFORM POWER WIRING


USING VOLTAGE

TEST ON D4 MAINTENANCE

INDICATORS

BANK

/
/
/

/
/
/
/

4 I MAR 1982
365-170-000
DLP

Issue

PAGE 6 of

530

TABLE E FUNCTION

LED
1

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13

14

15
16
17

PIN

+5V circuit
-12V circuit
+12V circuit
-48V circuit
-48V circuit
-48V circuit
12V GRD
48V GRD
5V GRD
Frame GRD
5V over voltage circuit
12V over voltage circuit
Foreign voltage or GRD

Foreign

29
50
23
19
20
46
24
22
2
1
29
50
All leads
power and
1cads
All leads
power and
1cads

voltage

12V GRD (indicates


foreign
voltage on GRD lead)
48V GRD (indicates
foreign
voltage on GRD lead)
5V GRD (indicates

voltage

TABLE F - WI

CEVI LEDs

foreign

3
4
5,6
7,8,9,10
11
12

13

except
GRD
except
GRD

24

+5V circuit
circuit
RU lead
+12V circuit
-48V circuit
TPU leads
12V GRD
SIG GRD (TST switch in
normal position)/
5VGRD (TST switch operated)
SIG GRD (TST switch in
normal position)/
Frame GRD (TST switch

30

~
39
4
43,54
26,44,50,53
3
21

-12V

14
15

16

Foreign

volta~e

17

Foreign

voltage

18

5V and 12V GRD (indicates


foreign voltage or open
circuit)
foreign
SIG GRD (indicates
voltage or open circuit)/
frame GRD
48V GRD (indicates
voltage
on these GRDs

19

20

TEST ON D4 MAINTENANCE

VOLTAGE INDICATORS

PIN

5
17
1

circuit

26,30,44,50,53

circuit
or GRD

2,39
All leads
power and
leads
All leads
power and
leads
5,3

22

* When PD SIM and PWR CONV SIM are in bank, VOlt&I&


circuits
are as follows: +5V =-15V, +12V= -8V,
-12V = -32V, and 48V = -36V

USING

operated)
5V over voltage
12V over voltage

on GRD lead)

PERFORM POWER WIRING

FLmclIm

LED

LEDs

21,17
1
15,27

When PO Slm and PWRCONVSIM are in bank, voltage


circuits
are as follows:
+5V = -15V, +12V = -8JI
-12V = -32V, and -48V = -36V

BANK
M

except
GRD
except
GRD

[1) Obtain KS-21838, L1 extractor


longnose pliers

or

[2] In window on TKJ plug-in,


place
plugs in SEClposition
for each
digroup [FIG. 1], using tool

white

~!

Y(A?m

~er TABLEA for


[3] Get two equalizers
type LIU ~o be installed
in bank
and install

14

I ED-3C656-30,

G1 I

I 4A

I ED-3C656-30,

G7j

equalizers

TPO-A

[4] Install

TPU plug-in

in

TPU slot

FIG.

INSTALL

TPU EQUALIZERS

MAINTENANCE

BANK

AND SET CHAMJEL COWTING

OPTION

D4

MBALMin ALMslot (upper


[1] Install
shelf) and set switch to ALARM DISAB
[NOTES 1 and 2]
[2

Remove plastic
of bank

[3

Install
1A MBTS and lB MBTS,
tighten retaining
screws on rear,
and install
plastic
cover removed
in step 2

[4] Set all


to out

ALARM DISAB

cover from rear

switches
position

Plug-ins
installed;
\

on 1A MBTSand IB MBTS
(black

[5] Install
any other units
shelf [FIG. 1, Page 2]

showing)

for upper

[6] Refer to TABLEA and install


plug-ins
in designated
slots
[FIG.

1]

MOOE2

2,

BmE3

MOE 4

Tu
Ru
AC2J(Digroup A)

(2) Tu
(2) Ru
(2) Am

(2) Tu
(2) Ru
(2) Am

(2) Tu
(2) RU
(2) Am

LIU-1

(1)
(1)

(1)

(2)
(2)

LIU-2
Su

NoTEs

1. Modes 1, 2, and3
require
J98726MG
MB ALM unit.
Modes
4 and 4A require
J98726ML MBALU
unit.

TABLE A
Mml

(2)
(2)
(1)
(1)

ALARM DISAB

LIU-3

LIU-4
w

(TandR)

List 9 Maintenance
Bank requires
J98726MG-2, L2 m
ALM unit.
List 1
Maintenance Bank
can accept
J98726MG.1, L1 or
L2 MBALMunit,

Issue

365-170-000

INSTALL

PLUG-INS

IN

04

MAINTENANCE

BANK

PAGE 1 of

I MAR 1982
DLP
2

532

(UAW)

TU

RU

SIJ

TU

Du[
1
USED
WITH
LIU2,
OR -4

U Tu./c R&/k

(B)

FIG.

INSTALL

PLUG- INS

IN

D4 MAINTENANCE

BANK

(A)

Su

.Tud
(A)

l%%%%

[1] On MB ALM unit

set switch
ALARM DISAB position

to

[2] On lB MBTS depress switch 9


so that green surface shows

,
PDLI

[3] On lB MBTS verify that switches


1 thru 8 and 10 thru 17 are 7
extended (black showing)
+
[4] Refer to FIG. 1 and identify
digroup positions
of maintenance
bank [NOTE 1]

-1

[5] Move SPTS from SPTS position


M position
(digroup A)

Pou

III
CMAMEL UNIT
POSITION ~

DIGROUP B

to

lB TEST SET

1A TEST SET

MB
DRAUER ALI

UTCE

TOU 4UE-fIl

RU LIU
(B)

11

RU

TU

RU
TU
DIGROUP A

ACU

CHANNEL
WIT
POSITION

AM)SPTS

FIG.

IwrE 1
Identity
of each
digroup is
necessary because
transmission
tests
are required
on both digroups

PREPARE 04

MAINTENANCE

BANK FOR TRANSMISSION

TESTS

PAGE 1 of-l

53:

TABLE A

stMfARY

Make test connections


per FIG. 1. Insert Pin Plug into
R CODE on RU to test
receiver
gain. The meter CAUmust
indicate
in black area for receiver
gain or green-blackgreen area for net loss

[1] Obtain equipment listed


in
TABLEA and check calibration
CAU [DLP-518] [N(YTE1]

EOU1-

R~D

REQUIRED

D3/D4 PORTABLE TEST


SET (PTS) With Channel
Access

I
I
I

of

Unit

J98718AL

TYPE
PTS

$9B7]8AJ

CAU

(CAU)

2 Patch

Cords

3P6A

1 Patch

cord

P6AD

KS-19531

Pin

Plug

1
I
I

On CAu:
[2]

Set TEST switch

to

[3]

Set REJ FLT switch

[4]

Make test
FIG. 1

[5]

Set SE~
to OFF ~

to OUT

connections

LEVEL DB

NOTES

per

switch

1. When using CAU fo~


of tests,
a series
the calibration
requires
checking
only once unless
CAU is suspected
of causing troubl(
2. Switch on MBALAI
should be set to

[6 See tKY1ES2 and 3. At


digroup to be tested,
insert
pin plug into R @DE jack on RU

3.

ALARM DISAB
On lB MBTS,
9 should be

switcf

depressed showing
green and all
others showing
black

PERFORM D4 MAINTENANCE

BANK RECEIVER

GAIN

AND NET LOSS TEST

D3/D4

PORTABLE
t

TEST
s

SET
.

b!!u!!d,

o
e

u
m

17vi
\

3P6A CORDS

BLAH
LIE

BLACKAREA

~1~

AREA

FIG.

PERFORM D4 MAINTENANCE

BANK RECEIVER

GAIN

AND NET LOSS TEST

[9] Remove pin


plug from R COQE
jack on RU and set
SE~

switch
NO

to O on CAU

No

[8] Repeat
steps 2
thru 7

LEVEL 06

TAP-122

[10] Does CAU


indicate
in
green-blackgreen area

TAP-122

Yes

4
[11] Were you
directed

to

test

receiver
gain and
net loss on other
digroup at this time
I

transmission

BANK RECEIVER

tests

Yes

to be made at this

No

Yes

[12] Move P6AD


cord to channel
unit in other
digroup and repeat
from step 5

PERFORM 04 MAINTENANCE

GAIN

[14] Remove
test
conrlections

NOTE4
All transmission
tests can be
performed on looped
bank before removing
connections

AND NET LOSS TEST

sumARY

TABLE A

per FIG. 1 and measure noise.


should be 23 dBrnc or less

Make

test

[~1 Get

connections

test

equipment

Level

EWIPMENT

per

TABLEA and check calibration


NMs [DLP.519]

of

[2] Verify switches are set as follows;


switch on MB ALM to ALARM DISAB and
switch 9 on lB MBTS depressed green
showing
[3

Make test

connections

On PTS-CAU, set REJ FLT switch

to OUT,

TEST switch

to

[5] On NMS, set FUNCTI@4switch

to 600/900,
to DAMP, DBRN switch to

WJRM-DAMP switch
85; and weighting
network
is aligned
with WTG

[6] On lWUS, rotate DBRN switch


for on-scale reading

[7] Verify

switch

TYPE

Noise Measuring
Set (NMS)

J94003C

D3/D4 PORTABLE TEST


SET (PTS) With Channel
Access Unit (CAU)

J98718AL PTS
J98718AJ CAU
I P6ti

2 Patch Cords

3P6A

1 Patch

3P6D

Cord for NMS

&

per FIG. 1,

SEM) LEVEL DB to OFF,

1
RECOME~ED

1 Patch Cord

age ~
[4

REQUIRED

so that

NfS calibration
checked,
NMS/PTS switches

)%

1=
No

C-MESSAGE

No

TAP-122

counterclockwise

[9] Repeat
steps 3
thru 8

on MB ALM is set to ALAI


and that switch 9 on 1S
green and all others are

DISAB position
MBTS is showing

showing black

PERFORM D4 MAINTENANCE

BANK IDLE

CIRCUIT

NOISE

TEST

i
I

Issue4
i MAR 1982
365-170-000
) DLP

PAGE 1 of

1535

D3/D4
04

PORTABLE

TEST

SET

TST CKT

~TO

CAh

Q!?
*

)(MT

I
L

DIGROUP B /7

A 1

/!

n!

%f

slut

PBAD
CORO
\

Illk2P-

m
0000

310

El

c?

00

MT

El

HoN

GRO

OBRN

FUNCTION

6?
FIG.

NOISE_ASURI~SEl

PERFORM K)4 MAINTENANCE

BANK IDLE

CIRCUIT

NOISE

TEST

365-170-000

~ DLP [

[9] Has test


been performed
on both

[10] Rotate
0

DBRN switch
on NS to 85

digroups

Yes

[11] Test digroup B


by moying connection
from channel unit in
(XT slot
to channel
unit in 4E&M slot

~=

Are further
transmission tests
to be made at
this time [NOTE 1]
[12]

No

m
NoTEl
All transmission
tests can be
performed on bank
before removing
test connections

PERFORM 04 MAINTENANCE

BANK IDLE

CIRCUIT

NOISE

TEST

TABLE A

[1] Obtain test equipment per


TABLEA and check calibration
CAU [DLP-518] [NOTE 1]

EUJI~

of

Noise easuring
D3/D4

REWIRED

set

(l@!S)

switch

switches are set as follows:


on MB ALM to ALARM DISAB and
9 on lB MBTSdepressed
green

(CAU)

J98718AL PTS
J98718AJ CAU

1 Patch Cord

I P6AD

2 Patch Cords

i 3P6A

1 Patch Cord For lWS

I 3P6D

showing

TYPE

I J94003C

PORTABLE TEST SET (PTS)

With Channel Access Unit


[2] Verify
switch

mxDMEmED

I
I

[3] Check calibration


of noise
measuring set (NW) [DLP-519]
MS calibration
checked, lWS/PTS
switches set,
and connections
made

[4] On NMS, set FIBWION switch to


N/M 600/900,
NORM-DAMP switch
to DAMP, DBRN switch to 85,
and weighting network for
C-MESSAGE weighting
i

[5] On PTS-CAU, set REJ FLT switch


to IN, TEST switch to CllAN
LINE, and SEMI LEVEL DB
switch to O
[6]

&
Page 3

NOTES
1. When using CAUfor
a series of tests,
the calibration
requires
checking
only once unless
CALlis suspected
of causing trouble
2. Switch on MB ALM

FIG.
1, Page 2
U4
3.

[7] See TABLEB, Page 3. Measure for requirements


for each position
of SEND LEVEL DB
switch. NMSDBRN switch must be
rotated counterclockwise
for on-scale
reading each time

PERFORM D4 MAINTENANCE

BANK DISTORTION

should be set to
ALARM DISAB
position
On lB MBTS switch

9 should be
depressed showing
green and all
others showing
black

TEST

D3/D4

P I

D4 TST CKT

!lil
~

T
DIGRDUP-+
B

I
1

II II

a.-.

PORTABLE

TEST

SET

m
1

Ir
A

IIIk2?

PSAD

3[
PI

I
3P6D

FIG.

MOISEMEASURIH

SET

I
PERFORM D4 MAINTENANCE

BANK DISTORTION

TEST

Issue

I MAR 1982

F=%%

3-

[11 ] Remove
test
connections

c1
[9] Repeat
steps 4
thru 8

[ 12] Rotate
switch
on W to 8S
1

Test digroup B
by moving connection
from channel unit in
w slot to channel
unit in 4E&M slot
test from
and repeat
step 7, Page 1
[13]

PERFORM 04 MAINTENANCE

BANK DISTORTION

TEST

I
i

TABLE B
SWTW

-L
Send level
dB
on CAU

POSITIONS
o

10
20
30
40

REWIRRUENIS

56
46
36
26
22

dBrnc
dBrnc
dBrnc
dBrnc
dBrnc

or
or
or
or
or

less
less
less
less
less

[ 1] Install

SIGNALINGPATH TEST
into CVT position
of maintenance bank
SET (SPTS)

[2] Verify

switch

on MB ALM is set
and that switch
MBTS is showing green
others are showing black

to ALARM DISAB

9 on lB
and all

[3]

TAP-123
\

See TABLEA and perform tests


1 and 2 setting
switches to
positions
as indicated

f
Yes
+
[7] Install
SPTS
into SPTS slot
and 4E&M channel
unit
into 4E&M
slot

TABLE A
TEST

SUXTOl

No

POSITION! SPTS LAWS L16HTE0

only

B only

PERFORM SIGNALING

TEST ON D4 MAINTENANCE

step

BANK

SUMARY

Set switch on MBAI-Mto ALARM DISAB position.


Perform
switch operations
and check that appropriate
lamps are
lighted per TABLESA and B

[1] On MB ALM unit

[2]

[3]

set

switch

to

ls
osition~
Verify that switches 1 thru 17 on
lB MBTS are extended
(black showing)
and that there is no unit in ~
position

[4]

Perform tests and check for


appropriate
lamps lighted per
TABLEA. Release setting
for
each test before going to next
test in sequence

No
*
TAP-125

TABLE A - VF CALIBRATI~
~ESSED
on loams

SUITOCES
TEST

1
2

9 and 12
9, 11, and 13

9,11,
and 14
9 and 17

NAKE 04

MAINTENANCE

AND SIGNALING

Do

lamps light
per TABLEA

BANK VOICE

TEST CHECK

LAHS LZOHTED

ON lA~TS
CAL
MC PASS
NC PASS

FREQUENCY CALIBRATION

Page 2

[5] Depress

all switches on
to extended (out
showing) position

16 MBTS

black

I
I

t
Yes

[6]
On 16 MBTS perform tests and
.lamps
check for appropriate
lighted per TABLEB. Release
setting
for each test before
going to next test in sequence

1
2
3
;
6t
7
8

SWXTOtES DEPRESSED
1 and 2
1,2, and 3
1 and 4
2 and 4
5 and 6
7, 8, and9
1 and 10

2 and 10

Applicable
if 20-Hz fuses
provided on PDU
~ Lamp Bmay light

to extended
(out
black showing)

position
No

No

[10] Refer to
SD-3C290 to
repair bank
wiring

[8] See NOTE1.


Replace LED(s)
and repeat
steps 5 thru 7

TABLE B
TEST

[11] Depress all


switches on 16 MBTS

i
LAMS LWITED

C and D
and F
C and F

A and
20-Hx
H and
C and
A and

D
J
F
D

[9] Replace
(loosen
retaining
screw
on rear) and
repeat steps
5 thru 7
iB-MBTS

are

NOTE1
LED may be removed
by pulling straight
out using long nose
pliers
4 I MAR
365-170-000

Issue

MAKE D4 MAINTENANCE
AND SIGNALING

BANK VOICE

TEST CHECK

FREQUENCY CALIBRATION

PAGE 2 of

1982
DLP

53a

[1] Depress BATT


pushbutton
(in
upper right corner)
and observe meter
indication

[2] Does meter


indicate
in green
area of scale

TEST

No

Yes

No
+

[4] Obtain
another lMS and
repeat procedure
beginning at
step 1

[31 Replace

[5] Set both SEN) IMP and


REC IMP switches
to 6000

Switches set
for calibration
Page 2

[6] Set both SEN) LEVEL and


REC LEVEL switches
to O (CAL)

[7] Set PUUTIW

CONDITION

TTS 4BNH TRANSMISSION

switch

to CAL SEMI

MEASURING SET

--(

[8] Does meter


indicate O dllhi

Yes

[9] Set FUUTION


switch to SEMW
TALK+REC

)-i

--i

No

[9] Adjust

CAL SW

control for
O indication

I
[10]

Obtain

another

lUS and
procedure
beginning at
step 1

repeat

CONDITION

TTS 4BNH TRANSMISSION

MEASURING

SET

[ 1] Are you
working with

Yes

[2] Calculate
required
drop buildout
by subtracting
office drop loss
from 1.5 dB
(buildout
= 1.5drop loss)

No

TP2

Analog Toll Office

TP3

Digital

Toll Office

TABLE B
ATTEWATOR SETTINGS

[3] Refer to TABLEA and


determine which
designations
apply to
ear and a ffices~
[4] Calculate
required drop buildout
by subtracting
office drop
cabling loss from 1.5 dB
(buildout
= 1.5-drop
loss)

(transmit

for type

of step 4 to
and receive)
offices ~

values

per TABLEB

[6] If EMLof trunk is different


than
that indicated
in TABLEC, add or
subtract
difference
to receive
value of step 5 [m
1]

DETERMINE

ATTENUATOR SETTINGS

TF3

3T,
4.5R

TP2

lT,
1.5R

lT,
1.OR

lT,
2.5R

CHANNEL UNIT

~~

3T,
3.5R

ElziiEE
FOR MESSAGE SERVICE

3T,
1.5R

IE%Eil
TABLE C
TRU4K LOSS (EML)

~m

TPO

-A--l !i!:iim:

[5] Add value

FAROFFICE

WAR
WFI=

NOTES
1. If EML is greater
than that of
TABLEC,
difference
should
be added; if
smaller,
difference
should
be subtracted
2, If setting
2EkM6,
receive attenuator
must be set for
1.4 dB more than
value determined
in step 7

[1]

See NOTE1. Get two


KS-19531 or equivalent
pin plugs that fit pin jacks

on

uandu~
set
[2] On Am to be tested,
3-position
switch to
NORM and set MEM
switch to OFF
T

[3] On LIU,
LP jack

insert pin plug


[NOTE2]

into

testing
maintenance
bank

J__
[5] On MBALM
operate switch to
ALARM DISAB and
verify that all
switches on 1A or
lB MBTS are out
(black

showing)

Yes

[7] Wait for


lamp to go
off (about
L

AY

NOTES
1. Performance of
this procedure
should be stopped
any time lamps do
not light or
extinguish
as
indicated
and user
should return to
trouble analysis
procedure.
2. For Mode 3, pin
plug should be
inserted
into LP
jack corresponding
to digroup being
tested(LPA

or LPB)

PERFORM BANK ALARMS TROUBLE TEST

PAGE

1 of

1541

[8] Familiarize
yourself
with steps 9 and 10
before proceeding

[9] Insert pin plug into


red R CODE jack on
RU for digroup being
tested

TABLE A
w

RCVon RU\
AR on Am
1P

[11] On ACU
momentarily
9
depress AU)
pushbutton

[ 10] Observe
that lamps
light per
TABLEA

on ACX

TPD on TPU

PERFORM BANK ALARMS TROUBLE TEST

Page 3

[ 12]

Remove pin plug from


R CODEjack on RU

[13] On ACUset 3-position


switch to LL (LL lamp
lights)

PERFORM BANK ALARMS TROUBLE TEST

[14] Observe
that AY lamp on
@ ACU lights and
remains lighted
after 20 seconds

[]5]
*

on ACIJ,

set TP MEM
switch to MEN
4

m
L

yourself with steps


[16] Familiarize
17 through 20; timing is important
(less than 20 seconds between
steps 17 and 19)
I
[17] On ACU set 3-position
switch to NORM

1
Observe that
AY lamps
on ACUare lighted
after 20 seconds
[20]

AR and

[18]

Insert plug into


on RU

[19]

Remove pin plug from


LP jack on LIU

RCODE

_J~

PERFORM BANK ALARMS TROUBLE TEST

t--
Page 5

i MAR 1982

Issue

365-170-000

iDLPi

PAGE 4 of 5

1541]

[21] Familiarize
yourself
with steps 22 through
24 before proceeding

[22] Remove pin plug from


R C4)DEjack on W

[23] Insert pin


LP jack on

lw3?--l

[24 ] Observe
that lamps
* extinguish
per
TABLEB

GEnl
RCV on RU
AR on AtXJ
ACQ on AU4
TPO on TPU

AY on Am

PERFORM BANK ALARMS TROUBLE TEST

I+E%S%
L

sumARY

per Fig. 1 to test channel. Verify


connections
are made at far end. CAU indication
should
be between -0.25
and +0.25.
Verify that test indications
at far end are within specified
limits

Make test

connections

/
[2] Is channel
unit installed
in channel

[1] Obtain test


equipment per
TABLEA
+

D3/D4
SET

I J98718AL

POUTABLE TEST

(PTS) With Channel


Access Unit (CAU)

2 Patch Cords

1 Patch Cord

R~

[3] Install
D4 channel
unit
of
any
type
B
into channel slot to
be tested

Yes

TABLE A
EOUIPMENT RWIRED

C&3

DTYPEI

PTS 1
J98718AJ CAU

I, 3P6A
I P6AD

I
I

PERFORM END-TO-END

NET LOSS TROUBLE TEST

Issue

4 I MAR 1982
365-170-000
1 DLP
a
PAGE 1 of

I 5421

on D3/M
[4]

PORTABLE TEST SET (pTS):


of CAU
Check calibration

[DLP-518]

[5]

Set TEST switch


OIAN LINE

to
r-

(
[6]

Set REJ FLT switch


to our

[7]

Set SENJ LEVEL 0S


switch to O

calibrated
and switches
set on W

Ail

,!

Test set
connected
to channel

f
[8] Make test

connections

per FIG. 1

[9] Verify that test equipment is


connected at other office and
that test is ready to be performed~

~
[10] Observe CAU
meter. It should
be in green-blackgreen area
[m
1]
4

If far end is DID


and not using 438B
plug in MATCN NET,
receive level will
be .25 dB hot and
read to right of

PERFORM END-TO-END

NET LOSS TROUBLE TEST

PAGE20f

1542]

BLACK

LINE\

\\

II

-0.5

/BLACKLME

//

I
-0.25/

PREFERREO

o
08

/
BLACXAREA

+0.A

+0.5

CRO&ATCHAREA
LIGHTGREEN

. 04 PLUG-IN
/

CNANNEL
UNITS

3P8A
PATCH

CORDS
\

Iii4

\
w

110

03/D4 PORTABLE TEST SET

D4TSTCKT

/0

REJ FLT
..,..,
T

1S1

TST

TST

KNURLED

SIDE OF

PLUG IS PLUOGEO

INTOXMTJACK

i
TST

1111

P6A0 PATCH CORDBETWEEN

04 CHANNEL
UNIT BEING
TESTEO AND 04 TST CKT

FIG.

PERFORM END - TO- END NET LOSS TROUBLE TEST

365-170-000

I DLP1

PAGE 3 of 3

1542]

sumi4RY
Make
test
meets

TABLE A

per FIG. 1. Verify far end has made


connections
to same test channel. Verify D4 bank
noise requirement of 23 dBrnc or less
test

[1] Obtain

connections

test

equipment

l!@l_

REWIRED

D3/D4 PORTABLE TEST


SET (PTS) With Channel
Access Unit (CAU)

per TABLEA

Noise Measuring
(N#S)
[2] Set switches

on CAUas follows:

REJ FLT to OUT, SEm LEVEL to OFF,


and TEST to CNANLINE

[3]

[4]

Check calibration
[DLP-519]

Set

J98718AL

PTS

J98718AJ CAU

2 Patch Cords

3P6A

1 Patch Cord

P6AD

1 Patch Cord

3P6D

Page 3

TYPE

J94003C or
equivalent

Connection ade
and ready for test

of MS

I
RECWMEDED

NMS switches
as follows:
FLNCTION
600/900, NORM-DAMP to DAMP, DBRN to
with WTG
85, and C-MESSAGE to align
Set
to

[5]

connections
per FIG. 1 and
verify far end has made test
connections
to same test channel

Make test

I
PERFORM END-TO-END

IDLE

CIRCUIT

NOISE TRWBLE

TEST

[---

issue

1 MAR 1982

365-170-000

PAGE 1 of 3
-

i DL~

[543

3P6A PATCH COROS>

10)

D3/D4 PORTABLE TEST SET

1-

D4 CHANNEL
UNIT

qii
TST

mm

.0

TST

\
1

REJ FLT
IN OUT

SEND

KNURLED SIDE OF
PLUG IS PLUGGED
INTO XHT JACK

LEVEL

06

-3020-10
-40
OFF

00

Ka

Iii)

XMT

TST

TEST
CHAN LINE

RCV

Qo
=

CAL

CHA
DRO

Oq
XMT

RCV

EXT

Osc

EXT
OETR

6000 TERW

P6AD PATCH CORO BETUEEN


04 CHANNEL UNIT BEING
TE6TE0 AND 04 TST CKT

&
\

POWER CORO Y

3P6D
PATCH
CORD

C-?!ESSAGE
ALIGNEO
WITH UTG

FIG.

PERFORM END-TO-END

IDLE

CIRCUIT

NOISE

TROUBLE TEST

NOISE REASIRfINGSET

[6] Measure
noise by rotating
DBRN switch
on
NMScounterclockwise
for on-scale reading

[7] Observe MS
for requirements
in TABLEB

TABLE B
~

AT

REauxRms

FAR ~

DID

26 dBrnc or

D2

28 dBrnc or less

D3

23 dBrnc

or

less

D4

23 dBrnc

or

less

PERFORM END-TO-END

IDLE

less

CIRCUIT

NOISE

TROUBLE TEST

SUHARY

test connections
per FIG. 1, Page 3.
Verify that test equipment is connected at other office
Requirements are given in
for channel being tested.
TABLEB, Page 4. Verify that test indications
at other
office are within specified
limits

Make

[1] Obtain
equipment

test

per
TABLEA [1U)TE1]

?age

t-

TABLE A
EaJxm

~Tvm

MouIRw

D3/D4 FORTABLE TEST


SET (PTS) with Channel
Access Unit (CAU)

J98718AL
J98718AJ

Noise
(w)

J94003C or
Equivalent

Measuring

Set

cords

3P6A

1 Patch Cord

P6AD

1 Patch Cord

3P6D

2 Patch

(FTS)
(CAU)

NOTE1
Test equipment and
procedures for DID,
D2, and D3 banks are
given in BSPS for
those

PERFORM END-TO-END

DISTORTION

TROUBLE TEST

banks

[21
. . On D3/D4 PTS
set switches as follows:
REJ FLT to IN
SEND LEVEL DO to O
LINE
TEST to ~AN
~

[3] Check calibration


tws [DLP-519]

%:%:

set on BUS and


D3/D4 PTS

of

[4] Set NMSswitches as follows:


FUNCTION to 600 or
to 600/900
(on 3C ~)
H-DAMP
to DAMP
D8RN to 85

C-MESSAGEto align

with WTG

151
connections
per
. . Make test
FIG. 1, page3 [See NOTE2]

[6] Verify that test equipment is


connected at other office and
test is ready to be performed~

Test equipment
connected at

Page 4

NOTE2
With test equipment
comected as shown
in FIG. 1, you can
transmit and receive
at same time;
therefore,
the plug
need not be
moved between
transmit and receive
positions
Issue

IMAR 1982

365-170-600

PERFORM END-TO-END

DISTORTION

TROUBLE TEST

PAGE 2 ef

my
4

544

3P6A PATCH CORDS>

!7)

03/04 PORTABLE TEST SET

REJ FLT
IN OUT

D4 TST CKT
TO CAk

b
D4 PLUG-IN
CHANNEL UNITS

00

KNURLED SIDE OF
PLUG IS PLLK3GE0
INTO XMT JACK

SEND

XMT
Y

~]

fir%
w

RCV

LEVEL

El

CAU

DE

-30-2~lo
-40
OFF

TO 04 Ch

TEST
CHAN LINE
CHA
CAL

Jl!l

EXT
Osc

1ST

!?

J l/4AHP

o
0

P6AD PATCH COROBETUEEN


04 CHANNEL UNXT BEING
TESTED ANO D4 TST CKT

VOL

/
m
310

Id OD
310

T lNR

00
T

DIA!

\
6 :, 0 0
o

3P6D
PATCH
CORD

ACmNDC
=

mm
R

al

CAL

TROUBLE TEST

C-RESSAGE
ALIGNED
UITH UTG

OAHP

FUNCTION

FIG.

POWER CORO /

TO- END DISTORTION

EXT
DETR

@
L

EM)-

NOISE

MEASURING

SET

PAGE 3 of 4

5441

[7] See TABLEB. Set


SENOLEVEL switch (on CAU)
to each position
(0-40)
while far end
measures for each setting

[9] See TABLEC.


Have far end set
pad key to each
position
listed
while you measure
for each setting

[8] Is far end


D2 channel
bank
No

I
*

[10] See TABLEB.


Have far end send
I at each level listed

I
I

I
I

E
==R==-i
o

56 or less

10

46 or less

I
1A

20

36 or less

19

30

1 26 or less

40

I t

22 or less

28 if far end is D2 bank


t26 if far end is D2 bank

PERFORM END-TO-END

DISTORTION

CTR

56 or less

36 or less

24 or less

TROUBLE TEST

l%!%?%

[1] Get equipment

listed

in TABLEA
TABLE B
FAR - Em
BANK

[2] Find section in TABLEB that


corresponds
to type bank at far
end (use only that section
throughout the test)

Page 2
DID

D2

Unit

J98718AL PTS J98718AJ CAU

access

(CAU)

Patch Cords

Patch Cords

yy

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

24
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

EL

11
12

1 24
2 13
3 14
4 15
5 16
6 17
7 16
8 19
9 20
10 21

22 10
23 11

23

11 22

24

12

23

12

:
3
4
5
6

13
14
15
16
17
18

9
10
1
2

13
14
15
16
17
18

12
11
9
10
1
2

24
23
21
22
13

19

19

!
10
11
12

20
21
22
23
24

4
5
6
7
8

20
21
22
23
24

4
5
6
7
8

15
16
17
18
19
20

24 23
1 24
21
32
43
54
65
76
87
98
10
9
11 10

13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

3P6A
;
3
4

I P6AD

:
7
8
9
10
11
12

CROSSTALK

TROUBLE TEST

12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

EA*ED
(13.24)

UOST LIKELY
INTERFERIM
CHAM4ELS

13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22

D30RD4

PERFORM END-TO-END

v
MST
LIKELY
INIERFERI~
~LS
)

[3] For channel under test determine


two most likely interfering
channels.
See TA8LE B

D3/D4 PORTABLE TEST


SET with channel

CJ4AWEL
BEING

11

14

12 11
13 12
14 13
15 14
16 15
17 16
18 17
19 18
20 19
21 20
22 21
23 22

on

Cm:

[4] Check calibration


of CAU [DLP-518]

[5]

Set switches
as follows:
REJ FLT to OUT
SEW LEVEL to O
TEST to OfAN LINE

On noise
[6]

measuring set (NfS):


Check calibration
of FMS [DLP519]
and
NMSready

CAU

[7]

Make sure 497A network


is installed
with
C-MESSAGE designation
aligned with uTG

[9] Are
you going
to transmit
or receive

Page 3

Receive
[8]

w
Page 4

Set switches as follows:


FINCIION to W 600/900
for 3C
(or M 600 for 3A)
NOM-DAMP to WRM
DeRN to 50

PERFORM END-TO-END

CROSSTALK

TROUBLE TEST

Issue
4 I MAR 1982,
365-170-000
I DLP

I PAOE
-- 2

of

I 5451

[10]

Make test

connections

interfering
Page

channel

for first
[See FIG. 1,

[11] Have far end measure crosstalk


[see TABLE C]
leve

Yes
~

1121
.
. Repeat

second

steps

10 and

interfering

of test
I NO

11 for
channel

&
I

I
I

TvFaaAmt
AT FAR _

27

dBrnc or less

27 dBrnc or less

D2
DID

aaan~s

D3 or D4

TABLE C

PERFORM END-TO-END

part

32 dBrnc

or

less

First
interfering
channel
allowed 29 dBrnc or less

CROSSTALK

TROUBLE TEST

is
I

[ 14] Make test connections


per FIG. 1, Page 5
to channel being measured

[. 15]. Verify far end is connected


first
interfering
channel

to

I
Yes

[ 16] Measure and note crosstalk


level
rotating
Bm switch for
on-scale reading [See TABLED]

by

No

[ 17] Verify far end is connected to second


interfering
channel while you
measure level. See TABLED

I nPEMmt

Page 3
i

TABLE D

04 RSWIRSNSNIS

AT FAR =

D3 or D4

27 dBrnc

or

less

D2

27 dBrnc

or

less

I D1O

32 dBrnc or less

I * First interfering
channel
is allowed 29 dB;nc or
less

PERFORM END-TO-END

I
I

CROSSTALK TROUBLE TEST

CHAtil

UNITS IN 04 DIGROUP

CHANNEL

BEINS

MEASURED

D3/D4

PORTABLE

TEST

SET
/

Ill
.10 ONE INTERFERING
THEN OTHER

3P60
CoRo

UTG

no

000
310

El

o
6R0

II

FUNCTION

NOISE HEA6URINGSET

FIG.

PERFORM END-TO-END

CROSSTALK

TROUBLE TEST

PAGE 5 of

15451

63 dBrnc and no more than 5 counts


that test indications
at other office
limits

sumARY

at

Make test connections


per FIG. 1. Verify that test
equipment is connected at other office for channel being
tested.
Requirements are no more than 1 count in 5 minutes
[1]

Get test

equipment

{2] On D31D4 PTS,

set

SET

as follows:

REJ FLT to OUT


SEND LEVEL to OFF
TEST

to

[4]

Set test set


as follows:

6H impulse

Impulse

DIAL-MEAS to MEAS
IMFULSES ABOVE D6RN

Counter

1 Patch Cord

on Impulse Counter

to 63

[5] Make test

connect ions per FIG. 1

[6] Verify that test


at other end

PERFORM END-TO-END

(PTS) with Channel

3 Patch Cords

of
[DLP-522]

switches

Verify
specified

IMPULSE

equipment

is connected

NOISE TROUBLE TEST

J98718AJ (CAU)

counter calibrated
and switches
set on D3/D4 PTS

LINE

[3] Check calibration


impulse counter

58 dBrnc.

are within

TABLE A

per TABLEA

switches

at

Page 3

I J94006H
I 3P6A

j P6AD

mk
TST

TST

TST

04 PLUG-IN
CHANNEL UNITSN

03/04

00

T$T

m
K14T

00
-60011

IRPULSE:ABUVE DBRN

II

RCV

TERR-

rl

/ \

el~

Il?i%!a

1/4 ARP

BATT

o QN4%
. ..

w
n
mN

I
II

o
;

306

DIAL
310
240

EJ((,,p

II

CAL AT 93 MN

mmlmm
g

OURINGINTERVAL _________ ._-.._ -__..

OIAL-MEAS
WITCH \

SET

TO D4 Clk

KNURLEO SdOF
PLLIGIS I
PLUGGEO INTO XHT JACK
I

TEST

04 1ST CKT

-51

PORTABLE

-w

al

TST

P6A0 PATCH CORO BETWEEN


04 CHANNEL UNIT BEING
TESTED ANO 04 TST CKT

DURINGINTERVAL
I
3P6D

p$ii?
1

L.

FIG.

END-TO- END IMPULSE

NOISE

TROUBLE TEST

PATCH

CORD

On 6H Impulse Counter:
[7] Rotate DUSIMG INTERVAL
fully clockwise and then
counterclockwise
to 5 MIMJIES

[8] Observe that


O or 1 after

[9]

counter

Set IBPULSE
switch

to

indicates

minutes=
ABOVE

DBRN

58

[10] Rotate DURINGINTERVAL fully


clockwise and then
counterclockwise
to 5 MIWES

[11] Observe that


5 or

less

counter

after

PERFORM END-TO-END

indicates

5 minutes

IMPULSE

NOISE

TROUBLE TEST

PAGE 3

0+

[546/

[2] Reuawe 46

MAINAL.Mfuse

[3] Remove 48

MAIN 10A

fuse

[4] Remove -48

ABS fuse

mu

subassembly

or
Maintenance
M

FIG.

REMOVE FUSES FROM PDU SUBASSEMBLY

Bank

Bank

On !%MJ:
[1] See FIG. 1. Verify that 48S
A
and B fuses are 70A (white bead)
or 70C (blue bead) fuses
[2]

Verify that
fuses (blue

fuses
[NOTE 1]

--48F A and B

bead)

are 70C
Yes

[3]

Verify that -=48V fuse


(orange bead)

is 70B fuse
No

PDU
[4]

Verify
(violet

that 20 HZ fuse is 70F fuse


bead) NOTE2]

J98726AK-IL()
SD-3C312 01
4W

0
o

ALfl

G17D

o0

-48V

-48s ,
1

O@C(-J ( o
&JA
Ao

20

HZ

o
o

Bo

GRO

-48F~

20 Hz

FIG.

INSTALL

PDU FUSES

No

[6] Replace PDU


[DLP-523 ] and
repeat from
step 1

[7] Refer to
SD-3C304 for channel
bank or to SD-3C290
for maintenance bank
to correct bank
wiring
NOTES
1. 48F fI.!SeS
provided when
filtering
is
required
2. 20 HZ fuse
provided when

[1] Obtain KS-14510 VOM


or equivalent
and
condition
it to easure
dc volts [DLP0521]

TE1]~

[3] Does meter


indicate
43 to
53 VDc

[2] See NOTE2. At FDU, connect


+ (red) lead to black GRD
jack

and-

[4] Disconnect
meter

4
No

No

(black)

lead to red -48V

Yes

jack
t

--l

[7] Refer to SD-3C304


for channel bank or
to SD-3C290 for
maintenance bank to
repair bay wiring

[5] Replace
PMJ [DLP-523]
&
w
[6] Install
fuses
in following order:
10A first,
ALM second,
and -48AM third.
Repeat from Step 2

NoEs

1. KS-20599 digital
voltmeter
or
equivalent
ay
be used
2. If channel bank
is operating
in
Mode 4, Steps 2
and 3 must be
performed on both
banks

MEASURE VOLTAGE AT PDU -48V

JACK

=$?%%

[1] See FIG. 1. Set switch


on W
to OFF and
insert PCU into PCU
slot [NOTE 1]
\

FAIL

and ACO

lamps on
PCA)lighted
I

1
Yes
A

[2] Set switch

on m

No

No

to ON

w
L

[4] Replace
PUJ and set
switch to
ON
v
*

Pcu
ACO @
FAIl@
-0

OFF

+12

[5] Reinstall
original
W
and set switch
to OFF

[6] Refer to
SD-3C304 for channel
bank or to SD-3C290
for maintenance bank
to
correct
wiring
problem

o
-12

ON
u

0
+5

NOTE1
If channel bank is
operating
in Mode 4,
FIG.

- PCU

~
must be
installed
into
banks

both

MAR 1982
Issue
4
OLP
365-170-000

INSTALL

PCU

PAGE 1 of

550

[1] Get KS-1451O


V(IMor equivalent
and condition
it
to measure dc
volts [DLP-521]
[NOTE 1]

TABLE
PaJ
TEST
POINTS

~CTIOMS
+ RED
LEAD

- BLACK
LEAO

+12V

+12V

GRD

+ 5V
-12V

+ 5V

GRD

GRD

-12V

NO LOAO
VOLTAGE
REQUIREMENTS
(Voc)

to 13
4.5 to 6
11.4
to 13
11.4

[2] See NOTE2. At


PCU, make connections
and measure voltages
per TABLEA

Yes

No

[4] Replace
PCU and set
switch to
m

No

-L

[5] Reinstall
original
PCU
and set switch
to OFF
NOTES
1, KS-20599 digital
voltmeter or
equivalent
may
be used.
2. If channel bank

[6] Refer to
SD-3C304 for channel
bank or SD-3C290 for
maintenance bank to
repair bay wiring

is operating
in
Mode 4, Steps 2
and

3 must

be

performed to
both ends

MEASURE VOLTAGES AT PCU TEST

POINTS

SUMIARY

Determine type and number equalizers


needed from TABLEB.
Obtain equalizers
and install
on TW(S),
TABLE B

[1] Determine D4 mode of operation


from office records or from
type LIU to be installed
in
bank

EQUALIZER
04
MODE

[TABLE A]

needed

ED-3C585-30,G1
ED-3C585-30,G2
ED-3C585-30,G3

0-220
220-440
440 -655

1 (in
each
TPU)

ED-3C656-30,G1
ED-3C656-30,G2
ED-3C656-30,G3
ED-3C656-30,G4
ED-3C656-30,G5
ED-3C656-30,G6
ED-3C656-30,G7

0-90
91 - 250
251 -410
411 -570
571 -730
731 - 890
891 - 1050

4A

1 (in
each
TPU)

ED-3C656-30,G7

[3]

Obtain

[4]

Get

required

a
equal

TW plug-in,
note equalizer
placement instructions
printed on circuit
board,
and install
equalizers

TABLE A
TvPE LIU
LIU-

LIU-3

LIU-4T

LIU-4R

or G6

25

or
* Cable length from D4 bank to DSX.() cross-connect
to office repeater
bay, if DSX-() is not used
t Either 3C655-or 3C585 equalizers
may be used for Mode 3
$ When service on one digroup will precede service on
other digroup in Mode 3, equalizers
for both digroups
should be installed
to prevent service interruption
later

LIU-2

ED-3C655-30,G1

3f

for D4-bank

CASLE LEN6TH 10 BE
EQUALIZED*
(FEET)

o- 133
133-267
267-400
400 -533
533-655

2
%,%?,:=

J
TVPE

ED-3C655-30,G2
ED-3C655-30,G3
ED-3C655-30,G4
ED-3C65530,G5

1
[2]

4 I MAR 1982
365-170-000
I DLP

Issue

INSTALL

TPU EQUALIZERS

D4 CHANNEL BANK

I --
PAGE

of

[1] See IWTES 1 and 2. From circuit


order information determine
what equipment will be
connected at far end of
each digroup

[2]

[3]

Locate option
stamping alongside
TPU
window [FIG. 1]

Channel
counting
options
set

Get KS-21838, L1
extractor
or Iongnose
pliers

[5] Install
TPU in TPU
slot (TPD A and
B lamps lighted)
4

[4]

For each digroup (A


and B), position
(with
tool) white plug inside
unit to match far end
equipment [FIG. 1]

--l
, UINOON
/

4
UHITE
PLUG

010

-uQl_
-uQl_
010

DIGROUP
DESIGNATION
(A OR 8)
A.

1 -

D1O

SEQ
02

B.

SELECTEO

FIG.

Channel

SET CHANNEL COUNTING OPTIONS


CHAlQ4EL BANK

TPU

TPU

TPU

02

SEQ
02

SELECTEO

Counting

C.

SEQ (03,
TERMINAL)
SELECTEO

04. oIGRoup
OR OACS

Options

ON TPU AND INSTALL

TPU - D4

NOTES
1. htlen service on
one digroup
wi-11 precede
other in Mode 3,
options in TPU
for both digroup:
should be set to
prevent service
interruption
later.
2.
If channel bank
is operating
in
Mode 4, this
procedure must bt
performed on
both banks

SWY

Determine

required

plug-ins

and install

per

FIG. 1

[1] Observe stamping under


each slot for required
plug-in unit

[2]

Install
TUs and RUS
in designated
slots

[3]

Install
plug-ins
shown per FIG. 1, Page 2
to produce required mode ~

[4]

Depress ACO
pushbutton on
armedA(s)NOTE 1
Modes 1 and 2

require one bank


or two digroups
to be loaded.
Mode 3 requires
one digroup. Modes
4 and 4A require
two banks or four
digroups
loaded

INSTALL

T&$,

RUS,

ACUS AND LIU

(OR LIU/SU)

- D4 CHANNEL BANK

to be

MODE

MODE2

Pcu

MODE 3 MODE 4
(OR 4A

TPU

DIGROUP

LIU-I

d
=
3
A

ml

ml

-b

TU

RU

DSIC
SIGNAL
FROM
BANK

Oslc
SIGNAL

0s1
S16ML

FR~
BABU

FRom
BAWK

DIGROUP

Pou

/
NODE4
(4A)
ARRANGEMENT :
LIU-4T
(OR 41A
/
IN TRHT BANM
(TOP BAM()

LIU-4R

IMRCV

BAM
(BOTTOM BANK) WHICHIS
MIRED TO TRHT BAW (TOP BANK)
TO PRODUCE 4 DIGROUPS

(OR 4M /

IN RCVBNK=
(BOTTIl!SAM()
4

FIG.

INSTALL

TUS , RUS , ActhE , AND LIU

1 -

Chonn.1

(OR LIU/SU)

Bank

- D4 CHANNEL BANK

W+i%

I;,

SUMARY

Determine required timing from circuit


order. Set timing
OIU
options on OIU per FIG. 1 and 2, Page 2. Install

[1] Is loop or
external
timing
required.
(See
circuit
layout
information)
\

[5] Verify local


timing (no loop
is
8 or external)
selected
by
plug(s)
in OIU
window [FIG. 1 or 2,
I PaQe 21-

No

Yes

[2

[3

[4]

Get KS-21838,
L1
extractor
or longnose
pliers

Obtain OIU and locate


socket plug assembly
on circuit
board

With tool, position


white plug(s)
inside
unit to select external
timing [FIG. 2, Page 2]
or loop timing using
one digroup as reference
[FIG. 1 or 2, Page 2]
INOTE 1]

MAKE TIMING OPTION ON OIU

LooP
option
set

[6] If OIU-2 is being


installed,
verify that
B option plug is on D
side of 01 jack inside
OIU [FIG. 2, Page 2]
[NcnE

2]

@7-I

NOTES

1. Both digroups
will be loop
timed to
reference
digroup which
must go to
either
No. 4 ESS or
DDS equipment
2.

OIU-2,
List
2
does not
contain
D T
option
plug

OIU-2
or

OIU- 1

a
or

OIU-3

OPTIOMSELECTONMDE
BY POSITIONOF ktHITEpLUG~

OIU-4

OPTION SELECTONMAOE BY
POSITIONOF MITE PLUSS ,

EXT-

LT LOC T * LOCALTIRING

LOOP
TIME

BOGP-

B OGP = OIGROUP B REFERENCE

C7
DOT

-_51

STEP 6

LOOP TIMING,
OIGROUP A
REFERENCE

A.

DIGROUPB
REFERENCE

c.

OIU-4 CONTAINS
LEOUHICHLIGHTSNHEN
TININGPR06LE~O~
IN EXTERMLTIRING
rnOE. TOGGLE
SUITCHEM6LES OR
CIRCUITRY
OISASLESTIRINGMONITORING

B.

FIG.

MAKE TIMING

NO LOOP
TIflING

LOOP TIMING,

1 -

OPTION

OIU-1

OR OIU-3

ON OIU

FIG.

2-

OIU-2 (Ex~le
Digroup
B)

A OGP -

A 06P s DIGROUP A REFERENCE

MHITE
PLUGS

LOCT -

EXT * EXTERNAL TIMING

Local

Bank Timing

[1] Get KS-I451O or


equivalent
VW and
condition
VOMto easure
volts dc [DLP-521]
[NOTE 1]
[3] Are
voltages of
TABLEA
obtained

[2] See NOTE2. See TABLEA.


Measure dc voltages at
W test points

No

[7] Disconnect
Yes

eter

No

v
[4] Replace
FCU and set
switch to
m

[5] Return
original
PCU .
to operation

[6] Refer to SD-3C304


for channel bank or
to SD-3C290 for
aintenance
bank to
repair bay wiring

NYrEs

TABLE A
Pal

=m
MEASURE VOLTAGES AT PCU TEST POINTS

~law

VOLTA6S

RSYHSWS

WDER

LOAD

1. KS-20599 digital
voltmeter or
equivalent
may
be used.
2. If channel
bank is
operating
in
Mode 4, Steps
2 and 3 ust be
performed on
both banks

[1]

Get two KS-19531 or equivalent


pin plugs to fit pin jacks on
RU and LIU [NOTES 1 and
2]
1

[2]

[3]

On ACU to be tested,
3-position
switch to
?WRM and set MEM
switch to OFF

On LIU,
LP

jack

insert

[5] on MB ALM

set

pin plug

operate

[4] Are you


testing
maintenance
bank

Yes

No

into

switch to
and
verify that all
switches on 1A or
lB MBTSare out
(black showing)

ALARM DXSAB

[NOTE 3]

Is yellow
lamp
lighted on
ACU
[6]

AY

Page 2

Yes

Yes

w
TAP-123

I 20 seconds)

NOTES
. . If channel bank
is connncted to
a remote E2 alarm
system, proper
operation
of that
system can be
verified
during
performance of
this procedure by
having personnel
at E2 equipment
monitor alarms
This procedure
should be
performed as
follows:
Maintenance Bankone time on each
ACU installed.
Channel Bank Mode 1 - one time
Mode 2 - two times
(once on each ACIJ)
Mode 3 - one time
on ACU in digroup
being turned up
Mode 4 - Four
times (once on
each ACU).
For Mode 3, pin
plug should be
inserted
into LP
jack corresponding
to digroup being
tested (LPA or
LPB)

TEST BANK ALAUMS

yourself
[8] Familiarize
with steps 9 and 10
before proceeding\

Do
lamps light
per TABLEA
[10]

[9] Insert pin plug into


red R COOEjack on
RU for digroup
being
tested

No

CE&3

Yes

[11] OnACU,
momentarily
depress AC9
pushbutton

+
[12] Is ACO
lamp on ACU
lighted

TABLE A

El
LAMP

RCV

on

RU

AR

on ACU

1P

on

A(2J

IEH!x_l

Page 3

No

[13 ] Remove
pin plug
from R COOE
jack on RU

r-%
[14] Replace

TEST BANK ALARMS

Yes

rim=l

[16] On ACU
set 3-position
switch to LT
position

Yes

[21] Remove
pin plug
from R CODE
jack on RU

No

[18] Remove
pin plug
from R CODE
jack on RU

>

[22] OnACU,
set 3-position
switch to LL
(LL lamp lights)

w
lb

[19] Replace
ACU

[23] Does yellow


lamp on ACU
light and remain
lighted after
20 seconds
AY

[20] Repeat
procedure
beginning with
step 6, Page 1

TEST BANK ALARMS

I
(-=%--)
No

[24] On ACU,
set 1P MEM
switch to MEM

Page

[25] Familiarize
yourself with steps
26 through 29; timing is important
(less than 20 seconds between
steps 26 and 28)

[26] On ACUset 3-position


switch to LT, pause
for at least 2 seconds,
then set to NORM

[27] Insert plug into


on RU
[28] Remove pin
LP jack

on

[29] Are both red


AR and yellow AY
lamps on ACU
lighted after
20 seconds

R CODE

Ww-_J
+

[30] Insert
pin plug in

LP

and
set MM switch
on ACIJ to OFF
jack

on LIU

[31 ] Wait 30 seconds


and repeat this
procedure beginning
with step 11, Page 2

TEST BANK ALARMS

Issue

1 MAR 1982

yourself
[32] Familiarize
with steps 33 through
35 before proceeding
1
[33]

*
[35] Do
lamps extinguish
per TABLEB

pin plug from


R COOEjack on RU

Remove

[34] Insert pin plug


LP jack on LIU

Yes

[36] On ACU,
set TP MEA!
switch to
OFF

No

into
-

CEE)

[40]
Replace ACIJ
and repeat this
procedure beginning
with step 6, Page 1

@EY-i
1

Yes

TABLE B

[38] Is there
another ACU
in bank to
be tested

Yes

[39] Repeat
this procedure
for other ACU
from step 2,
Page 1

No

(4
Page 6

1
TEST BANK ALARMS

Issue

I MAR 1982

Yes

[44]
Remove
pin plug from
b LP jack on
LIU

,
I

NCI

(-)+

[45] Is red AR
or yellow AY (or
both) lamp(s)
lighted on any ACU

Yes

[50] On either
ACIJwith alarm,
momentarily
depress ACO

No

[51] On either
with alarm,
set 3-position
switch to LT
position

[46] Insert
pin plug into
R CODEjack of
any RU in bank

ACU

No

+
[43]

Remove

pin plug from


LP jack on LIU
in maintenance
bank

[47] On ACU
with alarm,
momentarily
depress ACO
pushbutton

1
w

[48] On ACU
with alarm, set
3-position
switch to LT
position

TEST BANK ALARMS

@
1

[49] Remove
plug from
R CQDE
jack

\
Page 7
1

[52] On LIU,
momentarily
depress TST
pushbutton

[53] Is PASS
lamp on LIU
lighted

Page 8

I
f

No

[54] Replace
LIU (each one
for Mode 4)

I LT

I
I

F
TEST BANK ALARMS

[57] On ACU, set 3-position


to NORM,depress KO,

switch
then set

to

LT

I
(58] Insert pin plug into
on either RU in bank

R COOE

[63] Remove
pin plug from

jack

Yes
lighted

No
[59

Momentarily

press

1ST

button

on LIU-

R CODE jack

of

switch
on ACIJ to NORM,
and depress ACO
RU,

set

No

+
+

[61 ] Replace LIU


(each one-Mode 4).
Move LT switch to
NORMthen back to
LT and repeat
steps 59 and 60
I

[62] Return original


to operation
and
replace SU (each
one-Mode 4). Move
LT switch
to NORM
then back to LT, and
steps 59 and 60
repeat
LIU

TEST BANK ALARMS

IssIJa

PAGE 8 of

365-170-000

I MAR 1902
i OLP
8

1557

[2] on ACU
momentarily
Yes
@ depress ACO
pushbutton
(ACO
lamp lighted)

[1] OnACU is
red AR or yellow
AY (or both)
lamp(s) lighted
No

A
[4]

[3] on ACM set


3-position
switch
to LT (LT lamp
lighted)
LILI

Does

bank

[5] On either
insert pin
plug in red
R CODE jack

Yes

have LIU-1
[FIG, 1 or 2]

PDU

RU

FIG.

1 Channel

Bank

[6] On RU for
digroup under
test,
insert pin
plug in red
R CODE jack

[7] On ACll
momentarily
depress ACO
pushbutton
(ACO
lamp lighted)

[8] On ACU set


3-position
switch to LT
(LT lamp lighted)

[9] Remove pin


plug from red
R COOE jack on
RU
4

9
L
\_,

FIG.

2 -

Maintenance

LIU

in

9th slot

Bank

LOOP D4 CHAfWEL BANK DIGROUP(S)

OR MAINTENANCE

BANK

F%%%

[1] Obtain D4 SIGNALIHGPATH


from SPTS slot
SET (SPTS)
maintenance bank

[2) Select test channel


digroup under test

[3] Remove channel


(if installed)

[4] Insert
selected

in

in

unit

channel
in step 2

SPTS

TEST

slot

in

[7] Are you


going to test
another digroup
at this time

[5] See TABLEA and perform


tests 1 and 2 setting
switches to positions
indicated

I1 :1:1-

(8 J Remove SPTS
from channel slot
and install
in
maintenance bank

Yes

TABLE A
TEST I sulTal I msITIm

Yes

LAW

LIGHTED

[9) Repeat this


procedure on
digroup to be
tested

121: I ~ lBOnyI
f

PERFORM SIGNALING

TEST ON LOOPED D4 CHANNEL BANK

Issue

I MAR 1982

11]
. . Obtain

blown fuse and spare

se
O1der
cap~

[2] Insert

fuse

into

~1

fuse holder

[4] Are
requirements
TfiLE A met

cap
\

assembly of step 2 into each


[3 Substitute
fuse slot listed
in TABLEA and observe
for requirements
[NOTES 1 and 2]

of

J
No

\
I No

[5] Install
all
removed fuses
into their proper
fuse slots

)--lI
Yes

[6] Replace
[DLP-523]
and install
10-amp
fuse into 10A slot.
Repeat steps 3
and 4

POU

TABLE A
REWIRENENTS
FUSE
SLOT
AI-M

-48ABS
48S A
A8S B
-48F A
48F B
48V
20 HZ

LOCATION

Power
Power
Power
Power
Power
Power
Power
Power

Distribution
Distribution
Distribution
Distribution
Distribution
Distribution
Distribution
Distribution

Power Distribution

Subassembly *
Subassembly
Unit (PDU)
Unit (PDU)
Unit (PW)
Unit (PDU)
Unit (POU)
Unit (POU)

Subassembly

CHECK OPERATION

MAIMTENAMCE
BAM(

CMAMtEL
BW

is panel

Office alarm
sounds and
ALM lamp
lights on POU
for each
fuse slot
stamped

48

[7] Refer to
SD-3C304 for
channel bank or
to SD-3C290 for
maintenance bank
to repair bay wiring

lamp
lights on
Pou for
each fuse

ALM

MAIN and -48ABS

OF FUSE ALARM CIRCUITS

NOTES
1. If channel
bank

- D4 CHANNEL OR
=%%%

MAINTENANCE BANK

is

operating
in
Mode 4, test
of TABLEA
must be
performed on
both banks
2. Office alarm
will not sound
when testing
maintenance
bank because
no plug-ins
are installed

[1] See FIG. 1 for all


leads that appear at
distributing
frame, See
TABLEA for connection
of trunk processing
leads 1 and 2 or Al,
A2, Bl, and B2 to
office leads

[2] Verify
cross-connect ions
at distributing
frame

CROSS-CONNECT
TO OFFICE
TRUNK CIRCUITS
AS REQUIRED

TABLE A
LEAD

DESIGMATI~

OFFICE
1

No,

Al

or

BI

A2 or

B2

MS

4A Crossbar

FROM 6AM(

R
4

T1
e-

T1

RI

R1

SG

SG

SB

SB

TO
CHANNEL
UNIT SLOTS

No. 5 Crossbar

B2

B1

Panel

S1

No.

1 Crossbar or
Crossbar Tandem

1
2

ESS offices

Step-By-Step

Switch
Side

Line
Side

Individual

channel

required

Connection

connection

not

At

A and

!A!

Al OIGROUP A

=&==

required

B leads

AT DISTRIBUTING

TOESS
SCANNER

FIG.

CROSS-COIWIIECTIONS

TRUNK PROCESSING 2
I

Bt

from Al
A and from B1 and B2

toESS

and A2 leads of digroup


leads of digroup B

VERIFY

TRUNKPROCESSING1

1 Universal

FRAME

Channel

~$$

B2 OXGROUP B

Wiring

TO 8-Point

Terminal

Block

[ 1] Align front edge


of switch with notch
corresponding
to
desired

setting

[FIG. 1],

[NOTE 1]

1200-Owl

OPEW
I

FRONTEU6E
OF SWITCH
(WITCH IN

!: RI%

6m-om

1so-m

+:

150

FIG.

W-lEl
Switch may be
mounted so
150 position
is at top instead
of bottom
I MAR 1982
DLP
365-170-000

Issue

SELECT TERMINATING

IMPEDANCE ON CHAh@lEL

UNIT

PAGE 1 of

562

[1] Find
desired control
setting
from

[2] Is setting
given as word(s),
letter(s),
or
number(s)

Word(s)
L

Letter(s)
or
Number(s)

(3] Set slide switch


[FIG. 1A or C] so that
number(s) or letter(s)
are exposed. See TABLEA
for cross reference
of
letters
and numbers to
capacitance
value and
NOTES 1 and 2
I@

L1I

II

[4] Set
slide switch
so that word
is visible
[FIG. lB]

[5] Are
there any
other settings
to make

c
FIG.

SET SLIDE

SWITCH CONTROLS

0.002

Aor2

0,004

Bor4

0.008

Cor8

0.016

D or 16

0.032

E or 32
.

Or

64

I
4

WITCH SET
FOR 0.054 M

II

CAPACITOR
VALUE (#F)

0.064

v es
CONTROL A SET
FOR 13, CONTROL
B SET FOR L

LETTER
at
-n

---J

Bl!!!!!!(,
A

TABLE A

[6] Repeat
from
step 1

No

II

NOTES
1. Switch of FIG. 1A
contains two
controls
numbers are A
side and letter
is B side
2. If single number
is given that
does not appear
on switch, then
combination of
numbers or
letters
(TABLEA)
must be exposed
to add up to that
single number

%!!$?%%

See WARNING1.
Use FIG. 1 to
select each
number listed

TABLE A

[4]

series

of numbers

CAPACITOR
VALLE (W)

2
4
8
16
32
64

1+

[2] Find
combination of
values in TABLE
A that add to
capacitance

0.002
0.004
0.008

0.016
0.032
0.064

[3] From TABLEA,


NBOCoption column,
list numbers next
to each value used
in step 2

USE
..- KS-21838. L1 EXTRACTOR
oR LOffiiiOsE
pLIERs To POSITION
PLUGS SO THAT UHITE SHONS
FOR EACH SELECTED NUM6ER
AND BLACK SHOW FOR EACH
NUUBER NOT SELECTEO

OPTION SELECTEO
(WHITE SHOWING)

PUSH WITCH TOUARD


EACH SELECTEO NWBER
ANO AUAY FROM EACH
NUM6ER NOT SELECTED-

64
32
16

s
4

2
r

-+1--

16

PLUG SOCKET TYPE M6DC SET FOR .014 PF (2+4+8)


FIG.

SLIOE SUITCH NBOC ;ET


FOR .038 PF (2+4+32)

WARNING

32

/
/
/
/

Since tvisting
/
vill break
connectors,
plugs /
should be pulled
straight
out
/
1 MAR 1982
DLP
365-170-000

Issue

SET tdWC OPTIONS

PAGE

1 of

564

Socket and
[FIG. 1]

plug

Rocker switch
[FIG, 2 Or 3]
Slide switch
[FIG. 4]

REEIW D.8
02. m4\.

Page 3

Page 4

3.2
SOCKET

1.6

FIG.

PLUG

(EXAMPLE -2.2DB
SOCKET

LOSSI

PLUG

OA
TTENUATOR

m
I

IN+

~OUT

0.1

0.2

FIG.

(ExtiLE

- 1.009

IN BOTH TA~R)

FIG. 1

SET ATTENUATOR OPTIONS

WE 62A

0.4

0.8

FIG. 2

[3] See WARNING1. Use


KS-21838, L1 extractor
[FIG. 7) or longnose pliers
to position
plugs beside
each number used in step 2.
Position
other plugs beside
o used in step 2. See NOTE 1

[2] Find combination of


numbers on attenuator
that
adds to desired transmit
and receive settings.
Refer
to FIG. 5 for single (T or R)
attenuator
or to FIG. 6 for
dual (T and R) attenuator
+

$]

KS-21838, LI
EXTRACTOR

TRANSMIT SIDE
PLUG
SOCKET
I
/

RECEIVE SIDE

FIG. 7

NOTE1
For each section
attenuator

on

there

be a plug,
either on numbered
side or O side

must

PLUGS IN .2, .4, AND 1.6


SET THIS ATTENUATOR FOR 2.2 DE
FIG.

SET /iTTEMJATOR OPTIONS

BOTH T AND R SIDE SHOW.2 ANO .8 FOR


TOTAL OF 1.0 DB IN BOTH DIRECTIONS
FIG.

WARNIhG
1
Since twisting
will break
connectors,
plugs
should be pulled
out
n straight

numbers on
attenuator
that
adds to desired
setting

Depress swi~ches away


from each number not
used in step 4.
See FIG. 8

* StUOED AREAREPRESENTSWITCH DEPRESSEDAT


THAT SIDE. ATTENUATOR IS SET FOR4.3DS
[3.2 + 0.8 + 0.2 + 0.?)

FIG. 8

SET ATTE?WATOR OPTIONS

[6]

I
[7] Move switch next
to each number used
in step 6 to the
IN side. Move rest
of switches to the
OUT side. See FIG. 9

Find

combination
numbers on

of

attenuator
that
adds to desired
setting

&wflGl
IN+

+OUT

iE 62A

EHElmcl
0.1

0.2

0,4

0.s

OARKAREAON6UITCH IMXCATES
POSITIW. ATTEWATORIS SET FOR
4.3 M (4.0+0.2+0.1)

FIG. 9

SET ATTENUATOR OPTI~S

[1] Get KS-21838, L1 extractor


[FIG. 1] or longnose pliers
[2]

PLUG

FIG. 2 as guide and example


to determine location of connector
plug(s)

Use

or
[3] See WARNING1. Use extractor
pliers on connector plugs that
need to be repositioned.
Pull plug
straight
out and push straight
in at new location

SIOEVIEU

CONNECTOR PLUGS MAY APPEAR AS


SINGLE OPTIONS OR AS GROUP
OF OPTIONS

PLUG 18 INSERTED INTO SLOT


CORRESPONDING
TO DESIRED
OPTION. AS SHOWN, OPTIO*
E ANO H SELECTED

$]

KS-2183S,L1
EXTRACTOR

DIM ~1

* BLACK SHOUINO
OPTION NOT SELECTEO

HI

UHITE SHOUING
OPTION SELECTEO

D]

+MieH

OPTION
DESIGNATIONS

OESIWATIDM

FIG. 1

ON SO@lEIMITS, AN OPTIONIS SELECTEOBY BLACKSHWINO


INSIEADDP WITE SHDNIM. EXAMPLE:4-HIRE TANDEMUNIT DPTIW E 18 SELECTEDBY BLACKSWIM

FIG. 2

WARNING
1
Twisting will
break connectors

IEz2
Issue

MAR 1982

DLP

365-170-000

SET CONNECTOR PLUG OPTIONS

PAGE 1 of

5661

[1] From information


on WORDor CLRC,
set T and R
attenuators
[FIG. 1]
[DLP-565]

STEP 1

(--
FIG.

SET OPTIONS RSCO CHANNEL UNIT (J98726BW)

on WORDor CLRC,
[1] From information
set NBOCon channel unit [NOTE 1]
[FIG. 1] [DLP-564]
[2] From information
on WORDor
CLRC, set transmit
and
receive attenuators,
T and
R [FIG. 1] [DLP565]
on WORDor
[3] From information
CLRC, set options lG, SD, L, S
[NOTE 1] [FIG. 1] [DLP-566]
STEP 3

STEP 1

2-4-8

163264

/?
.. .. .. .. .. ..

J2

.. .. .. .. .. ..

SD

J4

J3

.3
.EliIIEE
.
.
.
.
...../.R
8

L
FIG.

SET OPTIONS

BEIEEEIB~

DPO CHANNEL

UNIT (J98726BA)

STEP 2

>

NOTE 1
Each option on
this unit is
selected
by
inserting
plug
into black side
(white showing)
of applicable
connector section

[1] From information


on WORDor CLRC,
set NBOC[FIG. 1] [NOTE 1]
[DLP-564]
1

[2] From information


on WORDor
CLRC, set transmit and
receive attenuators,
T and
R [FIG. 1] [DLP-565]

STEP 1
\
(
J2

......
!!!!!!L
T

.. .. .. .. .. ..

STEP 2

.EIEIEIEEIR
,.....
H
>

..

NOTE1

............ R
/

FIG.

SET OPTIONS

OPT CtiAWEL

OR (J98726CH) 600 OHM

Each

option

on

this unit is
selected
by
inserting
plug
into black side
(white showing)
of applicable
connector section

UNIT (J987261M3)900 OHM


%?%?T%

[1]

From

information

on WORD or

CLRC, set transmit and


receive attenuators,
T and
R [FIG. 1] [DLP-565]

W
AND

[2] From information


on WORDor
CLRC, set options EPD, EPI
EG, and lG [FIG. 1] [NOTE 1] [DLP-566]

STEP 2
I

STEP 1
\

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

T Malwll
.. .. ., .. .. .. .. ..

I
/
J9

EPD
EPI
EG
lG

FIG.

SET OPTIONS

4E&M CHANNEL UNIT

( J98726BC)

NOTE1
Each option on
this unit is
selected
by
inserting
plug
into black side
(white showing)
of applicable
connector section

[1] From information


on WORDor CLRC,
set NBOCon channel unit [1@TE1]
[FIG. 1] [DLP-564]
[2] From information
on WORDor
CLRC, set transmit
and
receive attenuators,
T and
R [FIG. 1] [DLP-565]
[3] From information
on WORDor CLRC,
set options CN6, CM9, SD, SL1, and
SL2 [NOTE I][FIG.
1] [DLP-566]
STEP 1

............

STEP 2

NOTE1
Each option on this
unit is selected
by
inserting
plug into
black side (white
showing) of
applicable
connector
section

---7
STEP 3
FIG.

Issue

ISET OPTIONS

2FXS CHANNEL UNIT

OR [J98726SR-1)

600

OHM

(J98726BD)

900

OHM

I MAR 1982
I DLP

365-170-000
PAGE

1 of

1571

-[1] Read

NOTES

1 and

I
[2] From information
on channel unit

on WORDor CLRC, set N60C


[FIG. 1] [DLP-564]-~

II

and
receive

on WORDor CLRC, set transmit


[3] From information
attenuators,
T and R [FIG. 1]
[DLP-565]
on WORDor CLRC, set options
[4] From information
LXI, LX2, ~,
RG, Ls, and J9 (or Gs) [FIG.
[DLP-566]

STEP 2

11

>

STEP 3

STEP 2

\
J2
E16=W

24

J8

STEP 3

m
Ls
Q

STEP 4

NOTES
1. The two channel
units shown in
FIG. 1 represent
different
list
numbers of 2FX0
2. Each option on
this unit is
selected
by
inserting
plug
into black side
(white showing)
of applicable
connector section

J9 OR GS

STEP 4
FIG.

SET

OPTIONS 2FX0 CHANNEL UNIT

OR (J98726SS-1)

600

OHM

(J98726BE)

900

OHM
m

[1] From information


on WORDor
CLRC, set transmit
(T)
and receive (R) attenuators
[FIG. 1] [DLP-565]
[2] From information
on WORDor
CLRC, setNBOC [NOTE 1]
[FIG. 1] [DLP-564]
[3] From information
on WORDor
CLRC, set options lG
and S0 [NOTE 1]
STEP 2
\

STEP 3
\

2.4

8-1S-32-64

J2

41

1
.. .. .. .. .. ..

BHWl~
T

.. .. .. .. .. ..

FIG.

SET OPTIONS

RPO CHAIWEL UNIT

NOTE1
Each option on
this unit is
selected
by
inserting
plug
into black side
(white showing)
of applicable
connector section

( J98726BF

STEP 1

Z%!%%

[1] From information


on WORDor
CLRC, set transmit
(T)
and receive (R) attenuators
[FIG. 1] [DLP.565]
I
on WORDor
[2] From information
CLRC, set NBOC[NOTE 1]
[FIG. 1] [DLP-564]
on WORDor
[3] From information
CLRC, set option BT [NOTE 1]
[FIG. 1] [DLP-566]

STEP 2

STEP 3

,~214i8Tt6,32fi
T
RRRRll
.. .. .. .. .. ..
/cl
STEP 1

$n
J3

>

XB

Klllaaa
7
............ Ri
/

FIG.

SET OPTIONS

RPT CHANNEL

UNIT (J98726BG

NOTE1
Each option on
this unit is
selected
by
inserting
plug
into black side
(white showing)
of applicable
connector section

on WORDor CLRC,
[1] From information
set NBOCon channel unit [NOTE 1]
[FIG. 1] [DLP-564]

[2] From information


on WORDor
CLRC, set transmit and
receive attenuators,
T and
R [FIG. 1] [DLP-565]
STEP 1

\
2.4-0-16-32

64
.. .. .. .. .. ..

J2
Mom
.. .. .. .. .. ..

STEP 2

.. .. .. .. .. ..

MBEIE
............
R

NOTE 1
Each

unit
is
inserting
black

FIG.

SET OPTIONS SDPO CHANNEL UNIT (J98726BH)

option

on this

selected
plug

side

by
into

(white

showing) of
applicable
connector
section

[1]

Read NOTES 1 and 2

on WORDor
[2] From information
CLRC, set NBOCon channel
unit [FIG. 1 or 2] [DLP-564].-N
on WORDor
[3] From information
CLRC, set transmit
and
receive attenuators,
T and
R [FIG. 1 or 2] [DLP-565]
[4]

From

on WORD
or CLRC,
EG, EPD, EP1, 2, X, y,
[FIG. 1 or 2] [DLP-566] -J

information

set

options

(34,

and

lG

STEP 3
sTEP 4

STEP 2

STEP 2

\ \

24SW=W

u
10
x

J2

STEP 3

-11

~.

z
v

J3

$h-

tl

EEI%R
/

/
FIG.

\sTEp

FIG.

SET OPTIONS 2E8tM CHANNEL UNIT

4
2

NOTES
1. The two channel
units shown in
FIG. i and 2
represent
different
list
numbers of 2E&M
2. Each option on
this unit is
selected
by
inserting
plug
into black side
(white showing)
of applicable
connector section

%%+?7%

(J98726BJ)

on WORDor
[1] From information
CLRC, set NBOC[FIG. 1] [NOTE 1]
[DLP-564]
on WORDor
[2] From information
CLRC, set transmit and
receive attenuators,
T and
R [FIG. 1] [DLP-565]

il

on WORDor CLRC,
[3] From information
set options 4ESS, STA, OM, w,
SL1, and SL2 [FIG. 1] [NOTE 1] [DLP-566]
STEP 1

4ESS
Itn
b%
1
STEP 2

>

NOTE 1
Each option on
this unit is
selected
by
inserting
plug
into black side
(white showing)
of applicable
connector section

.. .. .. .. .. ..

STEP 3
FIG.

SET

OPTIONS 2FXSLS CHANNEL UNIT (J98726BK)

on WORDor
[1] From information
CLRC, set NBOC[FIG. 1] [MYTE1]
[DLP.564]
on WORDor
[2] From information
CLRC, set transmit
and
receive attenuators,
T and
R [FIG. 1] [DLP-565]
on WORDor CLRC,
[3] From information
set options LXI, CM, LX2, LS, and
4ESS [FIG. 1] [NOTE 1] [DLP-566J

STEP 3

STEP

.. ,. .. .. .. ,.
4ESS

.. .. .. .. .. ..

J5

1S
J3

En
J4

.
.
.
.
IHIEM
3
R

.. .. ,. .. .. ..

FIG.

SET OPTIONS 2FXOLS CHANNEL UNIT (J98726BL)

STEP 2

NOTE1
Each option on
this unit is
selected
by
inserting
plug
into black side
(white showing)
of applicable
connector section

%%%

on WORDor
[1] From information
CLRC, set NBOC[FIG. 1] [NOTE 1]
[DLP-564]
on WORDor
[2] From information
CLRC, set transmit and
receive attenuators,
T and
R [FIG. 1] [DLP-565]
[3] From information
set options DP,
[FIG. l][NOTEIJ

on WORDor CLRC,
and SD
[DLP-566]

IG,

STEP 3

STEP 1

J2
n

m
MF

FIG. 1

SET

OPTIONS DPMO CHANNEL UNIT

(J98726BM)

STEP 2

NOTE 1
Each option on this
unit (except DP) is
selected
by
inserting
plug into
black side (white
showing) of
applicable
connector
section.
Option DP
is selected
white
side (black showing)

on WORDor
[1] From information
CLRC, set transmit
and
receive attenuators,
T and
R [FIG. 1] [DLP-565]

on WORDor
[2] From information
CLRC, set options MB, MPO,
and MG [NOTE 1] [FIG. 1] [DLP-566] Y
STEP 2

STEP 1

L
. . .. .. .. ..
T

.. . . .. .. .. ..

....
:Ill 3)

MG
HPO
m:

J2

NOTE1
Each option on
this unit is
selected
by
inserting
plug
into black side
(white showing)
of applicable
connector
section
I Issue4
I MAR1982

EIEEIEIER
............ R
I

SET OPTIONS PLR CHANNEL UNIT (J98726BN)

365-170-000
PAGE 1 of

I DLP
1

1580

[1] From information


on WORDor
CLRC, set transmit
and
receive attenuators,
T and
R [FIG. 1] [DLP-565]

[2] From information


on WORDor
CLRC, set options EG, EPZ, EPD,
and lG [NOTE 1] [FIG. 1] [DLP-566] -J

G--i
STEP 2

STEP 1

I
f

\\

.m
.......

.. .. .. .. .. ., .. ..

m :

TIR..6BHHERI

EPD :
EPI

EG :

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .

%--.

J2

DIFFERENT

LIST

NIMSERSOF THIS CHAMMELUNIT RAY DIFFER SLIGHTLY FRGMFIG.


FIG.

SET OPTIONS

4E&MER CHAMIEL

UNIT

(J98726BP)

---.

-.-...--1

NOTE1
Each option on
this unit is
selected
by
inserting
plug
into black side
(white showing)
of applicable
connector
section

[1] From information


on WORDor
CLRC, set NBOC[FIG. 1] [NOTE 1]
[DLP-564]

[2] From information


on WORDor
CLRC, set attenuators
(T and
[FIG. 1] [DLP-565]

G)--l
R)

STEP 2

STEP 1

\
32
248664
f

Ii)!

[
T

FIG.

SET OPTIONS

ES2T CHAIWEL WNIT

(J98726BR)

NOTE1
Each option on
this unit is
selected
by
inserting
plug
into black side
(white showing)
of applicable
connector
section

[1] From information


on WORDor
CLRC, set NBOC[FIG. 1] [~

1]

DLP-564] ~

[2]

Frm information
on WORDor
CLRC, set attenuators
T and R
[FIG. 1] [DLP-565] ~

hT
STEP 2

STEP 1

\
f

-J
J2

NOTE1
Each option on
this unit is
selected
by
inserting
plug
into black side
(white showing)
of applicable
connector
section

L
FIG.

SET OPTIONS

ES20

CHANNEL UNIT

(J98726BS)

on WORDor
[1] From information
CLRC, set NBOC[NOTE 1]
[FIG. 1] [DLP-564]
on WORDor
[2] From information
CLRC, set attenuators
ATI
and AT2 [FIG. 1]
[DLP.565]
on WORDor CLRC,
[3] From information
set ootions
Ud, X, Z, Y, IG, EPD, EPI
and E6 [NOTE 1] [FIG. 1) [DLP.566]~
STEP 1

\
J3
J2

STEP 2

>

NOTE1
Each option on
this unit is
selected
by
inserting
plug
into black side
(white

STEP 3
FIG.

showing)

of applicable
connector
section
Issue

I MAR 1982

365-170-000

SET OPTIONS

2E&M6 CHANNEL UNIT

(J98726BT)

PAGE 1 of

[ DLP
1

1584

[1]

From

information

on WORD or

CLRC, set T and R


attenuators
[FIG. 1]
DLP-56] ~

[2]

information on WORDor
CLRC, set option J2 (SD)
[NOTE 1] [FIG. 1] [DLP-566]

Q--

I
STEP 2

STEP 1

\
t

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

3ER13,

TED
................ R

J2

FIG.

SET OPTIONS

ES3 CHAfWEL WIT

(J98726BU)

NoTEl
Option SD is
selected
by
inserting
plug into
black side (white
showing) of J2

[1] From

information

on WORD

or

CLRC, set T and R attenuators


[FIG. 1] [DLP-565]

-Y
AND

[2] From information


on WORDor CLRC,
set options SD, MF, and SX-SX
[NOTE 1] [FIG. 1] [DLP-5661

STEP 2
I

STEP 1

TIR

-J

\b
AT1

DP LP LP

J2

SD MF SX SX

AT2
)

FIG.

SET OPTIONS

4LSX0

CHANNEL UNIT

(J98726BY)

NOTE1
Options SD, MF,
and SX are
selected by
inserting
plug
into black side
(white showing)
of applicable
J2
section.
Options
DP and LP are
selected
by
inserting
plug
into white side
(black showing)

%%%%

[1] Install

option

plug on D side

of

J3

jack

[FIG.

1]

Al
[2] From information
on WORDor CLRC, option
to select desired option per faceplate
stamping. See FIG. 1 and NOTE 1

J2

STEP 1
J3 \

STEP 2
J2

\
WI.

Ztl

Ecwl
M

ml
I correspond to top
to bottom stamping
on faceplate.
As

FIG.

SET OPTIONS

DSODP CHANNEL UNIT

(J98726DA)

shown,

EC IN

SLC-96

have

and

been

[1] Verify oCU has correct


number (see TABLEA]

list
1

option plug on D4 side


[2] Install
SLC/D4 jack to expose white
[FIG. 1]

TABLE A

El=

of

LIST
UMBER

on WORDor
[3] From information
CLRC, set options FLBO,
and CRTC [FIGS. 1 and 2]
DSU/CSU,
[4] Install
DT jacks

option
to

plug on D side of
black
per FIG. 1 ~

DATA RATE
IN KILOBITS

2.4

4.8

9.6

,,,,,

expose

STEP 3*~

STEP 2
/

Osu

OUT

4[[

c1
DT

DT

:~~1

Slc

UT
I

ET
$ ~TC

(S103) MILL NOT EXIST ON LATER UNITS


FIG.

OCUDP CHANNEL UNIT

(J98726DB)

IN

Csu I

THIS SIOE
SELE(TED

IIJ

!N

SIOE VIEUOF ROCKER SUITCH

AS SHOUN,FLRD aJT IS SELECTED

SET OPTIONS

DSU

f-

CSUIN IS

AS SHOUN,

SELECTED
FIG.

[1] Use screwdriver


[2] From information
6 for 4,8 kilobit

to set all

switches

in S1 next to numbers on switch

[see FIG. 1]

on WORDor CLRC, set pointer on S2 to s for 2.4 kilobit


rate, or 8 for 9.6 kilobit
rate [see FIG. 1]

rate,

or

STEP 1

l\
08u OP

fi&%A%

SC4WIRIVER
SLOT

FIG.

SET OPTIONS

DSUDP CHAWEL

UNIT

(J98726DC)

(1]

From

information

on WORD

or CLRC,

STEP 1

attenuators
[FIG. 1] [DLP-565]

set TRMT

and

STEP 2

STEP 4

RCV

--J

TRll
150

&Lp

[2] From information


on WORDor CLRC, set
options J2, J3, J4, SD, J6, and J7
[TABLEA] [FIG. 1] [DLP-566]

OPEN

RNRN

SI

[3

[4]

From information
on WORDor CLRC,
set slide switches SL, BW, and HT
[FIG. 1] [DLP-563]

I
J

J*

RCV

S1

I -72V

! -48V

BLACK

SHOWIW

u
OPEN

Cv

-3SEQ
(s4)

(s5)
Eli

(s3)
HT

I
I

Always selected
up to 1300 ohms -48V
up to 2000 ohms -72V

Not required

J6 Tip
Signaling
Lead

Connected

to T-R

Connected

to TI-RI

J7 Ring
Signaling
Lead

Connected

to T1-R1

Connected

to T-R

SD

Make busy after


2.5 seconds of idle

I
STEP 3
FIG,

4FXS CHA~EL

S2
150

J7

0000

J3 & J4

SET OPTI~S

0000

TABLE A

J2

no

Clclclcl

From information
on WORDor CLRC,
set terminating
impedance for TRM
and RCV (S2) [FIG. 1] [DLP-562]
(S1)

OPrIffl

No conditioning

UNIT

(J98726SB)

PAGE 1 of

15901

STEP 1.

on WORDor CLRC,
[1] From information
set lRMT and RCV attenuators
[FIG. 1] [DLP-565]

STEP 4 .

on WORDor CLRC,
[2] From information
set options J4, J5, LX1, GS, RG,
and LS [FIG. 1] [DLP-566]
[3] From information
on WORDor CLRC,
set slide switches HT, 6W, and SL
[FIG. 1] [DLP-563]
on WORDor CLRC,
[4] From information
set terminating
impedance for
S1 and S2 [FIG. 1] [DLP-562]

I
4

STEP 2

BU

STEP 3
F

S5
%ml
SL

Yiiil

S4

FIG.

NOTE 1
Each connector option (except J4
and J5) is selected
by inserting
plug into black side (white
showing) of applicable
connector
section.
J4 and J5 with black
reverses simplexed tip
showing
and ring leads
Issue

365-170-000

SET OPTIONS

4FX0

CHANNEL UNIT

(J98726SC)

PAGE 1 of

I MAR 1982
OLP
1

591

on WORDor CLRC,
[1] From information
set TRMT and RCVattenuators
[FIG. 1] [DLP-5651

STEP 2

STEP 5

on WORDor CLRC,
[2J From information
set options J2, J3, J4, A, and B
[TABLEA] [FIG. 1] [DLP-566]
on WORDor CLRC,
[3] From information
set slide switches S1, S2, S5,\ R/RI,
R2 , and Z [FIG. 1] [DLP-5631
~
on
[4] From information
set switch NR [FIG.

)--l

J4

AND

y!

STEP 4

on WORDor CLRC,
[5] From information
set RLP balancing potentiometer
[FIG. 1]

STEP 3
1

TABLE A
OPTION

MITE

SWIM3

Buff
stmwxMa

J3

Precision
selected

J4

Make busy after


2.5 seconds

J5 (A/B)

Capacitors
selected

I
I
I

LBOC In

I LBOCOut

J2 may exist

network

on some earlier

Compromise network
selected

-STEP

No conditioning
Capacitors
selected

not

J2 MAY EXIST ON SOMEEARLIER UNITS


FIG.

units

Issue

I MAR 1982
365-170-000
I DLP
1

SET OPTIONS

2DX/GT

CHANNEL UNIT

(J98726SD)

PAGE 1 of
t

1592

STEP 3

STEP 1

on WORDor CLRC,
[1] From information
set TRMTG and RCVG attenuators
[FIG. 1] [DLP.565]

STEP 6

.
1s0
T

[2

From information
on WORDor CLRC,
set options
A, B, andC [FIG. 1]
[NOTE1 ] [DLP-566]

TRRT
150
n

information
on WORDor CLRC,
set slide switches SL, SW, and HT
[FIG. 1] [DLP-563]

[3

From

[4

From information
on WORDor
CLRC, set HOR-REVswitch
[FIG. 1]

[5

OPEN

From information
set DX balancing
[FIG. 1]

[6] From information


set terminating
T andR

[FIG.

i]

/
STEP 2

STEP 6

on WORDor CLRC,
potentiometer
RLP

on WORDor CLRC,
impedance for
[DLP-562]

STEP 4

J3

FIG. 1

4DX CHAl@tEL UNIT

STEP 5

4
I&l

J2

SET OPTIONS

(J98726SE)

NOTE1
Each plug option on
this unit is selectee
by inserting
plug
into black side
(white showing) of
applicable
connector
section

I
on WORDor CLRC,
[1] From information
set transmitter
attenuator
[FIG. 1] [DLP-565]

TABLE A

W-J4
V-J5
E-J6
T, R, S-J7
Z, EG, Y-J8

on WORDor
[2] From information
CLRC, set options Y, Z, EG,
S, T, R, E, W, andV [FIG. 1]
[TABLEA] [DLP-566]
STEP 2

STEP 1

STEP 2

J4
mclun

Y2 EG

ST R
!

U31

J7

Js

M
J5

L
FIG.

SET OPTIONS

WHITE
S~IMG

OPTION

4TDM CHAIWEL UNIT

(J98726SF)

I IN
I IN
I OUT
T and R IN

I OUT
I OUT
IN
S IN

Z and EG IN Y IN

on WORDor CLRC,
[1] From information
set XMTand RCVattenuators
[FIG. 1] [DLP-565]

STEP 2

on WORDor CLRC,
[2] From information
set options J2, J3, J4, J5, and J6
[TABLEA] [FIG. 1] [DLP-566]
on WORDor CLRC,
[3] From information
set slide switches S1, S2, S4, R/RI,
R2, and Z [FIG, 1] [DLP-563]

TABLE A
UHITE
SMOWING

OPTION

BLACK

J2

1300 Ohm Range -48V


2000 Ohm Range -72V

Not Required

J3

Precision
selected

Compromise Network
selected

J4

Make Busy Line


Trunk

No Conditioning

J5*

LBOCIN

LBOCOUT

J6

-72V

-48V

$ J5 mav exist

STEP 3,

WING

Network

on some earlier

units

J5 MAY EXIST ON SORE EARLIER UNITS

FIG.

SET OPTIONS

2FXS/GT

CHANNEL UNIT

(J98726SG)

STEP 1

---7A6LE

[ 1] From information
on WORDor CLRC,
set TRMT ATIEN and RCV ATTEN
[FIG. 1] [DLP-565]

oPTION

WITE
Snwlw

8LAU
WIrw

J2
J3
J4

30 MASealing
to T-R/Tl-Rl

[2] From information


on WORDor
CLRC, set options TRMTGAIN
RCV GAIN, and J4 [FIG. 1]
[TABLEA] [DLP-566]
STEP 2

STEP 1

Current

No Sealing

Current

STEP 2

/
TRMTATTEN
0000
0000
-7dB
Itn
J3

TRRT

f
J2

-7dB

FIG.

Itll

/
RCV

Issue

I ----

I MAR 1982

I DLP

365-170-000

SET OPTIONS

4T0

CHANNEL UNIT

(J98726SH)

PAGE 1 of

1596

[ 1] From information
on WORDor CLRC,
set TRMT and RCV attenuators
[FIG. 1] [DLP.565]
[2] From information
on WORDor
CLRC, set J2 option [NOTE 1]
[FIG. 1] [DLP-566]
[3] From information
on WORDor
CLRC, set slide switch
S1 [FIG. 1] [DLP-563]
STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3
/

n
o
0
00
ZAP
0

00
00
00

FIG.

SET OPTIONS 2T0 CHAIWEL WIT

(J98726SJ)

IW)TE1
J2 option is
selected
(30 !&4
sealing current)
by
inserting
plugs into
black sides (white
showing)

[]] From inforraat ion on WORDor CLRC,


set TRMT and RCV attenuators
[FIG. 1] [DLP-565]

STEP 2
\
r

[2] From information


on WORDor CLRC,
set options J2, J3, 7,J4, J6 and LS
[TABLEA] [FIG. 1] [DLP-566] ~
[3] From information
on WORDor CLRC,
set slide switches S1, S2, S4 (loaded
or nonloaded),
l?/Rl, R2, and Z [FIG. 1]
[DLP-563]
TABLE

OPTION

J3, RG

Make

Busy

l-s

BLACU
SHONI*

STEP 3
1

Loop Resistance
less than

Loop Resistance
greater
than
600 ohms

RG

J2

L
LS
J3 M

600

(ring

ground )

SiEP 2

ohms

No Conditioning

J4

Ground Start

Loop Start

J6

Precision
selected

Compromise Network
selected

J3, LS

Make Busy (loop


closure)

Network

, STEP 1

No Conditioning
FIG.

Issue

SET OPTIONS

2FX0/GT

CHAWEL

lNIT

(J98726SK)

I MAR 1982

TABLEA

on WORDor CLRC,
[1] From information
set TRMT GAIN and RCV GAIN attenuators
[FIG. 1] [DLP-565]

OPTION

on WORDor CLRC,
[2] From information
set options J2 and J3 [FIG. 1]
[TABLEA] [DLP-566]

J2

WITE

I BLAcu
I
~ING

XING

30mA sealing
current to
T-R/Tl-Rl

I::;:ing
I

on WORDor CLRC,
[3] From information
set slide switches SL, BW, and MT
[FIG. 1] [DLP-563]
[4] From information
on WORDor CLRC,
set terminating
impedance for
TRMT and RCV [FIG. 1] [DLP-562]

STEP 4

STEP 3

STEP 1

STEP 2
SL

HT

on

00
00
E
m
1-

150
FIG.

SET OPTIONS

4ET0

CHANNEL UNIT

(J98726SQ)

150

&

no
/
-7 Da

[1]

Make sure

[2] Get test

there

is no service

equipment

listed

on channel

in TABLEA
Page 3

[3] Connect cords as shown in FIG. 1,


Page 2

No

(6] Replace
OIU and
repeat
steps 3
through 5

[4] Depress POWERswitches on


mt..NYEft
and l?ECEIVER~

[7] Refer to
SD-3C304
to repair
bay wiring

TABLEA
TR=ITTER

KS-20909

RECEIVER

KS-20908

D3/M DATAFORT
TEST
INTERFACELMIT

ED-3C792

LOOPBACK _ECTOR

ED-3C793

l-l

CABLE ASSEMBLY
842725111

PERFORM DSU LOOPBACK TEST FROM OCUDP

PAGE 1 of

60~

SIGNAL

, POUER


rn,~AM
CLOCK~
>

RECEIVER

1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I

OIU-2

I
I

RCV
EO-3C782

I
I

TO
CMSN

TO
115 VAC

I
I

THT

L
1
CABLEASSE~LY
COWOOE
342725111

i
1

CLOCK

o
TST

WHITE OOUN

. POUER

SISUAL
TRANSMITTER
FIG.

PERFORM DSU LOOPBACK TEST FROM OCUDP

[8) Set switches on test


per TABLEB
[9] Set

TRANSMITTER
RECEIVER INPUT

sets

OUTPUT

switches

and
to

LOGIC

FAR

DSU LOOPBACK TEST

[10) On

TRANSMITTER

momentarily

depress RESET pushbutton


depress and hold DSU
pushbutton for 1 second

lamp

lights.
BYTEPATTERNlamps 2 thru 7 on
RECEIVERflicker
when
pushbutton
is released

then

[13] Does
counter
indicate
002

[11] On RECEIVERmomentarily
operate COIRWER MODE
switch to RESET

Counter
indicates

or

less

Yes

000

*
Page 4
[12] After

15 minutes

CCMITER

operate

MODE switch

to

NOLD

TABLEB
RECEIVER

TRANSMITTER
SWITOl

DATA RATE

Same as

DATARATE

customer

FWUTION
W)E

LDOPBACK

TEST
REPEAT

POSITIOW

Same as
customer

~ER

BLOCK ERRORS
I

TEST

~D

LOOPED
I

~L

or

SIMRATE

~L

SINGLE
I

PERFORM DSU LOOPBACK TEST FROM OCUDP

No
TAP-118

OUTPUTand
[14] Set TRANSMITTER
RECEIVERINPUT switches to
NEARLOGIC
DSU LOOPBA@TEST
BYTE
lamp lights.
[15] On TRANSMITTER momentarily
depress RESET pushbutton
then depress and hold DSU
pushbutton for 1 second

PATTERN

laMpS

thru 7 on RECEIVER
flicker
when
pushbutton
is released
No

[16] On RECEIVERmomentarily
operate UIWTER MODE
switch to RESET

TAP-118

Yes
[17] After

15 minutes

operate

CoL#4TER MODE switch

to

NOLO
[ 19] Disconnect
and put away
test equipment

ISSUQJ 4
36S-170-000

PERFORM DSU LOOPBACK TEST FROM OCUDP

PAGE 4 of

I MAR 1982
I DLP
4

16001

[1]

Make

sure there

[2] Get test

is

equipment

no

service

listed

on channel

in TABLEA

Page 3
[3] Connect cords
Page 2

[4] Depress
and

as shown in FIG. 1,

I No

POWER switches

[6] Replace
and
repeat steps
through 5

on lRANSMITIER

OIU

RECEIVER

TR~ITTER

KS-20909

RECEIVER

KS-20908

D3/D4

ED-3C792

TEST

L-

[7] Refer to
SD3C304
to repair
bay wiring

TABLE A

DATA PORT

No

INTERFACE

lUdIT
LOOFBACK

ED-3C793

-ECTOR
CABLE ASSEMBLY

COMCODE
84272511

PERFORM CHAN LOOPBACK TEST(S)

FROM OCUDP

Issue

365-170-000

PAGE 1 of

1 MAR 1982
] DLP
5

]601

POMER

REO W

ro;
I
OIU-2

CLOOU
,

RCV
EO-3C792

TO
115 VAC

10
CH EM

4- 7
THT

I
I
I
I

I
I
I
I

3
EO3C793

-u
TST

L .

I
I
I

1
TR~TTER

I
PERFORM CHAN LOOPBACK TEST(S)

FROM OCUDP

Issuo

365-170-000

1 MAR 1982
I W

[8] Set
switches on
test sets per
TABLEB

t<

[9] Are you


going to
test far
\

nd

No

(-4
Page

TABLE B
TRAWSHITTER
SWITQI

PosxTIm

DATA RATE

Same as

RECEIVER
SWIT~
DATA RATE

LDOPBACK
TEST

MDE

REPEAT

Same as

customer

customer
FWCTIUd

~SITIW

COUNTER
TEST

~D

ClM#@4EL or

BIT

ERRORS

LOOPED
SI~LE

SUBRATE CllAhNEL

PERFORM CHAN LOOPBACK TEST(S)

FROM OCUDP

[10]

Set TRANSMITTER OUTPUT


RECEIVER Ir4PuT switches

and
to

FAR LOGIC
CNAN LOOPBACK TEST

lamp lights.
[11]

On TRANSMITTER momentarily
depress RESET pushbutton

then depress and hold CNAN


pushbutton for 1 second

BVTE

PATTERN lamps
7 on RECEIVER

2 thru
flicker
when pusbutton
is

[14] Counter
[12] On RECEIVER omentarily
operate COWJTER MODE
switch to RESET
[13] After

indicate

15 seconds operate
switch to NOLO~

000

1~

COUNTER MODE

!$$:;ou

&

[16] If no further
datapo:t
tests are
needed, disconnect
and put away test
equipment

PERFORM CHAN LOOPBACK TEST(S)

FROM OCUDP

[17] Set

TRANSMITTER

RECEIVER INPUT
NEAR LOGIC

OUTPUT and
switches

to

UtAN LOOP6ACK

TEST

BYTE
lamp lights.
PATTERN lamps 2

[18] On

TRANSMITTER momentarily
depress
RESET pushbutton
depress
and hold for
1 second CJ4ANpushbutton

then

thru

7 on RECEIVER

flicker
when
pushbutton
is released
=

[19] On

RECEIVER

operate
switch

momentarily

-TER
MODE
to RESET

Counter
indicates

should

indicate

000

000

[20] After

15 seconds operate
CO18WER MOE switch to NOLO

1
[22] If no further
dataport
tests are
needed, disconnect
and

put

away

test

equipaent

PERFORM CHAN LOOPBACK TEST(S)

FROM OCUDP

19SU0

PAGE 5 of

365-170-000

I MAR 1982
I DLP
5

16011

[ 1 ] Make sure there

is no service

on channel
I

[2] Get test

equipment

[3] Connect cords

listed

in TABLEA

as shown in FIG.

1, Page 2

[6] Replace

[4] Depress

POWERswitches on
TRANSMITTER and RECEIVER

OIU and
repeat
through

KS-20909

RECEIVER

KS-20908

D3/D4 DATAPORT
TEST INTERFACE
WIT

ED-3C792

LOOPBACK

ED - 3C793

steps
5

[7] Refer
SD-3C304
to repair
wiring

to

L-J

TABLE A
TRANSMITTER

No

No

bay

cOmEcToR
CABLE ASSEMBLY

COMCODE
84272S111

1 MAR 1982
DLP
365-170-000

Issuo

PERFORM OCU LOOPBACK TEST(S)

FROM OCUDP

PAGE 1 of

602

SIGNAL

POWER

r
;
CLOCK ,
RECEIVER

VAC

04

I
I

OIIJ-2
ED- 3
3C793 J=

TO
CH BK -

TO
115

I
I

RCV
EO-3C792

I
I
1

TMT

-0
TST

L .
CABLE ASSEMBLY
COMODE 842725111

POWER

lmL~

TRAUHIITER

FIG.

PERFORM OCU LOOPBACK TEST(S)

FROM OCUDP

I
I
I

.
\

CLOCK

HHITE DOUN

[8] Set
switches on
test sets per
TABLEB

Page 4

No

(4
Page

TABLE B
TRAu5mTlER
SWTOi

MDE

SUIT~

FOSITI@

Same as

DATA RATE

R-IVER

customer

RFFEAT

DATA RATE

CHAIWEL

POSXTIW

Same as
customer
I

or

SXM3LE

SUBRATE ~L

PERFORM OCU LOOPBACK TEST(S)

FROM OCWIP

[10]

Set TRANSMITTER
RECEIVER INPUT

OUTPUT and

switches

to

FAR LOOIC

1
OCU LOOPBACK TEST

[11]

On TRANSMITTER momentarily
depress RESET pushbutton
and hold ~
then depress
for 1 second
pushbutton

[12] On RECEIVER omentarily


operate COUNTER MOOE
switch to RESET

lamp lights,
BYTE
lamps 2

PATTERN
thru

7 on RECEIVER

when
flicker
pushbutton
is released

Counter
indicates

b
000

[14 ] Counter
should
indicate
000

*
/

[13] After

15 seconds operate
COU4TER MODE switch to NOLo~

[15] Are you


going to
test near

[16] If no further
dataport
tests are
needed, disconnect
and put away test
equipment

PERFORM OCU LOOPBACK TEST(S)

FROM OCUDP

[17]

[18]

Set TRANSMITTER
RECEIVER INPUT
NEAR LOOIC

OUTPUT and

switches

to

On TRANSMITTER momentarily
depress RESET pushbutton
then depress and hold OCU
for 1 second
pushbutton

1
~

LOOPBACK TEST

lamp lights
BYTE PATTERN

on

RECEIVER

lamps

flicker
G

[19]

[20]

On RECEIVER momentarily
operate cXIRdlER MODE
switch to RESET
After
COIMIER

Counter
indicates

4
000

should
indicate

000

+-

15 seconds operate
MODE switch tO NOLD~

[22]
If no further
dataport
tests are
needed, disconnect
and put away test
equipment

Issuo

PERFORM OCU LOOPBACK TEST(S)

FROM OCUDP

365-170-000
PAOE 5 of

I MAR 19S2
I UP
5

602

[1] Make sure

[2] Get test

there

is

equipment

no

service

listed

on channel

in TABLEA,_

1
[5] Are clock
lamps
lighted

[3] Connect cords


Page 2

as shown in FIG. 1,

No

Page 3

No

v
[6] Replace
and
repeat
steps 3
through 5

[4] Depress

POWER switches
on
TRANSMITTER and RECEIVER

OIU

TRANSMITTER

KS-20909

RECEIVER

KS-20908

D3/D4

ED-3C792

DATAPORT

[7] Refer to
SD-3C304
to repair
bay wiring

TABLE A

TEST

INTERFACE

UNIT
LOOPBACK

ED-3C793

mmEcToR
CABLE ASSEMBLY

~E
842725111

Issue

PERFORM DSU LOOPBACK TEST

FROM DSODP

I MAR 1982
365-170-000
I DLP
1

PAGE 1 o+ 5

16031

Iv

WHITE UP UHEN
TESTING TOWARD
NEAR ENO
REO UP WHEN
TESTIH
TOHARO
FAR Em

cm
GoEs To
WITE SIOE OF
cOMECTOR

POUER

-..
rD4-BAfi

CLOCK

OIU-2

TRAWMITTER
RCV
To
115 VAC

I
I

+
1S1

TNT
A

w
3C793

TO
CH 3K

CABLE ASSEmLY
COMCOOE B42725111

POUER

I
I

51(MA1
RECEIVER

FIG.

PERFORM DSU LOOPBACK TEST

FROM DSODP

I
I

L . -

..

CLOCK

I
I
1

OSOOP

EO-

I
ED-3C792

CORD GOES TO
REO SIOE OF
CONNECTOR

I
I

[8] Set switches on


test sets per TABLEB
and depress TERMINATE
switch if available
on
RECEIVER,

lights

TERMINATED

lamp

if available

TABLE B
-IVER

TRAMSWTTER

Smlal
DATA RATE

sulTat

POSITION

Same as

DATA RATE

LOOPBACK
TEST

OUTPUT

BIPOLAR

Same as
customer

customer
FMION

POSITION

COWfER

BLOCK ERRORS
LOOPED

TEST WD
CHAM8EL

or

SIWLE

SUBRATE ~L
WE

REPEAT

INPUT

BIPOLAR

tssve

365-170-000

PERFORM DSU LOOPBACK TEST FROM DSODP

PAGE 3 of

I MAR 1982
I DLP
1
5

603i

[9]

[10]

Insert the ED-3C793 connector


so that white plug is on top

On TRANSMITTER momentarily
depress RESET pushbutton
then depress and hold
for
DSU pushbutton
1 second

[11] On RECEIVERmomentarily
operate COUIITER WOE
switch to RESET

DSU LOWBACK

TEST

lamp lights.

BYTE
2

PATTERN

lamps

thru 7 on RECEIVER
flicker
when
pushbutton
is released

Counter
indicates

000

[13] Does
count er
indicate
000
Yes

[12] After

15 minutes

COUIJTER WE

T
Page 5

operate

switch

to

NOLO

PERFORM DSU LOOPBACK TEST FROM DSODP

[14] Insert the ED-3C793 connector


so that red plug is on top
DSU LOOPBACK TEST

[15] On TRANSMITTER
depress RESET

momentarily
pushbutton

then depress and hold


for
DSU pushbutton

1 second

lamp lights.
BYTE
PATTERN
lamps 2
thru

7 on RECEIVER

flicker
when
pushbutton
is released
I

[16] On RECEIVER momentarily


operate C0LR4TER MODE
switch to RESET

[18) Does
counter
indicate

No

TAP-118

000

Yes
[17] After

15 minutes

COWTER

MOOE

operate

switch

to NOLD

[ 19] Disconnect
and put away
test equipment
t-

PERFORM DSU LOOPBACK TEST

FROM DSODP

S98U0

I MAR 19821

[1]

sure there is no
service on channel

Make

[2] Get test equipment


listed
in TABLEA
Yes
[3

Connect cords as shown


in FIG. 1, Page 2
No

[4

Depress POWER switches


on TRANSMITTER and

No

v
-i

RECEIVER

[6] Replace
OIU and
steps
through

repeat

3
5

w
[7]

Refer

SD-3C304
repair

TABLE A

TRANSMITTER

KS-20909

RECEIVER

KS-20908

D3/D4

ED-3C792

TEST

DATAPORT

to
to

bay

wiring

INTERFACE

WIT
LOOPBACK

ED-3C793

=ECTOR
CABLE ASSEMBLY

COWODE
842725111

Issue4

] MAR 1982
DLP

36S-170-000

PERFORM CHAN LOOPBACK TEST(S)

FROM DSODP

PAGE 1 of

604

SIGNAI

POWER
r

CLOCK

r-h
RCV

EO-3C792

I
I

niiiiil

OIU-2

PERFORM CHAN LOOPBACK TEST(S)

..

OSODP

I
I

-n
TST

FROM DSODP

1
1

I
I
I

CASLE AkE?K3LY
CONCOOE 842725111

I
F16.

NEAR END

EO3C793

REmvEa

.
f

m----

TO
115 VAC

D4 BAM(
1
I

TRANSMITTER

,RED UP UHEN

UIROGOES TO
REDSIOE OF
CtWECTOR

I
I
I
-1

[8] Set switches


on
test sets per TABLEB
and depress TERMINATE
switch if available
on RECEIVER. TERMINATED
lamD liehts
if

[9]

Are

you

going to
test far
end CHAN

Page 4

c+
Page

TABLE B
TUNS411TER
SWIT~

DATA RATE

RECEIVER
FOSITION

Same as

SWITC+l

DATA RATE

customer
FLMXIOU

LOOPBACK
TEST

WmJT

BIPOLAR

MOE

REPEAT

PERFORM CHAN LOOPBACK TEST(S)

POSITIOU

Same as
customer

COWTER

BIT

ERRORS

TEST WDRD

LOOPED

CHAWJEL or
SUBRATE CHAIWEL

SI*LE

lNPUT

FROM DSODP

BIPOLAR

[10]

Insert

so that

the

connector
is on top

ED-3c793

red plug

CHAN

[11]

On TRANSMITTER momentarily
depress RESET pushbutton
then depress and hold
for 1
CJiAN pushbutton
second

LOOPBACK

TEST

lights.
BYTE
PATTERN
lamps 2
thru 7 on RECEIVER
flicker
when
pushbutton
is released
lamp

[ 14] Counter
should

[12] On

switch

[13]

momentarily
COWTER MODE

RECEIVER

operate

to

indicate

Counter

000

RESET

After
15 seconds operate
COWTER MODE switch
to HOLD

$4;:0
test

)s

<

near

end CHAN
No
w
[16] If no further
dataport
tests are
needed, disconnect
and put away test
equipment

PERFORM CHAN LOOPBACK TEST(S)

FROM DSODP

pa,e,

[17]

Insert the ED-3C793 connector


so that white plug is on top

[18] On TRANSMITTER momentarily


depress RESET pushbutton
then
CNAN

depress

and hold

pushbutton

for

second

CHANLOOPBACK TEST
BYTE
lamp lights.
PAITERN

lamps

on RECEIVER
flicker
when
pushbutton
is released
thru

[19] On RECEIVER momentarily


operate COIH4TER MODE
switch

[20

After

to

RESET

15 seconds

COWTER

to

+
1

[22] If no further
dataport
tests are
needed, disconnect
and put away test
equipment

operate

MODE switch

[21 ] Counter
should
indicate
000

NOLD

PERFORM CHAN LOOPBACK TEST(S)

FROM DSODP

[1] Make sure there is no


service on channel
[2] Get test equipment
listed
in TABLEA

I
Page 3

[3] Connect cords as shown


in FIG. 1, Page 2
No

[4] Depress PWER switches


on TRANSMITTER and
RECEIVER

and repeat
steps 3
through 5

OIU

[7] Refer to
SD-3C304 to
repair bay
wiring

I RECEIVER
03/04
TEST

DATAPORT
INTERFACE

KS-20908

ED-3C792

lMT

LOOP13ACX

ED-3C793

~oR

CABLE ASSEMLY

~E
842725111

PERFORM OCU LOOPBACK TEST(S)

FROM DSODP

SIGNAL .
CORD GOES TO
UHITE SIDE OF
CONNECTOR

DUER

r-f

-.E!wd

TMT

RED UP HHEN
TESTING TOUARO
FAR END
UHITE UP UHEN
TESTING
TOUARO
NEAR ENO

__

I
I

OIU-2

I
I
I

OSODP
EO3C793

w---ED-3C792

10
115 VAC

--n
TST

1
s16.L~
RECEIVER

I
I
I

-J

CORD GOES TO
RED SIOE OF
CONNECTOR

FIG.

Issue

4 I MAR 1982
365-170-000
DLP

PERFORM OCU LOOPBACK TEST(S)

FROM DSODP

PAGE

2 of

605

[8] Set switches on


test sets per TABLEB
and depress TERMINATE
switch if available
on RECEIVER. TERMINATED
lamp lights
if
available

[9] Are you


going to
test far
end H
INO

c+)
Page 5

TABLE B
TRANSUTTER
SWIT~

FOSITION

DATA RATE

Same as
customer

FIMCTION

LOOPBACK
TEST

OUTPUT

BIPOLAR

MODE

PERFORM OCU LOOPBACK TEST(S)

REPEAT

EECEIVEE
SUITO#

DATA RATE

cuHrER

CMAMWL

or

SWRATE

~L

FROM DSODP

Same as
customer
BIT

TEST WORD

IWUT

POSITION

ERRORS

LOOPED

SINGLE
BIPOLAR

[10] Insert the ED-3c793 connector


so that red plug is on top
[11] On TRANSMITTER momentarily
depress RESET pushbutton
then depress and hold OCU
pushbutton
for 1 second

OCU LOOPBACK TEST lamp


BYTE PATTERN
lights,
lamps 2 thru 7 on
RECEIVER flicker
when
pushbutton
is released
I
\

[14 ] Counter
should
indicate

[12] On RECEIVER momentarily


operate COl#JTER MODE
switch to RESET
[13] After

000

15 seconds operate
MODE switch
to HOLD

----l

COWTEI?

[15] Are
going to
test near
end OW

you

F-@=

INO
[ 16] If no further
dataport
tests are
needed, disconnect
and put away test
equipment
\

PERFORM OCU LOOPBACK TEST(S)

FROM DSODP

[17] Insert the ED-3c793 connector


so that white plug is on top _
H LOOPBACK
lamp lights

[18] On TRANSMITTER momentarily


depress RESET pushbutton
then depress and hold OCU
pushbutton for 1 second

TEST
hUipS

BYTE PATTERN

on

RECEIVER

flicker
I

[19] On RECEIVER momentarily


operate CUWTER MODE
switch to RESET
[20

After

Counter
indicates

+
1-)
000

15 seconds operate
switch to HOLO

[21] Verify
counter
indicates
000

COUNTER WIDE

[22] If no further
dataport
tests are
needed, disconnect
and put away test
equipment

PERFORM OCU LOOPBACK TEST(S)

FROM DSODP

Make sure

:et

i:

test

there

is no service

equipment

listed

on channel

in TABLEA

.cntact far end and request


hey will need one ED-3C793

their assistance.
connector
Page 3

[4

Ionnect

cords

as shown in FIG. 1,
age~

[5, bepress

POWER

[6] Set switches

switches

on test

on

sets

TRANSMITTER

and

RECEIVER

__J

per TABLEB
TABLE

TABLE A
TRANSMITTER
RECEIVER
D3/D4

TRANSMITTER

KS-20909

SWITCH

KS-20908

DATAPORT TEST

INTERFACE

DATA RATE

ED-3C792

WIJIT

LOOPBACK CON4E~OR
CABLE ASSEMBLY

OUTPUT
ED-3C793

FLNCTION

9,6

MODE

SWIT04

INWT

LOOPBACK

COLNTER

REPEAT

POSITIU4

DATA RATE

BIPOLAR

TESTS

COMCODE
842725111

RECEIVER

POSITION

TEST

9.6
BIPOLAR

WORD

CNANNEL or

BIT

ERRORS
LOOPED
SINGLE

SUBRATE CHAFUdEL

PERFORM DSODP LOOPBACK TEST

FROM

. .
r
, 04 BAM
CLOCK,
RECEIVER

I
I

EO- 3
3C7B3 :=

POWER

SISUAL
,

FROM DSODP

II
TST

.
\

CL(NX

PERFORM DSODP LOOPBACK TEST

I
I
I
I
I
I
I

FIG.

OSOOP

To
alsK

TO
115 VAC

OIU-2

I
ED-%92

REOUP

UHITE 00MN

[11] Have far


Page
lighted

-/

-.1-

No

[8] Replace
OIU and
connect cords
as shown in
FIG. 1

-i

I Z:punder
[ 10] Refer
to SD-3C304
to repair
bay wiring
.

[9] Depress
POWER switches
on TRANSMITTER
and RECEIVER
i

PERFORM DSODP LOOPBACK TEST FROM DSODP

lamp lights
available,
also BVTE
lamps 2 thru 7 flicker

TERMINATE

[12] Depress TERMINATE switch on


if RECEIVER has that switch

[13] On

RECEIVER

momentarily
switch to

COLNTER MOOE

RECEIVER

operate

Counter

shows 000

Counter
indicate

should

if
PATTERN

RESET

[14] After

15 seconds operate
C01H4TER MOOE switch to HOLO

[15] Have far end remove ED-3C793. If no


further dataport tests are needed,
disconnect
test equipment

PERFORM DSOtW LOOPBACK TEST

FROM DSODP

000

/ki!i>

[1] Make sure there

[2] Get test

is no service

equipment

listed

on channel

in TABLEA

[3] Contact far end and request their assistance.


They will need one ED-3C793 connector
Page 3
[4] Connect

cords as shown in FIG. 1, Page 2

[5] Depress

POWERswitches

(6] Set switches

on test

on TRANSMITTER
and RECEIVER____/

sets

per TABLEB
TABLEB

TABLEA
TRANSMITTER

KS-20909

RECEIVER

KS-20908

D3/D4 DATAPORT
TEST
INTERFACEUNIT

ED-3C792

LOOPBACK
COWECTOR

ED-3C793

CABLEASSEMBLY

COMCODE

SWITCH
DATA RATE
WTPUT

FLRIJCTIW

POSITIW
9.6
FAR LOOIC

2047

SWITOf

MODE

FROM OCUDP

REPEAT

POSITION

DATA RATE
INPUT
COLE4TER
TEST WORD

84272S111

PERFORM DSODP LOOPBACK TEST

RECEIVER

TRANSMITTER

CNAtwEL or
SUBRATE CNAMEL

9.6
FAR
BIT

LOOIC
ERRORS

2047
SINOLE

S16MAL

RED
r-- .
I
RECEIVER

EO-3CT62

TO
115 VAC

TO
CH6K

Tm

CLOCK

___l

/
.
/-

OIU-2

I
I
, -1

TST

1
I
I
I
I
I

I
I
I
I
I
I

&-&,,

MHITE O(RJN

PWER

SIGNAL
TR~ZTTER
FIG.

I MAR 1982
DLP
365-170-000

Issuo

PAGE 2 Of 3

PERFORM DSODP LOOPBACK TEST

FROM OCUDP

607

[7] Have far end insert


ED-3C793 into DSODP
under test

[8] On

RECEIVER momentarily
CMITER
MODE switch
to

BYTEPATTERNlamps 2
thru 7 flicker

operate

Counter

shows

[10] Verify
counter
indicates

000

RESET

000
&

[9] After 15 seconds operate


MODEswitch to NOLD

mER
I

-1

[11 ] Have far end


remove ED-3C793. If
no further
dataport
tests are needed,
disconnect
and put
away test equipment

! Issue 4 [

PERFORM DSODP LOOPBACK TEST FROM OCUDP

MAR 1982

365-170-000

PAGE 3 of

16071

DLPi

[1] Get and condition KS- I451O


volt -ohm. milliamneter
[DLP-521]
or equivalent
(may also use
KS-20599 digital
voltmeter)
-~
[4] Does meter
indicate
between 1.0 and
5.0 volts dc

[2] Prepare meter to measure up


to 5V dc

Yes

)--

:.

[3] Connect one meter lead to frame


ground and other lead to OIU
as shown in FIG. 1

[5) Replace
and
repeat from
step 3

OIU

ON-2

s
[6] Notify
engineering
that clock is
not connected
to bank

TO FRAK

%=
~m
o
O
*O

VOLTWER
1s1

FIG.

VERIFY

EXTERNAL CLQCK IS

PRESENT AT BANK,

USING VOLTMETER

SUMARY

Make test

connections
per FIG. 1 and measure noise
per TABLEB.
requirements

[1] Obtain test


TABLEA

equipment

TABLE A

for
I

Noise measuring

per
1

[2]

[3]

P6AD

2 Patch Cords

3P6A

1 Patch Cord

3P6D

[8] Observe
W for
requirements
of TABLEB

TYPE

J94003C

1 Patch Cord

PTS-CAU set REJ FLT switch


to IN, TEST switch to CWN
LINE,
and SENDLEVELDB switch
switch to O
connections

(NMS)

J98718AL PTS
J98718AJ CAU

On

[6] Make test


FIG. 1

set

RE~N)ED

D3/D4
PORTABLE TEST SET (PTS)
With Channel Access Unit (CAU)

NMScalibration
checked, NMS/FTS
switches set,
and connections

[4] On W set FINCTION switch to


N/M 600/900, NORN-DAMP
switch
to DAMP, DBRN switch to 8S,
and weighting network for
C-MESSAGE weighting
[5

EOUIPMENT REQUIRED
I

per

[7] See TABLEB. Measure for requirements


for each position
of SEI@ LEVELDB
switch. FUS Den switch ust be
rotated counterclockwise
for on-scale
reading each time

TABLEB
slmal

POSITIUNS

Send level
dB
on CAU

10

20
30

40

REQUIREMENTS

56 dBrnc or less
46 dBrnc or less
36 dBrnc or less
26 dBrnc or less
22 dBrnc or less

NoTEl
When using ~U for
a series of tests,
the calibration
requires
checking
only once unless
CAU is suspected
of
causing trouble

-1

WITSIN~L

SAM

1)3/D4

3PSA

PORTABLE

TEST

SET

Col?os

R
,

iYi

k-m
Ill

Ill

CAU

K?M?LED
SIDE

(m-l

/soo61 TERH

P6A6
CORD

o
0

p&

Q!
*6
mNo
(mJno
910

UTG
1

El

SRO

0
FIG.

I
PERFORM LOOPED CHANNEL BANK

DISTORTION TROUBLE TEST

Issue

365-170-000

PAGE 2 of

MAR1982
i DLP
2

1609

sumiARY

TABLE A

Make test connections


per FIG. 1. Measure crosstalk
on
one channel while sending tone into one interfering
channel
(TABLEB). Then measure again while sending tone into second
interfering
channel. Requirement is 27 dBrnc or less.

EOUIPMENT REWIRED

Noise Measuring
D3/D4

Set (NMS)

PORTABLE TEST

Channel Access Unit


[1] Obtain

test

equipment

[2] On TPU
digroup

locate

option
to be tested

per TABLEA
stamping for
[FIG. 1]

[3] Determine which option


or D2) has been selected
of white plug
~

(DID,

by location

[4] Go to portion of TABLEB for that


option and select channel to be
measured ~

J94003C

SET (PTS)
(CAU)

With

J98718AL PTS
J98718AJ CAU
3P6A

2 Patch Cords

P6AD

1 Patch Cord

3P6D

/
-

now

\
[6] Are channel

No

[7] Insert
channel units
in these
channels

[5] Using TABLEB, determine two most


likely
interfering
channels

TROUBLE TEST

channel to be measured
and on one interfering

PERFORM LOOPED CHANNEL BANK CROSSTALK

RECOUENDED TYPE

2 Patch Cords

Test and
interfering
channels

SEO,

NOTE 1
Channels are
identified
by
number designations
below slots;
A or B
indicates
digroup.
Test and interfering
channels must be in
same digroup

TABLE @

TPU

TPU

UIMOOU

D1O

DID

D2

(1-12)

;
c

B SEQ

B SEQ

~L
TO BE
lmEAslmED

wm
[

PLUG
Y

DID
OPTION
STAWIHG /

A SEQ
[ D2i

D2

DID

DID

D2

OIGROUP B = 010
OIGROUP A = 02

BOTHOIGROUPS
SET FWl D31D4
FIG.

1 -

Excnples

D2

GIAWEL
TO BE
NEASLIRED
(13-24)

WST LIKELY
INTERFERIW
~LS

13
14
15
16
17
18

24
13
14
15

24
13
14
15
16

:;
21
22

18
11
12

A SEQ
[

3
4
5
6
7
8

-T
LIKELY
IMTERFERI*
~LS

18
11

;:
24
23
21
22
13
14
15
16

:
3
4
5
6
7
:

:
10
11
12

6
7
8

-iT-

13

D40R
D3
(SEQ)

4
5
6
7

;:
21
22

:
10

11

PERFORM LOOPED CtiAtWEL

BANK CROSSTALK

TROUBLE TEST

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18

on CAu:

[8)

Check calibration
of
CAU [DLP-518] [NOTE2]

[9]

Set TEST switch


to OtAN LIW

[10] Set REJ


to an

FLT

[11] Set to o

switch

LEVEL

switch

on Pus:

[12] Check calibration

of RUS [DLP-519]

[ 13] Verify that weighting network is


installed
with C-MESSA6Edesignation 7
aligned with UT6

[ 14] Set FU4CTIONswitch

to M 600/900
+

[ 15] Set NOUM-DAWswitch

[16] Set D6RN switch

to DAMP~

to 50

PERFORM LOOPED CHANNEL BANK CROSSTALK TROUBLE TEST

NOTE2
When using CAUfor
a series of tests,
the calibration
requires
checking
only once unless
CAU is suspected of
causing trouble

%%?%

[17] Make test connections


per
FIG. 2, Page 5. Connect to channel
to be measured and connect
to one interfering
channel
[TABLEB, Page 2]

switch on PUS
[18] Rotate ~
counterclockwise
for
on-scale reading _%

[19] Observe MS for


level of 27 dBrnc
or less

[20]

Connect to other interfering


channel and observe BUS for
level of 27 dBrnc or less

PERFORM LOOPED CHANNEL BANK CROSSTALK

TROUBLE TEST

CHAWELUNITS

IN 04

DIGROUP

CHANNEL BEING llEASUREO

D3/D4

PORTABLE

TEST

3P6A
COROS

SET
/

Iii)
-1
TO ONE INTERFERINGCHANNELTHEN OTHER[TABLE B, PAGE2]

---t%R
0000

3P6D
CoRo

310

R
R

6R0

w
n
06RN

El
~F

FUNCTION
o

FIG, 2

PERFORM LOOPED CHANNEL BANK CROSSTALK TROUBLE TEST

0
n

NOISE
REASURIW

SET

SUMARY
connections
per FIG. 1. Insert pin plug into
R CODE on RU to test
receiver
gain. CAU must indicate
in
black area for receiver
gain or green-black-green
area
for net loss
Make test

SWIm

RRWIRSD

R~

TVPS

fWTABLE TEST
J98718AL PTS
(plS) With Channel
Access Unit (CAU)
I J98718AJ CAU

2 Patch Cords

D3/M
SET

[ 3P6A
&

[1] Obtain

test

equipment

1 Patch Cord

per TABLEA

Pin Plug
[2] Check calibration

of

CAU

I P6AD
KS-19531

[DLP-518]

]]~
[3] On CAU set TEST to CJiANLINE and
REJ FLT to OUT
[7] Observe CAU
for indication
in black area
14] Make test

[5]

CAUset
to OFF

on

connections

~er FIG. 1

Page 3

SEMI LEVELDE switch

test receiver
[6] At digroup to be tested,
gain by inserting
pin plug into R CODE
jack on RU and depress ACOon ACIJ

Mm 1
When using CAU for
a series of tests,
the calibration
requires
checking
only once unless
CAU is suspected
of
causing trouble

PERFORM LOOPED CHANNEL BANK RECEIVER


TROUBLE TEST

GAIN AND NET LOSS


%%%?%

CHANNEL UNIT IN
LOOPED DIOROUP

D3/D4

PORTABLE

TEST

SET

!?

>
3

BLAW
LINE

-0.5 -0.s/0

BLACNAREA

+o.& +0.s
OE
\

~OBBNATCit
AREA
L16HT BREEN

PERFORM LOOPED CHANNEL BANK RECEIVER


TROUBLE TEST

NET

[8] Remove pin


plug from R -E
jack on N

H-~~ing
IHE=FI+

NOTE2
1
All transmission
tests can be
performed on looped
bank before removing
connections

LEE/
MAR 1982

ISSUQ 4

PERFORM LOOPED CHANNEL BANK RECEIVER


TROUBLE TEST

GAIN AND NET LOSS

DLP

365-170-000

PAGE 3

Of

[611[

sum!ARY

Make test
equipment

connections
per FIG. 1. Verify that test
is connected at other office for channel

being

tested.
Requirements are 1 count in 5 minutes at 63 dBrnc
and no more than 5 counts at 58 dBrnc. Verify that test
indications
at other office are within specified
limits.

[1] Get test equipment


per TABLEA

TABLE A
WIPNENT

[2] On D3/D4 PTS, set


as follows:
REJ FLT to OUT
SEND LEVEL
TEST

switches

[4]

Set test
follows:
DIAL-MEAS
IMFULSES

set
to

switches

PORTABLE TEST

SET

6H impulse counter
calibrated
and
switches set on
D3/D4-PTs

to CNANLINE

Check calibrations
of
impulse set [DLP.522]

RECOWEDED TYPE

J98718AL (PTS)
(PTS) with Channel J98718AJ (CAU)
Access Unit (CAU)

D3/D4

to OFF

[3]

REWIRED

Impulse

Counter

J94006H

3 Patch Cords

3P6A

1 Patch Cord

P6AD

as

MEAS

ABOVE DBRN to

63

([5]

PERFORM LOOPED IMPULSE

Make test connections


per FIG. 1

NOISE TROUBLE TEST

P6AD PATCH CORO BETUEEM


D4 CHANNELUNIT BEING
TESTED AND D4 TST CKT

D3/D4

PORTABLE

TEST

SET

/
D4 TST CKT

D4 PLUG-IN
CHANNEL UNITSJ

KNURLEO SIDE!OF PLUG IS


XMT JACK I
PLUGGED INTO

DURING
IUTERVAL
I

DIAL-MEAS
SWITCH>

7.5V
%QN

&

l/4AMP

o
0

93

MEAS
mN

IF!PULSESABOVE DBRN

Q!

CAL AT 93 DBRN

~OURING
INTERVAL
3P6D PATCHCORD

FIG. 1
Issuo

4 I MR 1982
365-170-000
I DLP

PERFORM LOOPED IMPULSE

NOISE TROUBLE TEST

PAGE 2 of

1612]

On 6H Impulse Counter:
[7]Rotate DURINGINTERVAL
fully clockwise and then
counterclockwise
to 5 MIMJTES

[8]

Observe that
0 to 1 after

counter indicates
5 minutes

[9]

Set IMPULSE ABOVE


switch to 58

DBlw

:M%%ds%RY5.--J

[10] Rotate

DURINGINTERVALfully

[11] Observe that counter indicates


5 or less after !5 minutes

PERFORM LOOPED IMPULSE

NOISE TROUBLE TEST

R%i%

sumARY

Make test connections


per FIG. 1 and measure
should be 23 dBrnc or less

noise,

Level

I
EQUIPMENT REWIRED

Noise measuring
D3/D4

set

PORTABLE TEST

RECOUEN)ED

(NMS)
SET

With Channel Access Unit

[1] Get test equipment


TABLEA

TABLE A

per

TYPE

J94003 C

(PTS)

J98718AL PTS
J98718AJ
CAU

(CAU)

1 Patch Cord

P6AD

2 Patch Cords

3P6A

1 Patch Cord for NMS

3P6D

[2]
=:::~
[3] Make test
Fig. 1

connections

[4] On PTS-CAU set


OUT,

SEND LEVEL

TEST

switch

NMScalibration
checked, NMS/PTS
switches set
and connections

per

REJ FLT switch


to
DB to OFF, and

[7] Observe NMS


for level of
23 dBrnc or
less

to CNANLINE

[5] On NMS, set FW6CTIONswitch


NM600/900, NORM-DAMP switch
to DAMP, DBRN switch to 8S,
and weighting network so that
C-MESSAGE is aligned
with WTG -1
[6] On MS rotate
counterclockwise

switch
for on-scale

DBRN

readin~

I
I

Issue

I MAR 1982

! 365-170-000

PERFORM LOOPED IDLE

CIRCUIT

NOISE TROUBLE TEST

DLPi

CHA~L
I

1S1

WITS IN CHANNELBAM

&

D3/D4

3PM

Iil

CORDS
\04

PORTABLE

SET

%mzn

TST CKT
F

TST

1S1

TEST

SEND LEVEL DB

CAU

XMT
F

TO D4 Clh

KNURLED
SIDE

liil

~mm

ggj)

PSAD
CURD

/1

3PSD
CORD

@EJno
310

Fl

GRD

UTG

HI

03RN

b
FIG.

PERFORM LOOPED IDLE

CIRCUIT

&

NOISE TROUBLE TEST

NOISE
HEASURIK3
SET

[1] Obtain M signaling path test


set (SPTS) from SPTS slot in
maintenance bank
[2]

Select test channel in


digroup under test

[3] Remove channel unit


(if installed)

[4] Insert

selected

SPTS in channel slot


in step 2

[5] See TABLEAand perform

tests 1 and 2 setting


switches to positions
indicated

TABLE A
TSST

ll:l

Swxml

i msxlxm

HA-

LlanTw

121: 1:1 B0n1yI


PERFORM LOOPED SIGNALING

TROUBLE TEST

[1]

Make

sure

[2] Get test

there

is no service

equipment

[3] Contact
They will

listed

on channel

in TABLEA

their assistance.
connector

far end and request


need one ED-3c793

Page 3

[4] Connect cords as shown in FIG. 1, Page 2


/
/

[5] Depress

POWER switches

[6] Set switches

on test

on TRANSMITTER

sets

and

RECEIVER

per TABLEB
TABLE B

TABLE A

RECEIVER

TRANSMITTER

KS-20909

RECEIVER

KS-20908

SWITOi

POSITI~

03/04

EO-3C792

DATA RATE

9,6

DATAPORT TEST

INTERFACE

UNIT

TRANSMITTER

OUTWT

CABLE ASSEMBLY

COMCODE
842725111

LOOPBACK CONNECTOR

ED-3C793

FUdCTIN

FAR

LOGIC

2047

SWIT~

REPEAT

9.6

DATA RATE
FAR

INPUT

BIT

COLNTER
TEST WORD

MODE

POSITION

CNANIJEL

or

LOGIC
ERRORS

2047
SINGLE

SUBRATE CNAMIEL

-ISERFORM LOOPED D4 CHANNEL BANK TEST

FROM OCUDP

PAGE 1 of

1615J

SIGNAL

REO UP

POUER

CLOCK
t
RECEIVER
1

.
r
D4 BANK
1

1I

I
I
I

RCV
ED-3C792
10

TO
CH BK

115-VAC

__

I
I

OCUDP

EO-

CABLE ASSEHBLY
COH CODE842725111

a
.

3C793

-u
TST

TllT

CLOCK

OIU-2

_
\

I
I
I
I
_

UHITE 00UN

POUER

S16ML
TRA-ITTER

PERFORM LOOPED D4 CHANNEL BANK TEST FROM OCUDP

l%%%%

BYTE PATTERN

[8] On

RECEIVER equipped
TERMINATE pushbutton,

TERMINATE

with
depress

lamps

and, if
thru 7 flicker
TERMINATED
available,
lamp lights

pushbutton

EREswitchtOREET~
:i;:

[9] On

RECEIVER

[10] After
WDE

momentarily

15 seconds operate
switch to HOLD

operate

CU%IITER

[12] Have far end


remove ED-3C793. If
no further
dataport
tests are needed,
disconnect
test
equipment

1 MAR 1982
UP
365-170-000

Issuo

PERFORM LOOPED D4 CHANNEL BANK TEST FROM OCUDP

PAGE 3 of

615 1

is no service

[1] Make sure there

[2

Get test

equipment

listed

on channel

n TMLEA~

far end and request their


They will need one ED-3C793

[3 Contact

assistance.

connecor~

[4]

Connect cords

[5] Depress

[6]

as shown in FIG. 1, Page 2

POWER

Set switches
TABLE

switches

on test

on

sets

TRANSMITTER

~~~

and

RECEIVER

per TABLEB
TABLE B

TRANSMITTER

KS-20909

RECEIVER

KS-20908

SWIT94

WsrTrm

D3/D4 DATAPORT TEST


INTERFACE l,BIIT

ED-3C792

DATA RATE

9.6

CABLE ASSEMBLY

COMCODE

TRMITTER

ED-3C793

BIPOLAR

INPUT

FUNCTIW

LODPBACK
TESTS

ComTER

MODE

REPEAT

GHANNEL BANK TEST FROM DSODP

9.6

DATA RATE

BIPOLAR
BIT

TEST WORD
~AMIEL

or

SUBRATE CNAWEL

PERFORNLLOOPEQ 04

PosITI@J

Swlta

UJTWT
84272S111

LOOPBACK CCMQ4ECTOR

RSCSIVER

ERRORS
LOOPED
SINOLE

SIGNAL

RED UP

POHER


rD4 BANK
I
REC

DsODP

I
I
I
I

I
1
I

TNT
A

1- .

U
TST

I
CLOCK

_.

OIU-2

EO-3C792
TO
CH BK

TO
115 vAC

..

CLOCK,
RECEIVER

CABLE ASSEMBLY
COMCODE
842725111

UHITE 00uN

POUER

SII?NA1
TRANSMITTER

PERFORM LOOPED D4 CHANNEL BANK TEST

FROM DSODP

PAGE 20f3

l@511?jl

[7] Depress TERMINATE switch on


if RECEIVER has that switch

[8]

On RECEIVER momentarily
MOE

switch

to

operate

CLWNTER

RESET

[g] After 15 seconds operate


switch to NOLD

[ 10] Observe counter

RECEIVER

lamp lights if
TERMINATED
available,
also BYTE PATTERN
hp.
2 thru 7 flicker

Counter

shows 000

COUWER MODE

for 000 indication

PERFORM LOOPED D4 CHANNEL BANK TEST

FROM DSODP

Issue 4

I MR 1982

MOOE
SELECT
Mt
o
0

DECAL LOCATED
ON BACK OF
FACEPLATE

1
1

STEP 1

M2
0
1

0
1

i
EC;
EC:
NON
EC:

04
SLC-96, MODE II
EC: 04: SLC-96 MODE
SLC-96, MOOE I, 111

STEP 2
J2

STEP t
S2

I, III

I
I

\
\

c1Hm
OUT

u
.Lu
R
IN

FIG. 1

I
SET OPTIONS

DSODP 56KB

CHAhNEL

UNIT

(J98726DD)

Issue

365.170.rw
--..

I MAR 1982
i DLP
1

*VV

PAGE 1 of

17
16:.1

[1] From info-tion


in office records,
set rocker switchi?s S1 (EC IN/&il)
and S2 (MODE SELECT K1/M2).
[See FIG. 1 and 2]

[2]

From information
in office records,
set plug option J2 (EC IN/OUT).
See NOTES1 and 2 and DLP-566

EM

THIS SIDE
SELECTED

&

SIDEVIEUDF

ROCKER WITCH

FIG. 2

SET=OPTIONS

DSODP 56KB

CHAIWIIEL

UNIT (J98726DD)

NOTES
On early versions
of channel unit
J2 (EC IN/OUT)
will be factory
wired option.
Plug should be
in top (white
showing) for
EC IN and in
bottom (black
showing) for

STEP 2
J103

STEP 1
Slol

STEP 1
S102

I
i

I
+

STEP 2
J101

STEP 1
S103

MOOE
s
SELECT .
u
0

EC #

OT

m
IN OUT

ROOE
SELECT
DECALLOCATEO
ON BACKOF
FACEPLATE

nl

00
0

M2

FIG.

EC: 04
EC: SLC-86, ROOEII
MNEC: 04, SLC-96MOOE 1,
EC: SLC-88, MODE1, III

III

Issue 4 I

MAR 1982

365-170-000

SET

OPTIONS OCUDP 56KB CHANNEL UNIT

(J98726DE)

PAGE 1 of

1 DLP
2

16181
1

[ 1] From information
in office
set rocker switches listed
See FIG. 1 and 2

records,
in TABLEA.

Ml

[2]

From information
in office records,
set plug options J101 D/T and
J103 EC IN/OUT. See NOTE1, FIG. 1,
and DLP-566

TAME
Sullo!

Slol
S102

S103*
(3

switches)

S103 will

THIS SIOE
SELECTED

SIOEVIEUOF

II
II
t

ROCKERSWITCH

I msITIms

1-

EC

FIG. 2

IN/OIJT

SELECT

Ml

1}0

M2

I [0

not exist

Dsu/csu
CRTC/OUT
oiJ1/cM

on later

units

NOTE 1

J103 (EC- IN/OUT)


will be factory
wired option on
early versions of
channel unit

SET OPTIONS

OCUDP 56KB

CHANNEL UNIT

(J98726DE)

at 63 dBrnc and no ore than 5 counts


that test indications
at other office
limits

SURMARY

Make test connections


per FIG. 1, Page 2. Verify that test
equipment is connected at other office for channel being
tested.
Requirements are no more than 1 count in 5 inutes
[1] Get test

equipment

per TABLEA

TABLE A
EQUIPUNT

D3/D4

[2] On D3/D4 PTS, set


REJ FLT

to

switches

as follows:

OUT

[4] Set test set


as follows:
DIAL-MEAS
IMFULSES

to

I 3Impulse
Patch

on Impulse

Counter

MEAS
63

[5] Make test

connect ions per FIG. 1

[6] Verify that test


at other end

PERFORM END-TO-END

Counter
Cords

1 Patch Cord

of
[DLP-522]

ABOVE DBRN to

PORTABLE TEST

(PTS) with Channel


Access Unit (cAU)

6H impulse
counter calibrated
and switches
set on D3/D4 PTS

switches

REQUIRED

SET

SEND LEVEL to OFF


TEST to CMAN LINE

[3] Check calibration


impulse counter

at 58 dBrnc. Verify
are within specified

IMPULSE

equipment

is connected

NOISE TEST

T
I

R~EO

TYPE

J98718AL (PTS)
J98718AJ (CAU)
J94006H
I 3P6A
P6AD

P6AD PATCH CORDBETHEEN


D4 CHANNELUNIT BEING
TESTED ANO 04 1S1 CKT

D3/ti4-PORTABLE

TEST

SET

/
04 TST CKT
m

I-J

SEND LEVEL OB
D4 PLUG-IN
CHANNEL UNIT

rt
XMT

KNURLEO SIDEOF PLUG 1:


PLUGGED INTO XtlTJACK
OURING INTERVAL
I

DIAL-MEAS

WITCH
~

BATT

/ \

I!%5.1

MEAS
MON

1/4

93
+

TEST

00

%
a

mm

AflP

o
0

RCV

cm
-60011 TERR-

IMPULSES ABOVE DBRN (

7,5V
%QN

CAU

CAL AT 93 OSRN

/ DURING
INTERVAL
3P80 PATCH CORO

FIG.

PERFORM END-TO-END

IMPULSE

NOISE TEST

On 6H Impulse Counter:
[7] Rotate DURINGINIERVAL
fully clockwise
counterclockwise

and then
to S MIWTES
I

[8]

Observe that
0 or 1 after

counter

indicates

minutes~
[12] Are

[9] Set IMPULSEABOVE DBRN


switch to 58

requirements
met at both

TAP-127

ends
[10] Rotate MJRIMGINTERVALfully
clockwise and then
counterclockwise
to s MI?UTES

[11

[ 13] Remove
test
connections

Observe that counter indicates


5 or less after 5 inutes

Issue

4 I

MAR

1982
DLP

619

365.170-000

PERFORM END-TO-END

IMPULSE

NOISE TEST

PAGE 3

of

sumARY

Make test connections


per FIG. 1, Page 3.
Verify that test equipment is connected at other office
for channel being tested.
Requirements are given in
TABLEB, Page 4. Verify that test indications
at other
office are within specified
limits

[1] Obtain test


equipment per
TABLEA [N(YIE1]

TABLE

EauFwtl MWIRED
D3/D4
SET

A
~TvPa

FORTABLE TEST

(PTS) with Channel

J98718AL (PTS)
J98718AJ (WI)

Access Unit (CAU)


Noise Measuring Set
(m)

J94003C or
Equivalent

2 Patch cords

3P6A

1 Patch Cord

P6AD

1 Patch Cord

3P6D

PERFORM END-TO-END

Page 2

DISTORTION

NOTEl
Test equipment and
procedures for DID,
D2, and D3 banks are
given in BSPS for
those banks

TEST

=+%%

[2] On D3/D4 PTS


set switches as follows:
REJ FLT

to

IN

SEI@ LEVEL DB to

EST
0m *NE
~
[3] Check calibration
NMs [DLP-519]

NMScalibrated
and switches
set on P&ISand
D3/D4 PTs

of

[4] Set NW switches as follows:


FWCIION to 600 or
to 600/900 (on 3C NMS)
NORM-DAMP to
DBRN to

DAMP

85

C-MESSAGE

to align

with WTGJ

I
[5] Make test connections
per
FIG. 1, Page3 [See NOTE2]

[6] Verify

that test equipment is


connected at other office and
test is ready to be performed

PERFORM END-TO-END

DISTORTION

TEST

Test equipment
connected at
Page 4

NOTE2
With test equipment
connected as shown
in FIG. 1, You can
transmit and receive
at same time;
therefore,
the plug
need not be
moved between
transmit and receive
positions

%%%%

3P6A PATCH CORDS>

03/04

Iii1
1S1

TST

REJ FLT

TST

j
04 PLUG-IN
CHANNEL UNITS

PORTABLE TEST SET

KNURLED SIDE OF
PLUG IS PLUGGED
INTO XMT JACK

%EJ+G
CAL

i
TST

XMT

RCV

OSC

DETR

U(9
-48V oN

OFF
@
1/4 ARP

P6ADPATCHCOR0 BETUEEN
04 CNANNEL UNIT BEING
TESTEO ANO 04 TST CKT

/0

3P60
PATCH
CORO

POWER COROZ

310

DIA!
Nom
b

OANP

QI

PERFORM END-TO-END

DISTORTION

TEST

1
.

OBRN

FUNCTION

ETe
,..

C-MESSAGE
ALIGNED
UITH UTG

CAL

NOISE treasuringSET

ERR

[7] See TABLEB. Set


switch (on CAU)
to each position
(0-40)
while far end
measures for each setting

[9] See TABLEC.


Have far end set
pad key to each
position
listed
while you measure
for each setting

SEMI LEVEL

No
I
[10] See TABLEB.
Have far end send

at each level listed


while you measure
for each setting

[11] Were
requirements
met at near
and far ends

No

*
TAP-127

Yes
w
I

TABLE B
SEND LEVEL DB

56 or less

10

460r

less

20

360r

less

30

260r

less

40

t220r

less

~
METER
REWIREUENTS

TABLE C
PAD KEY
SETTING

I
1

CTR

IB

*28 if far end is D2 bank


t26 if far end is D2 bank

PERFORM END-TO-END

DISTORTION

TEST

M DSRN METER
RETIREMENTS

56 or less

36 or less

240r

less

I
I

[12] Disconnect
test
equipment
t-+

[1] Get

listed

equipment

in TABLEA

TABLE B
FAR-=

[2] Find section in TABLEB that


corresponds
to type bank at far
end (use only that section
throughout the test)

aaw

1
Page 2

DID

[3] For channel under test determine


two most likely interfering
channels.
See TABLEB

TABLE A
RE~E~ED

EOUIPMENT REQUIRED

Noise measuring
D3/D4

set

(NMS)

J94003A, B, or C

access

PTS J98718AL
J98718AJ CAU

PORTABLE TEST

channel
(CAU)

SET with

Unit

2 Patch Cords
2 Patch Cords

3P6A

I P6AD

D2

TYPE

I
I
D30RM

~L
~x~
m!AwRED
(1-12)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
6
9
10
11

24
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22

12

23 11

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

12
11
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

1
2
3

24
1

23
24
1

:
6
7
8
9
1!
12

PERFORM END-TO-END

CROSSTALK

TEST

WST LIKELY
INTERFERIM

INTERFERI~
~L~

12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
1

:2
43
54
65
76
87
98
10
9
11 10

1 24
2 13
3 14
4 15
5 16
6 17
7 18
8 19
9 20
10 21

11 22
12 23

13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

12
11
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

24
23
21
22
13
i4
15
16
17
18
19
20

13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22

Issue

PAGE 1 of5

4 1 MAR 1982
365-170-000
I DLP

1621!

on

au:

[4] Check calibration


of W [DLP-518]
[5] Set switches
as follows:
REJ FLT tO WT
SEW

LEVEL to

TEST to OIAN

LINE

On noise measuring set (W):


[6] Check calibration
of IWS [DLP519]
and
NMSready

CAU

[7] Make sure 497A network


is installed
with
C-MESSAGE designation
aligned with WTG

Page 3

Receive

[8] Set switches


FWCTIOU

to

as follows:
-

600/900

for 3C

600 for 3A)


NORM-DAW to NOM

(or M

mm

PERFORM END-TO-END

&

to so

CROSSTALK TEST

Issuo

PAGE 2 of

I MAR 1982 1

[621]

[10]

test connections
for first
interfering
channel [See FIG. 1,

Make

age]~
[11] Have far end measure crosstalk
level [see TABLEC]

[13] Does
far end meet
requirements
+

[12] Repeat steps


second

Yes

10 and 11 for

interfering

channel

Yes
*

TABLE C

No

Page 4

D3 or

27

dBrnc or less

D2

27 dBrnc or less

DID

32 dBrnc or less

First interfering
channel
allowed 29 dBrnc or less

PERFORM END-TO-END

CROSSTALK

is

TEST

[ 15] Remove
test
connections

per FIG. 1, Page 5


[16] Make test connections
to channel being measured
[17] Verify far end is connected
channel
first
interfering

to

No
level
[18] Measure and note crosstalk
rotating
DBRN switch
for
on-scale reading [See TABLED]

by

TAP-127

Yes

[19] Verify far end is connected to second


interfering
channel while you
measure level. See TABLED

No
TABLE D
TYFSBAM
AT FAR -

D3 or

D4

M RWJIREUSMTS

Page 3

27 d%rnc or less

D2

27 d%rnc or less*

DID

32 d%rnc or less

3-

[22 ] Remove
test
connections

First interfering
channel
is allowed 29 d%rnc or
less

PERFORM END-TO-END

CROSSTALK

TEST

4 I MAR1982
365-170-000
I DLP

Issuo

PAGE 4 of

[6211

CHANNEL UNITS IflD4 DIGROUP

CHANNEL BEING HEASUREO

D3/D4

PORTABLE

TEST

SET

Ii liil
-1

-1

TO ONE INTERFERING CHANNEL THEN OTHER

/M-

fw!ws!dw:a

If

-4BV

Pyl,

,,i

r411

o
:;,(!!)
114 AIIP

II

IJ
3P6D
CORO

II

~1

II

IN

UTG

(9000
310

El
~r

El

6R0

$3

FUNCTION
o

~]

NOISE MEASURIM3 SET

FIG. 1

PERFORM END- TO - END CROSSTALK

TEST

PAGE 5 of

16211

indication
on IIK. Remove pin plug from R CODE jack on
and adjust signal generator
for -3.020.05
dBm output.
Adjust transmit
attenuators
for -3.OfO.l dBm indication
on TMS

SUMARY

RU

Loop bank by inserting


pin plug in appropriate
LP jack
at LIU and insert pin plug into R CODEjack on RU.
Remove TW and make connections
per FIG. 1. Adjust
receive attenuators
in channel unit for -3.OtO.l
dBm
[ 1] Obtain equipment per TABLEA and
condition
711S [DLP-539]

TABLE A
EwIPmn

[2] Verify

TMS controls

FINCTION

to

LINE to REC,
REC LEVEL to

[3]

are set

Transmission
Measuring Sets

as follows:

SEND + TALK + REC,


REC IMP
O

to

600

ohms, and

Sienal
-

Verify channels to be adjusted


are out of service

[4] Insert

on

RU

REOUIRED

Generator

R~~ED

2 Patch

..

Cords

2 Pin Plugs

TYPE

ITS4BNHor Equivalent
(TllS)

!HP3550 or Equivalent

Channel
Unit Extender
\

J98726MF

3P6D
KS-19531

pin plug into R -E


jack
and depress ACOswitch on

AW

[5]

On LIU, insert pin plug into LP-A


to
or LP-B jack corresponding
test channels
digroup containing

[6]

Unseat TPU from slot~

ml
%

DETERMINE

ATTENUATOR SETTINGS

FOR 4 WIRE

E&MER CHANNEL UNIT

PAGE 1 of

1622

[8] Make test

connections

per FIG. 1

[9] Set signal generator


impedance
to 600 ohms and output to send
-3.0~0.05 dBm1004 Hz tone

7
BSY
4EamR

GENERATOR

3PSD
CORDS

NET

o
[11] Remove pin plug from
jack on RU

I
El

R CODE
o

NET

[12] Adjust transmit


attenuators
on
channel unit for -3.0~0.l
dBm
indication
on 1MS

REC
310

20
HZ

[13] Remove test connections


and
7
channel unit extender -----+-k
[14]

h-

20
HZ

o
GRO

[15] Remove pin plug from

LP jack

FIG. 1 - 4EMER =annel


into

DETERMINE

ATTENUATOR SETTINGS

OUT

SIGHAL

[10] Adjust receiver


attenuators
on
channel unit for -3.0?0.1
dBm
indication
on TMS

(ISC

FOR 4 WIRE E&MER CHANNEL

Exfender

~IT

Unit

Inserted

TRS

[2] Install
channel
unit extender into
channel slot to be
b
tested and install
channel unit into
extender

[1] Obtain test


equipment per
TABLEA and verify
circuit
is seized
[NOTES1 and 2]
J

TABLE A
EOUIPMEMT RE~IRED

RE~ED

Transmit
receive
I

direction

Receive

[5] Refer to FIG 3


and 4, Page 3 to make
connections
and set
CAU controls
as follows:
TEST to CHAN DROP and
SEND LEVEL DB to O
[NOTE 3]

TVPE

Channel Access
Unit (CAU) in
D3/D4 Portable
Test Set (PTS)

J98718AJ CAU in
J98718AL PTS

Channel Unit
Extender

* J98726 MF,
List 2

Test Cords

P6AD, 3P6A, and


3P6D (2)

Transmission
Measuring Set

TTS4BNHor
equivalent

Signal Generator
(oscillator)

HP3550B or
equivalent

Channel unit extenders


used for
ES2 and ES3 channel units are as

MAKE COfWECTIONS

[4] Refer to
FIG. 1 and 2, page 2
to make connections

NOTES
1, Circuit
can be seized and
held for testing
2-wire FXO
units by installing
SPTS in
far end bank (same channel
slot) and setting
switches
A and B to O. Circuit
can
be seized and held for
testing
2-wire FXS by
installing
SPTS in far end
bank (same channel slot)
with switch A set to 1 and
switch B set to O and using
INS with holding coil at
FXS end
2. P6AD cord should be
connected before seizing
circuit.
3. TMS or OSC connected to
channel unit extender will
indicate
or should be set
for actual circuit
level.
Connected to PTS, ThlS will
indicate
O dBm for -8.5 dBm
carrier
XMTTLP and OSC
should be set for O dBm for
+4.0 dBm carrier
RCVTLP

I Issue
AT D4 CHANNEL BANK FOR DROP SIDE

TESTING

4 I MAR1982

l==?%

BUSY
o
NET
o

CM

JNIT

T/R
o

NET

0
TIIR1

o
?0 HZ
o

!0 Hz

o
ST
0
Elll

o
GRO

3pgD
CORO

P6AD
CORO

FIG. 1

Connections

for

Transmit

PTS

CAU

1020

Direction
\

ANALOGPORTIONOF
CHANNEL UNIT

04 TST CKT

-7,5

EXTENOER

dk

Hz

3P6A
CORD

FIG.

MAKE CONNECTIONS

2 Testing

in Trans=it

Direction

AT D4 CHANNEL BANK FOR DROP SIDE

TESTING

I Issue

4 I

[-

365.170.000

PAGE 2 of

MAR

1982

I
3

DLPI

16231

:HANNEL
JNIT

MY

u
z
u

w
T/R

a
o
=

NET

o
NET

1
3P6D
cORO

gff

n
o
a

0 Hz

0
u
3A

0 Hz
o
GRO

n
o
a

T1/Rl
o

OSCILLATOR

0
E/M

OUT

7
II

/
OPTIONAL FOR
CARRIER RCV TLP
OTHER THAN +4.0 dBm

P6AD
CORD

FIG. 3

for

Receive

PTS

Osc

Connections

2 HIRE
CIRCUIT

ANALOG PORTION OF
CHANNEL UNIT

04 TST CKT

CAU

Osc

Direction

EXTENOER

1020 HZ
-7.5 dSm
XHT

\
EXT

Oscv

> 10

,~d

3P6A
CORD

7.5

EXT V
DETR

CORO
FIG.

MAKE CONNECTIONS

4 -

Testing

in Receive Direction

AT D4 CHANNEL BANK FOR DROP SIDE

TESTING

Issue 4 1 MAR1982
365-170-000
I DLP
PAGE 3 of

16231

TABLE A

[1] From circuit


order,
determine number of
testports
to be
established,
D4 bank
slots to be equipped,
and channel units
required [NOTES 1 and 2]
1

~L
WIT

DSO DP
J98726 DA

56 DSODP
J98726 DD

[5] Obtain required


number of 4E-

--rL

J2 to EC IN and D4 (white concealed)


and J3 to D (white showing)
J101 toD (white showing)
S1-EC~sandS2-Ml=l
andM2=O*

For testport
operation,
56 DSO DP should
have error correction
options selected

channel units and


test in maintenance
bank if test card is
available
[DLP-514]

Obtain required
number of DSO DP
units,
J98726 DA or
each in
DD, and test
maintenance bank
[DLP-626]

[6]

Set options

Y
in each 4E_
channel unit
[DLP-625]

[4] Set options


in

DSO DP unit(s)

per TABLEA

OBTAIN

AND

not

NoTEs

[3]

[7] Install
channel unit(s)
into D4 channel
bank slots to
be equipped

CONDITION CHANNEL UNITS FOR DACS TESTPOI?T OPERATION

1. Each testport
requires
two
channel slots to
be equipped in a
D4 bank for a
maximum of twelve
testports
per D4
d i group
2. Three types of
channel units
may be required
for DACStestport
operation.
They
are: OCUDP or
56 OCaJ DP for
dataport
and
4EMD for all
other types of
circuits

on work
[1] See NOTE1. From information
order set transmit and receive (T & R)
attenuator
[FIG. 1] [DLP-565]
I
[2]

option plug J2
E2G options (white
[FIG. 1] [DLP-566]

[3]

Verify X option straps


removed [FIG. 1]

Set

are

STEP 1

FmKiriim
?

lx

T \\

72
STiP 3

$T:P

FIG. 1

SET OPTIONS

4E&MD CHANNEL

UNIT (J98726CG)

NOTE1
If drop side
measurements are
required at this
time to set T and R
attenuators,
DLP-623
may be used

=%!%

[1]

See

[2]

1. Verify maintenance
WDor WE [NOTE 1]

WARNING

is List

bank

OCU channel unit as required


per CLRC or
WORDdocument for intended service.
For DSO Units,
set switches as follows:
J98726DA - J2 to EC OUT, J98726DD - S1 to EC OUT
andS2toMl=landM2=
O

Option

\
[3] Set switch
and install

on MB ALM to
channel unit

[4] On lB
verify

depress button 9 (green


other buttons have black

[5

[6

MBTS,

all

ALARM

into

DISAB

CUT slot
\

showing) and
showing
=::w;~::::t*

Option OIU-2 for local timing (LOCT)


and
install
in OIU slot of maintenance bank
Obtain equipment per T~LE A and make
connections-per
FIG, 1

/
TABLE A

TRANSMITTER
RECEIVER
TEST INIERFACE
UNIT
LOOPBACK
CONNECTOR
CABLEASSEMBLY

\
REO SIDE
UP

PDNER
TtlT

CLOCK
RECEIVER
10
li5

OIU-2
1S1

ED-3C792

VAC~

7/L

CLOCK

RCY
-

PWER

CAfJLEA8SEmLY

b
ED
3C7B3

0
1S1

WITE
SIDE

T
TRAHSWITTER .

I SIGNAL

List

84272S111

DATAPORT
CHANNEL

FIG.

WIT

WNITS IN D4 MAINTENANCE BANK

ED.3C792
ED.3C793
CWODE
842725111

NOTE1
WDor WE

banks

do not have -48


volts
on pin 31 of
CiJT slot
/

;
/
/
;
/
(

/
VARNING1
Insertion
of
/
dataport channel
unit into an
/
umodiffed
bank
(vitbout List wo /
or WE) will damage/
the channel unit
~
Issue

TEST DATAPORT CHANNEL

KS-20909
KS.20908

I MAR

1982

EEEla

[8] Depress
and

POWER

switches

on

POWER ON

TRANSMITTER

lamps lighted

RECEIVER

[9] Set switches

on test

sets

per TABLEB

[10] Verify that CLOCK indicators


sets are lighted
[NOTE 2]

[ 14] Obtain another


channel unit and
Yes
repeat procedure.
B
Return faulty
unit for repair

on test

[11] Verify BYTE PATTERN indicators


2 thru 8
light on RECEIVER, then depress ALL IS
on

TRANSMITTER

[12] Observe that


counts errors,
COUIJTER MODE

&

counter display
then momentarily operate
switch to RESET ~

RECEIVER

?
TABLE
TRANSMITTER
SWITCH

POSITION

RESET

Depress

MODE

REPEAT

FUNCTION TEST WORD2047


OUTPUT

LOGIC FAR

DATARATE 2.4 - J98726DB L1


4.8J98726DB L2
9.6 - J98726DB L3
56 - J98726DE

B
RECEIVER

I
I

SWITCH

COUNTERMODE COUNT
COUNTER
ERRORSBIT
TEST WORD
2047
INPUT
DATARATE

LOGIC FAR
Same as

setting
for
TRANSMITTER

NOTE2
If clock indicators
do not light,
test
connections
and
OIU-2 should be
checked
Issue 4 I MAR 1982
365-170-000

TEST

DATAPORT

CHANNEL UNITS

IN D4 MAINTENANCE

BANK

PAGE 2 of

DLP
4

626

[15] On

set
follows:
F~TION
TEST and OUTPUT to
TRANSMITTER,

switches

as

[16] On

TRANSMITTER,

then

to

LOOPBACK

LOGIC

depress

NEAR

RESET

LODPBACK TEST OCU

[17] On RECEIVER, set

switches

[20] Obtain
another channel
unit and repeat
procedure.
Return
faulty
unit for
repair

Does display
indicate
errors
or do D and F
[19]

as

[18] On

RECEIVER,

momentarily

COLBJTER MODE to

counter

for

RESET and

No

operate
observe

L=l

15 seconds

L
I

[21] On

TRANSMITTER,

depress
RESET

[25] Depress 9 and


17 on lB NBTS, set

switch

MB ALM,

to

NOR on

and

remove

connections
and channel unit
A
test

Yes

[23] On
TRANSMITTER,
I

TEST

DATAPORT CHANNEL UNITS

depress

LOOPBACK TEST

IN D4 MAINTENANCE

BANK

&~&edL
on 1S MBTS

[26] Depress POWER switches


and RECEIVER

[27] SW switches

on test

on

POWER

TRANSMITTER

sets

ON

lamps lighted

per TABLEC

on test
[28] Verify that CLOCKindicators
sets are lighted
[NOTE 3]
7
[29]

Install
channel unit into CUT slot
verify
it is connected per
FIG. 1, Page 1

[30

Verify BYTE PATTERN indicators


2 thru 8
light on RECEIVER, then depress ALL 1s
~1
[NOTE4]
on TRANSMITTER

[31

Observe that
counts

[33] Obtain another


channel unit and
repeat procedure.
Return faulty
unit for repair

counter display
then momentarily operate

RECEIVER

errors,

~ER

and

MODE switch

to RESET

I
TABLE
TRANSMITTER

RESET

Depress

MODE

REPEAT

FUNCTION TEST WORD2047


BIPOLAR
ouTPuT
DATARATE 56

TEST

for

SWITCH

POSITION

COUNTERMODE COUNT
COUNTER
ERRORSBIT
TEST WORD
2047

IN

BIPOLAR

INPUT

DD, 9.6 for DA DATARATE

DATAPORT CHANNEL UNITS

RECEIVER

POSITION

SWITCH

D4

56 for DD, 9.6

MAINTENANCE

for DA

BANK

NOTES
If clock
indicators
do not
light,
test
connections
and
OIU-2
should
be checked
BYTE

PATTERN

indicator
1 will
light whentesting
J98726DD
unit

%!?$?7%

Using dual

channel

swlARY
oscilloscope,

monitor

connector terminals 11 and 12 for


terminals 51 and 52, and 53 and 54 for

OIU

signal

clock

EXT

timing

LOC or

LT

at

or at
timing.

(1] Obtain dual channel oscilloscope

with invert switch on one channel


and an add display mode ._l

and set
[2] Energize oscilloscope
each channel to 5 volts per
vertical division and 20 I%ec
per horizontal division

[3] What type


of timing optio
is selected on
OIU faceplate
EXT

[4]
At back of bank
connect oscilloscope
probes to OIU connector
terminals
51-52, then to
terminals
53-54. Observe
that waveforms at each
pair of terminals
match
those of FIG. 1

[5) Determine external clock source


cable length to bank
probes to
[6] Connect oscilloscope
terminals 11 and 12 of office
interface unit (OIU) connector
at back of bank

YJ-J
\

[7] Refer to FIG. 2, 3, 4 , or 5, Pages


2, 3, and 4 for cable length determined
in Step 5, and monitor external
clock pulses [NOTE1]

No

No

-F

[10] Replace
OIU

[11 ] Refer
trouble
to
engineering

LVERIFY

CLOCK SIGNAL IS

PRESENT AT BANK,

USING OSCILLOSCOPE

NOTE 1
FIGS, 2 thru 5 give
waveforms for four
lengths of cables.
Monitored waveform
should reasonably
match one shown for
cable length closest
to actual cable
length determined
in
Step 5

FIG. 1 Clock
51-52

Pulses
at
and 53-54

OIU Output
With

Terminals
133 ohm Termination

133 ohm resistor


plus O to 6 J98726AL-1, L2 OIU-2S
$ 133 ohm resistor
plus one J98726AL-1, L1 or one
J98726AL.1, Ll, ModAand O to 5 J98726AL-1, L2
OIUs

FIG. 2 - Clock

VERIFY

CLOCK SIGNAL

IS

PRESENT AT BANK,

Pulses

USING OSCILLOSCOPE

Cable

Length

50 Feet

or

Less

I
,

133 ohm resistor


plus O to 6
J98726AL-1, L2 OIU-2S
$ 133 ohm resistor
plus one
J98726A.L-1, L1 or one
J98726AL-1, Ll, mod A and O to 5
J98726ALs1, L2 OIU-2S

FIG.

3 -

Clock Pulses

Cable

Length

500 Feet

* 133 ohm resistor


J98726AL-1, L2
~ 133 ohm resistor
J98726AL-1, L1
J98726AL-1, Ll,
J98726AL-1, L2

plus O to 6
OIU-2S
plus one
or one
mod A and O to 5
OIU-2S

$
t

FIG. 4 - Clock

VERIFY

CLOCK SIGNAL IS

PUISOS

Coble Length

1000 Feet

PRESENT AT BANK, USING OSCILLOSCOPE

* 133 ohm resistor


i 133 ohm resistor

plus O to 6 J98726AL-1, L2 OIU-2S


plus one J98726AL-1, L1 or one
5 J98726AL-1, L2
J98726AL-1, Ll, &AandOto

OIU-2S

FIG. 5 Clock Pulses - Cablo

VERIFY

Length

1500 Feet

CLOCK SIGNAL IS PRESENT AT BANK, USING OXI LLOSCOPE

sumARY

Using voltmeter
at rear of bank, measure for -72 volts at
pin 16 of each channel unit slot connector that requires
channel unit with 72 volt option.

[1] Obtain KS-1451O V(X!or KS-20599


digital
voltmeter,
or equivalent
and prepare meter to read
-72 volts dc

Yes
[2]

At rear of bank, measure between


ground (with VOMred lead) and pin
16 (with VOMblack lead) of channel
slot containing
channel unit~
requiring
72 volt option

l-F--
[5] Refer
trouble to
engineering

VERIFY

-72

VOLTS PRESENT AT D4 CHANNEL

BANK

[4] Repeat
Steps 2 and 3 on
all channel slots
being turned up
requiring

-72 volts

[ 1] Obtain SPTS
install
in any
channel unit slot.
Verify far end
installs
SPTS in
same channel slot

[2] Perform steps


of TABLEA and
have far end

and

observe lamps per


TABLEA

A toO
Btol

[3] Have far


end perform
steps of TABLEA
and you observe
lamps per TABLEA

1
\

No
+

[6] Have end


with trouble
refer to.
TAP-117]

PEftFWt#V.EiW-TO-END

TABLE A

SIGNALING

TEST

B only

[ 1] From
information
on
WORDor CLRC,
set options JI
and J2 [NOTE 1]
[FIG. 1] [DLP-565]

STEP 1

FIG. 1

NOTE 1
Option J1 (DIV) is
selected
by inserting
plug into black side
(white showing).
Option J2 (M/S) is
selected by inserting
plug into applicable
side of connector
Issue

MAR

36S-170-000

SET OPTIONS

SEC STA CHAWEL

UNIT

(J98726GA)

PAGE

1 of

1982
DLP

630

[1] From information


on WORDor CLRC, set
options Jl, J2, J4,
J5, and J9 [tWE 1]
[FIG. 1] [DLP-565]

-J

DIV

JI
fm

la

3130

J9

H.+

J5

NOTE 1
Option J5 (DIV) is
selected
by
inserting
plug into
black side (white
showing). Options
J1

(3/30),

and

J9

J2

(+/)

(M/S),
are

selected
by insertin~
plugs into applicabl[
side of connectors.
Option J4 is
selected

by

inserting
both
into
applicable
positions.
Both
M, or

%?%7%

SET

OPTIONS

SEC OFF

CHANNEL

UNIT

(J98726GB)

plugs

Example:

in

H,
both

both
in L

in

ITEM

TPG-000
IXL-001
NTP.002

NTP-003
NTP.004
.NTP.005

NTP-006
NTP-007
NTP.008
NTP-009
NTP-O1O
TAD-1OO
TAP-101
TAP.102
*TAP-103
.TAP-104
TAP.105
*TAP-106
.TAP-107
TAP-108
TAP-109
TAP-11O
TAP-111
eTAP.112
TAP-113
TAP-li4
TAP-115
TAP-116
OTAP-117
TAP-118
= TAP.119
TAP-120
oTAP-121
TAP-122

TAP-124
TAP-125
9 TAP-126
TAP-127
TAP-128
*TAP-129
DLP-500
DLP-501
DLP-502
DLP-503
DLP-504
DLP-505
DLP-506
DLP-507
DLP-508
DLP-509
DLP-51O
DLP-511
DLP.512
DLP.513
@DLP-514
DLP-515
DLP-516
DLP-517
DLP-518
DLP-519
DLP-520
DLP-521
DLP-522
DLP-523
DLP-524
o DLP-525
DLP-526
DLP-527
DLP.528

TAP-

123

:HECKLIST

m m

ITEM

ISSUE

ISSUI

ITEM

---tK=-

ITEM

DLP-535
DLP-536
DLP-537
DLP-538
DLP-539
DLP-540
DLP-541
DLP-542

DLP-568
DLP-569

DLP-575
@DLP-576
o DLP-577
@DLP-578
@DLP-579
o DLP-580
DLP-581
DLP-582
6 DLP-583
DLP-584
o DLP-585
. DLP.586
DLP.587
s DLP-588
DLP-589
DLP-590
DLP-591
DLP-592

--i-l-H%DLP-545
DLP-546
DLP-547

11

-it%H%DLP-550
DLP-551
DLP-552
DLP-553
DLP-554
e DLP-555
DLP-556
DLP-557

---H--

-H--%%%
I

REVISED OR ADOED ITEH

II

DLP-560
DLP-561
DLP-562
DLP-563

ITEM

I
I

H-%-H+

ITEM

DLP-603
DLP-604

DLP-61O
DLP-611
DLP-612
II DLP-613
DLP-614
DLP-615
e DLP-616
DLP-617
DLP-618
DLP-619
DLP-620
IJ @DLP-621
II DLP-622
DLP-623
* DLP-624
DLP-625
* DLP-626
DLP-627
DLP-628
DLP-629
DLP-630
DLP-631
CKL-891
TNG-893

e
II

II

Ei--LJ

CAMCELEO ITEM

Issul

DPL-895

J-----u II

lr

I ISSUEII

m-

PAGE

1 of

1891

This book is called a Task Oriented Practice


or TOP. It
is a special type of Bell System Practice
(BSP). It is a
programmed document that gives step-by-step
instructions
to enable you to do a job (or task). A TOP can be a very
useful aid in doing your everyday work if you use it
correctly.
An important thing to remember about TOP is that it is a
programmed document giving step-by-step
instructions
to do
a job. Since the instructions
are given in the order that
they must be done, you cannot enter a procedure except at
the beginning.
You must do the step-by-step
instructions
in the order given, Failure to follow the instructions
in
the proper order may cause service
interruptions.
Another thing to remember about TOP is that it contains all
the instructions
that you need to do a job. If you are
experienced on a particular
job, Top will provide YOUwith
just that information
you need to do the job. If you are
doing the job for the first
time, you will be given step-bystep instructions
with enough detail
so that you will not
have to guess or remember where to find the necessary
details.
Remember that TOP can provide you with just that
information
you need regardless
of your experience
in doing
a job.
The work that you do can be classified
into two broad job
categories
- Trouble Clearing and Non Trouble Clearing.
This is how TOP defines these two types of work:
Trouble Clearing
Trouble clearing
is simply what it says - that work you
do to clear and repair troubles
in the system. Trouble
clearing may be done in answering a customer complaint
or in responding to an office alarm, a trouble report,
or an abnormal TTY printout,
etc.

HOW TO USE

TOP

Non Trouble

Clearing

Non trouble clearing


is simply what it says - that work
you do which is not connected with trouble clearing.
This type is work that you do to accept a system after
it has been installed,
turn up a system for service,
maintain a system according to a controlled
maintenance
plan, etc.
Now glance briefly
at the front cover. In the upper right
corner is a 9-digit
number. This number is the BSP number
for the volume. Near the center is the title
of the
volume which tells
you something about the ccntents,
such as the system (or subsystem) name and perhaps what
kind of jobs are included in the volume. Next is the
decision-action-logic
diagram which directs
you either to
this training
package or to 001 depending on your ability
to use TOP.
Now turn to FIG. 1 which shows a typical
page of 001. In
the lower left is the title,
TASK INDEXLIST which tells
you something about this list,
such as it is a listing
of
tasks arranged in alphabetical
order. This list is
actually
a listing
of the tasks included in the volume.
The tasks are listed
in alphabetical
order and permuted
on key words to simplify
locating a task. On the right
side of the page is a column of reference
numbers under
locate the job
the heading THENGO TO. To use this list,
to be done and turn to the reference
number in the THEN
GO TO column.
assume
that
you have been assigned
the task of
performing a system test on a system covered by a TOP. On
001 in FIG. 1, locate the job System Test. Notice that
this entry tells
you to go to NTP-016 under the THENGO
TO column. Next you will have to locate the procedure,
NTP-016. All procedures
in a TOP are arranged in numerical
sequence. In actual use of TOP, you would simply turn to

Now

FIND

YWRJOEIN

THE LIST

BELOW

Alert, External - Horn, Ringer, Etc

- Remove .

=16.30

. .

BRDGLED -Does Not Light-Correct.

. . .

. . . . . .

Bridging Controller; Trunk -JlC015M8 -Replace


Channel Amplifiers - Recorded

. .

. .

. .

. . . . . . . .

Alert

Interchange

-Horn,

Ringer,

TwoWorkingStation

LED; BRDG-Does
Loudspeaker
Loudspeaker;

Not Light-

Spokesman@ Loudspeaker-Remove
Capability;

System

Test-Perform.

Trunk

Bridging

Wiper;

Extended

Controller

Failure

. .

. . . . . . . , ,

Systems

. ,

. .

.,

. . . . .

.
.

. . . ,

Set Only-Reported

Failure

-Replace
16-30

. . . . .
. . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

NTP-O1O

TAP-123
NTP-028

, .

TAP-117

twP-059

. .

NTP.006

. . , . , .
. .

. .

NTP.009

NTP-081

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. .

TAP-117
DLP-572

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-JlCOlSM6

TAP.105
.

. . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ALMRAbb-bb=

THEN GOTO

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

- AR03PWR

Drum -Contnon

. . . . . . . .

-Nonkey

..

NTP.009

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SPOKESKANa-Remove

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Numbers . . . . . .
Correct

Paging-Add

Station

TTY Printout

Etc.-Remove

. . . .

Drum Wiper - CormnonSystems Recorded Announcement Frame - Inspect . . . . . .

External

. . . . . . .

Set Only - Reported

NrP-028

. . . . . . . . . ,

Announcement Frame - Test

Extended Station Capability - Nonkey

. .

Amplifiers; Channel - Recorded Announcement Frame - Test


AR03PUR ALllRAbb-bb

. .

. .

NTP-O06
TAP.123
NTP-016

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DLP-572

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TAP.105

. . . .

. . .

RecordedAnnouncement
Frame- Inspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Issw

NrP.010

1 1 DEC 1980
123-4S6-789
I IXL

ASK

INOEX LIST

PA6E 2 of 2

(Contd)

FIG.

HOW TO USE TOP

001

the procedure.
Look over the following example which shows
a typical page of NTP-016. Note that the items are numbered
in the left column. They must be completed in that order.
You will also note that in item 2 there are some lettered
items are optional
ways to
(A, B, C) items. These lettered
do an item, that is you only have to do one of the lettered
items.

should go ahead and do it without going to the referenced


details
in the FOR DETAILS, GO TO column. If, on the
details
on how to do the
other hand, you need additional
item, then you should turn to the procedure listed
in
the FOR DETAILS, GO TO column. In either case, after
completing an item, you should continue with the next
item.

Remember that this procedure gives you all the items that
must be done and the order in which they must be done to
complete the job. If you know how to do an item, you

A TOP is designed so that you have to read only what is


necessary to get your job done. If you know how to do an
item, look no further
for the how to information
- just

DO THE ITEMS
1

Obtain

BELOW IN

Support

Apparatus

Hewlett-Packard

o 2P4C PatchinR
2

Place

THE ORDER LISTED


Listed

FOR DETAILS,

GO TO

Below:

3531A Transmission

Measuring

Set

Cord

SEC/SEB in Off-Line

Mode
DLP-509

A. If in On-Line Mode, Change System From On-Line to Off-Line


B. If Powered Down, Condition

I
I

as Follows:
DLP503

2. Power up Line Printer

DLP-528
DLP-51O

Terminal

Computer Display
Termina~est
.
.

Mount

Operation

1. Power UP Minicomputer
3. Power up Maintenance

m--l--Run

System for Off-Line

for All Positions

DLP -500

Tape
Issue

I DEC

NTP

123-456-789

PERFORM

SYSTEM

HOW TO USE TOP

TEST

PAGE

1 of

1980

016

do the item and go on to the next item. This idea is


called bypassing
in TOP. In addition
to not having to
look further
for details,
three other ways of bypassing
are provided
in TOP to help you bypass reading information
you already know (see FIG. 2):
Summary Statement
summary statement
is used with a procedure to tell
you briefly
how to do the procedure and what type
measurement or result
can be observed.
If you can do
the procedure after reading the summary, go ahead
and do it without reading any further.
Simple
procedures may not have summaries.

Result

The support procedure


[DLP-530] provides the information
on how to operate the VTVM.Here again, if you already
know how to operate the VTVM,go ahead and do it without
looking up any further
information.
Now assume that you are doing a system test on a system
covered by a TOP. In the process of doing this test you
are instructed
to mount a tape. For the purposes of this
example, assume that you do not know how to mount the tape
and must look up additional
details.
Figure 2 on Page 5
shows you examples of bypassing that can be used. Take a
few moments to examine this figure and make svre you
understand
the techniques
of bypassing.
While using a TOP, you will
reference
similar
to this:

Statement

probably

run across

A result statement may be used in a flow-charted


procedure along with the ANDsymbol. If, after
reading the results
statement,
YOU know how to do
the action indicated,
go ahead and do it without
reading the steps associated
with the ANDsymbol.

When you

it refers

the following kind of reference


to a support procedure:

see

No

Support Procedures

in TOP

f-m%-)
This reference
to TAP-103 indicates
that the equipment is
not operating
correctly,
and that you should refer to
TAP-103 and clear this trouble condition.
After clearing
the trouble,
you should reenter the flowchart at the
beginning (Step 1).

HOW TO USE TOP

I-=-=-H

SLMARY

Summary Statement
the procedure
after

Mount empty take-up reel

and proper file reel with write


enable ring (if required).
Release brakes. Thread tape and
wind onto take-up reel. Advance tape until
it stops at
beginning of tape marker.
II] Get file

reel
empty take-up

Set

ahead and do it.


&
Results

and
reel

Statement

go ahead
I

[2]

If
you can do
reading,
go

3,

and do it

If

you ean do this

without

reading

action,

Steps

1,

2,

and 4.

START/STOP

switch

to STOP

[5] Is data
to be written
on tape

[3] Set ON LINS/OFF LI@E


switch to OFF LX*

Yes
*

[7] Install
write enable
ring on file
ree 1

Page 2

No
[4] Set LOAD/BR REL switch
to center position

+
[6] Ensure that
write enable
ring is not
installed
on file
reel [DLP-563] ~
Support
this

&

FIG.

HOW TO USE TOP

DLP -

step,

1+ you know how to do

go ahead and do it

looking up the DLP.

without

A TOP shows hard-wired and plug-in units


Diagrams (ISD) in the following manner:

This idea can be carried further.


In some cases, a
decision block may have more than one abnormal output.
This means that you should try more than one solution
the problem. See the example below.

to

Elll

Hard-Wired

do a job safely.
heed in TOP:

TT19i!&5iKbe
,HRcearthe
Always

~-

7
[6]

Adjust

of

repeater

[DLP-540]

gain
A22

When the
reading

eter
is

found

be incorrect,
first
action
adjust

repeater

to

the
is to
A22

Trouble-clearing
information
in TOP is used basically
the
same way as non trouble-clearing
information.
When an
alarm or trouble report requires
you to troubleshoot
a
system covered by a TOP, the TASK INDEXLIST (IXL-001) is
After locating
your job on IXL-001 you
the place to start.
will be referenced
to a Trouble Analysis Procedure (TAP)
to find the information
to aid in the location
of the
trouble.
The TAP may reference
to other information,
such
as Trouble Analysis Data (TAD) or Isolation
Diagram (ISD)
as an aid in the trouble-clearing
process.
Now assume that you have to clear a major alarm on a
terminal in a system covered by a TOP. Figure 3 on Page 7
shows how to access and how to use trouble-clearing
information.

HOW TO USE TOP

on Isolation

Er-El
Irvl

Plug-In

Below are three

- means there

things

you should

is a possibility

OfpersOnal
injury

- means there is a possibility


of service interruptions

- means there

is a possibility

fequipmentdamag

TABLEA on Page 8 shows some of the more important


and definitions.

symbols

While using

TOP, if you find errors,


or if a procedure is
or missing,
call the TOP HOTLINEnumber shown
on the front
cover. your comments are greatly
needed to
help prepare better documentation.
Comments may also be
forwarded us ng form E3973 which is available
through your
company.
inadequate

Now that you know how to use TOP, return


find the job you need to do.

to IXL-001 and

]FINDYOUR
I Alert;

JOB
External

IN
-

Wiper;

TASK

LIST

Horn, Ringer,

Major - Clear
TTY Printout

THE

~ELOW

Etc.

- Remove

\\

. . . ~

-AR03PWR ALMRAbb-bb

=16-30.
<M

..

TtIENw

, . . . . ,

T0l

~P.028

. .

$&)

LIST

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Drum - CoammrISystems Recorded Announcement Fra

INDEX

. . ,

. , ,

NTP-

(Contd)

11--!?J#

~-

71,
Inn
37
(J13)

\
lamps
lighted on units in
both channel groups
or only one channel
group

PE270RN

g ALfw!sl

[3] Are alarm

18

T
FoJ

(J;7]

LDE

Js X

.l(j

FW 104

[2] Replace
power regulator

m,
31
I.M?)

____lLE?
MAJOR

ALARM S

CLEAR MAJOR ALARM AT TERMINAL

FIG.

HOW TO US-E TOP

F=aR

TABLE
IMPORTANT

TOP

SYMBOLS

A
AND

DEFINITIONS
OEFINITIH

SYMBOL

The ANDoperation
symbol is used where the successful
completion of a group
of instructions
accomplishes
a meaningful result
that can be defined.
The symbol indicates
that each input instruction
must be performed
in
the order
given to accomplish the output (result
statement).
In instances
where results
cannot be defined,
results
statements
are not provided.

[1]

The flow-through
symbol relates
expected observable
result(s).

The end-of-procedure

graphically

symbol denotes

The reference
bubble symbol indicates
continuation
page or to trouble-clearing
point of a procedure.
Acceptance

(NTP-002)

Maintenance
(TAD-100)
Checklist

Philosophy

(CKL-891)

Documentation
(DPL-895 )

Plan

Acceptance

gives

an overview

that

a single

instruction

the procedure

to the

has been completed,

an exit from a page (either


to a
data) or indicates
the starting

of the acceptance

The maintenance philosophy,


when provided,
gives
considerations
designed into the trouble-clearing

techniques

and facilities.

an overview
procedures.

of the

The checklist
reflects
the volume content (inventory)
at any given time,
the issue identifier
of each data element therein,
those data elements
revised and/or added, and those data elements deleted from a previous
issue.
The documentation

plan gives

a birds-eye

view of all

the TOP volumes

covering a system. This plan can help you to quickly determine the
correct volume.

HOW TO USE TOP

D4 CHANNEL BANK
TOP DOCUMENTAT ION

T1 LINE

CH#D~EL
BAMK

TOP 365-170-000

TOP 385-800-002

TIC LINE

TOP 365-271-000

T2 LINE

365-500-501

Al
B-

TOP 335-170-OM

11 LINE
DID, D2,
OR D3
CHAWEL
6ANK

04

CHANNEL
6ANK

Hlc

TIC LINE

TDP 385-672-000

t
TOP 365-170-000

TOP 365-8D0-001

2 +

365-600-310

DOCUMENTATION PLAN

You might also like